JP6883624B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a "pachinko machine").

Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine in which a lottery is performed for a jackpot game that is advantageous to the player based on the entry of the gaming ball into the starting port.

With this type of gaming machine, the game from winning the lottery to the jackpot game is monotonous, and the interest tends to decline. Therefore, in such a gaming machine, various productions are performed with ingenuity in order to excite the interest. As such an effect, for example, Patent Document 1 discloses a gaming machine in which a fear-imparting effect is performed to produce a realistic effect.

JP-A-2007-105248

However, even with the above-mentioned gaming machines, there was a concern that the interest in gaming would decline.

Therefore, in view of the above problems, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine in which a decrease in the interest in gaming is suppressed.

The gaming machine according to claim 1 is
A starting port that allows the game ball to enter or pass through,
A lottery means for determining a win based on the entry or passage of a game ball into the starting port, and
On condition that the result of the winning determination is a hit, a special game execution means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player, and a special game execution means.
A fluctuation pattern determining means for determining a fluctuation pattern based on the result of the winning determination,
A display effect determining means for determining a display effect to be executed based on the effect command when an effect command transmitted from the main board is received based on the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determining means.
A display effect executing means capable of executing the display effect determined by the display effect determining means, and a display effect executing means.
The display effect is produced based on a command transmitted from the main board at a timing different from the determination of the display effect determining means and different from the effect command used to determine the variation pattern. An additional production decision means for deciding whether or not to execute in addition to
With
Based on the decision to add and execute the stimulus sound effect to the display effect, the stimulus sound effect is executed.
When the stimulus sound effect is executed, the detection effect can be executed so that it can be detected that the stimulus sound effect is executed.
The detection effect is an effect including a plurality of modes, and when the detection effect becomes a specific aspect, the stimulus sound effect is executed.
It is characterized in that the mode of the stimulus sound effect can be visually recognized even in a situation where the sound of the stimulus sound effect is not audibly output when the stimulus sound effect is executed.

According to the present invention, the production can be preferably performed, and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the main body frame with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko machine which concerns on embodiment, and opened the door frame with respect to the main body frame. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the rear of the outer frame, the main body frame, the game board, and the door frame which make up a pachinko machine. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, the main body frame, the game board, and the door frame which make up a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of the outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame. It is a front view of the outer frame. It is a rear perspective view of the outer frame. It is a right side view of the outer frame. It is a perspective view for demonstrating the attachment / detachment structure of the upper shaft support metal fitting of the main body frame, and the upper support metal fitting of an outer frame. (A) is an exploded perspective view showing an attached state of a lock member provided on the back surface of the upper support metal fitting of the outer frame, and (B) is a perspective view of the figure of (A) viewed from below. It is a back view of the upper support metal fitting part for demonstrating the relationship between a shaft support pin and a lock member. It is a back view of the upper support metal fitting part for demonstrating the operation of the lock member. It is a front view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is a perspective view seen from the right rear of the door frame. It is an exploded perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the side speaker and the side speaker cover disassembled from the door frame and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled a side speaker and a side speaker cover from a door frame, and looked at afterwards. (A) is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit and looked at from the back. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame base board cover and the wiring holding member in a door frame base unit from the rear view. It is an enlarged perspective view which shows the state of the wiring which electrically connects a door frame and a main body frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame. It is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit disassembled and viewed later. (A) is a front perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame. It is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit disassembled and viewed later. It is a front perspective view of the upper decorative unit in a door frame. It is a rear perspective view of the upper decorative unit in a door frame. It is an exploded perspective view of the upper decorative unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which looked at after disassembling the upper decoration unit. It is a front perspective view of the dish unit in a door frame. It is a rear perspective view of the dish unit in a door frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish unit and looked at afterwards. It is a front perspective view of the operation unit in a door frame. It is a rear perspective view of the operation unit in a door frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the operation unit and looked at from the upper right front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the operation unit and looked at from the lower right front. It is sectional drawing of the operation unit. It is sectional drawing which shows the pressing operation part in the operation unit in a pressed state. It is an exploded perspective view after disassembling the handle device in the door frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the foul cover unit in the door frame and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the foul cover unit in the door frame and looked at later. It is a front view which shows with the front cover of a foul cover unit removed. It is a front perspective view of the ball feed unit in a door frame. It is a rear perspective view of the ball feed unit in a door frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the ball feed unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which looked at after removing the rear case of a ball feed unit. It is a front view which shows the arrangement of LED for light-emitting decoration in a door frame. It is a front view which shows the system of LED for light-emitting decoration in a door frame. It is a front view of the main body frame. It is a rear view of the main body frame. It is a front perspective view of the main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the main body frame. It is a left side view of the main body frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the main body frame and looked at from the front. It is a perspective view which disassembled the main body frame and looked at afterwards. It is a front perspective view of the main body frame base in the main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the main body frame base in the main body frame. It is a front perspective view of the hitting ball launching device in the main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the hitting ball launching device in the main body frame. It is a front perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main body frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the prize ball unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the prize ball unit and looked at later. It is an exploded perspective view which shows from the rear by disassembling the relationship between a prize ball tank and a tank rail unit in a prize ball unit. It is an exploded perspective view which looked at after disassembling the prize ball device in a prize ball unit. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between the payout passage, the payout motor, and the payout rotating body in a prize ball device. It is sectional drawing which shows the circulation passage of a ball in a prize ball unit. It is a front perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the ball outlet opening / closing unit in a main body frame, and the foul cover unit in a door frame. It is a front perspective view of the substrate unit in the main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the substrate unit in the main body frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the substrate unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the substrate unit and looked at afterwards. It is a perspective view explaining the operation of the standing wall part of the power supply board box in a board unit. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the terminal board box in the board unit, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the terminal board box in the board unit as viewed from the front. (A) is a front view of the firing power supply board box, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA shown in (A). (A) is a front perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame. It is sectional drawing which shows the part of the fastening mechanism in the back cover in an enlarged manner. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the fastening mechanism in the back cover and looked at from the rear side. (A) is a left side view of the lock device in the main body frame, and (B) is a perspective view of the lock device in the main body frame as viewed from the front. (A) is a rear perspective view of the lock device, and (B) is a rear perspective view showing a sliding rod for a glass door and a sliding rod for a main body frame slidably provided inside the U-shaped base of the lock device. It is a figure, (C) is a front perspective view of (B). It is an exploded perspective view after disassembling the lock device. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation of the sliding rod for a glass door and the sliding rod for a main body frame in a locking device. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation of the fraud prevention member in a lock device. It is a front view which shows the game board attached to the main body frame with the door frame of a pachinko machine removed. It is a front view of a game board. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board and looked at later. It is a front view which shows the function display unit in a game board enlarged in the state which is attached to a pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective view of a game board using a game panel of an embodiment different from the example of FIG. 100, which is viewed from the front by disassembling. FIG. 103 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as viewed from the rear. It is sectional drawing which cut the game panel in the game board of FIG. 103 in the vertical direction. It is a partial cross-sectional view which shows the security structure on the shaft support side of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view seen from the rear side with the game board housed in the main body frame. It is a detailed front view of the game board. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 108 as viewed from the front by disassembling. It is a block diagram which shows schematic | control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the power-source system of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the continuation of FIG. 111. It is a block diagram which shows the drive circuit of a firing solenoid. It is a circuit diagram which shows the shunt regulator circuit, the amplifier circuit, and the operational amplifier circuit group. It is a figure which shows the characteristic of a DC / DC converter. It is a timing chart of a predetermined point in the drive circuit of the firing solenoid of FIG. 113. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power failure occurrence. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special control process. It is a flowchart which shows the start opening winning process. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing during fluctuation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot game start processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the small hit game start processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot game processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a small hit game processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table structure in the random number storage means for a special symbol. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the sub-main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of 16ms steady processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the decorative symbol variation start processing (step S1210). It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure about the 1st hit lottery in a main control board. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure about the 2nd winning lottery in a main control board. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure about the advantageous game state which occurs according to the lottery result in the 1st hit lottery and the 2nd hit lottery. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure about the ordinary lottery on a main control board. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure about the effect on a peripheral control board.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the entire pachinko machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 7. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame is opened with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko machine according to the embodiment and the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 3 is a right side view of the pachinko machine. Further, FIG. 4 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 5 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. Further, FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame, the main body frame, the game board, and the door frame constituting the pachinko machine, and FIG. 7 is an outer frame, the main body frame, and the game board constituting the pachinko machine. , It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the door frame.

In FIGS. 1 to 7, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is pivotally supported by an outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall and an outer frame 2 so that the front side is opened. A player has a box-shaped main body frame 3, a game board 4 having a game area 1100 mounted and fixed to the main body frame 3 from the front side and a game ball as a game medium is driven into the main body frame 3, and the front surface of the main body frame 3 and the game board 4. It is provided with a door frame 5 that is pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 3 so as to be closed from the side. In the door frame 5 of the pachinko machine 1, a game window 101 formed so that the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be seen from the player side, and a game ball arranged below the game window 101 are stored. It includes a plate-shaped upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302, and a handle device 500 operated by a player to drive a game ball stored in the upper plate 301 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4.

As shown in the figure, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 are each formed in a vertically long rectangular shape extending in the vertical direction in the front view, and each in the left-right direction. The width of the main frame 3 and the door frame 5 are slightly shorter than the outer frame 2 in the vertical width. A decorative cover 23 is attached to the front surface of the outer frame 2 at a position below the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5, and the front surface of the outer frame 2 is completely closed by the door frame 5 and the decorative cover 23. It has become so. Further, the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 are arranged so that the upper ends are substantially aligned with each other, and the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be rotated at a position on the front side of the left end of the outer frame 2. It is supported, and is opened by moving the right ends of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 to the front side with respect to the outer frame 2.

In the front view of the pachinko machine 1, the game area 1100 in which the game ball is driven faces through the game window 101 having a substantially circular shape, and the pachinko machine 1 projects forward to the lower side of the game window 101. Two upper plates 301 and lower plates 302 are arranged one above the other. Further, a handle device 500 for the player to operate is arranged in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 5, and the player operates the handle device 500 in a state where the game balls are stored in the upper plate 301. When the rotation operation is performed, the game ball in the upper plate 301 is driven into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with the hitting strength corresponding to the rotation angle, and the game can be played.

Although the details will be described later, the game window 101 of the door frame 5 is closed by the transparent glass unit 590, and the player can visually recognize the inside of the game area 1100, but the player can see the inside of the game area 1100. It is not possible to touch the game ball, obstacle nails, various winning openings, accessories, etc. in the game area 1100 by inserting a hand or the like into the game area. Further, on the rear side of the main body frame 3, various control boards are provided, and a cover body 1250 that closes so as to cover the rear of the game board 4 is provided.

[1-1. Outer frame]
The outer frame 2 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 8 to 16. FIG. 8 is a front perspective view of the outer frame, FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, and FIG. 10 is a front view of the outer frame. 11 is a rear perspective view of the outer frame, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. Further, FIG. 13 is a perspective view for explaining a detachable structure of the upper shaft support metal fitting of the main body frame and the upper support metal fitting of the outer frame. 14 (A) is an exploded perspective view showing an attached state of a lock member provided on the back surface of the upper support metal fitting of the outer frame, and (B) is a perspective view of the figure of (A) viewed from below. .. FIG. 15 is a back view of the upper support metal fitting portion for explaining the relationship between the shaft support pin and the lock member. Further, FIG. 16 is a back view of the upper support metal fitting portion for explaining the operation of the lock member.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes the upper and lower upper frame plates 10 and the lower frame plates 11 extending in the horizontal direction, and the left and right sides extending in the vertical (vertical) direction. The frame plates 12, 13 and four connecting members 14 for connecting the ends of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, 13 are provided, and the connecting members 14 are used to connect the frame plates 10, 11, 12, 13 respectively. By connecting them together, they are assembled into a vertically long rectangular shape (square). The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 in the outer frame 2 of this example are made of solid wood (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness, and are vertically and vertically located substantially in the center of the left and right ends in the front-rear direction. An engaging notch portion 15 is provided which penetrates the surface and is recessed toward the center in the left-right direction. A mounting step portion 10a recessed from other general surfaces is formed on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion of the upper frame plate 10, and the upper support metal fitting 20 described later is attached to the mounting step portion 10a. It has become like.

On the other hand, the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of a lightweight metal mold material (for example, an aluminum alloy) having a constant cross-sectional shape, the outer side surface is a substantially flat surface, and the inner side surface projects inward to the rear end portion. A projecting portion 16 having a cavity penetrating in the vertical direction (extrusion direction) is provided, and the strength and rigidity are enhanced (see FIGS. 9 and 106). A plurality of grooves extending in the vertical direction are formed on the outer side surface and the inner side surface of the side frame plates 12 and 13, and when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island equipment of the game hall, the operator The pachinko machine 1 can be easily held by a finger hook, and the design of the appearance can be enhanced. For convenience, there is also a drawing in which a plurality of grooves formed on the side surfaces of the side frame plates 12 and 13 are omitted.

The connecting member 14 in the outer frame 2 of this example is formed by bending and plastically deforming a metal plate having a predetermined thickness by press molding or the like, and is fixed to the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11 in the left-right direction. A plate-shaped horizontal piece 17 extending in the vertical direction, a plate-shaped vertical piece 18 extending vertically from the outer end of the horizontal piece 17 to one side in the vertical direction and fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13, and the opposite of the vertical piece 18. It has a plate-shaped engaging piece 19 that extends in the direction and can be inserted and engaged in the engaging notch 15 of the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11. In this example, the connecting member 14 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the right side frame plate 13 are asymmetrical, respectively. In addition to being formed in the shape of, the vertical piece 18 is formed separately in the front and rear. On the other hand, the connecting member 14 that connects the lower frame plate 11 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 that connects the lower frame plate 11 and the right side frame plate 13 are formed in symmetrical shapes, respectively. Has been done.

In the connecting member 14, the upper surface and the lower surface of the horizontal piece 17 are in contact with the lower surface and the upper surface of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and the engaging piece 19 is an engaging notch of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11. The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame are screwed into the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 by penetrating the horizontal piece 17 and the engaging piece 19 and screwing a predetermined screw into the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 while being inserted and engaged in the portion 15. It is fixed to the plate 11. Further, the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 penetrates the side frame plates 12 and 13 with a predetermined screw in a state where the vertical piece 18 is in contact with the upper end inner side surface of the side frame plates 12 and 13. Is screwed into the vertical piece 18, so that the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected to each other. The vertical piece 18 on the rear side of the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 is fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13 in a state of being inserted into the protruding portions 16 of the side frame plates 12 and 13. It has become like. Further, the connecting member 14 fixed to the lower frame plate 11 penetrates the side frame plates 12 and 13 with a predetermined screw in a state where the vertical piece 18 is in contact with the lower end inner side surface of the side frame plates 12 and 13. Is screwed into the vertical piece 18, so that the lower frame plate 11 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected, and the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are connected by the four connecting members 14. , And the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be assembled in a frame shape.

The outer frame 2 of this example is arranged so as to face the upper support metal fitting 20 fixed to the upper surface of the left end of the upper frame plate 10 and the upper support metal fitting 20, and is fixed at a predetermined position inside the lower part of the left side frame plate 12. The lower support metal fitting 21 to be formed, the reinforcing metal fitting 22 arranged to support the lower surface of the lower support metal fitting 21 and fixed so as to connect the left and right side frame plates 12, 13 and fixed to the front surface of the reinforcing metal fitting 22. A decorative cover 23 and a decorative cover 23 are provided. The upper support metal fitting 20 and the lower support metal fitting 21 are for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 so as to be openable and closable.

First, the upper support metal fitting 20 includes a plate-shaped fixing piece 20a fixed to the upper frame plate 10, a support projecting piece 20b protruding forward from the front end of the fixing piece 20a to the front end of the upper frame plate 10, and a support protrusion. A support hook hole 20c formed by being cut out so as to bend from the right end near the front end of the piece 20b toward the center of the tip, and a side frame on the left side that hangs downward from the left end of the fixing piece 20a and the support projecting piece 20b. A plate-shaped hanging fixing piece 20d (see FIG. 14A) that abuts on the outer side surface of the plate 12, and a hanging wall 20e that hangs along the outer edge of the supporting protruding piece 20b that is continuous with the hanging fixing piece 20d (FIG. 14 (A)). 14) and a stop hanging portion 20f (see FIG. 15) that is continuous with the hanging wall 20e and is inclined inward at the inlet end of the support hook hole 20c. The shaft support pin 633 (see FIG. 63) of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 in the main body frame 3 described later is detachably engaged with the support hook hole 20c in the upper support metal fitting 20. Further, the upper support metal fitting 20 can connect the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 by the fixing piece 20a and the hanging fixing piece 20d.

In the upper support metal fitting 20, the strength of the support protrusion 20b is increased by the hanging wall 20e hanging from the outer edge of the support protrusion 20b, and the details will be described later, but when viewed from the front, the support protrusion 20b The lock member 27 arranged on the back surface of the lock member 27 can be concealed so as not to be visible from the player side, so that the appearance of the lock member 27 can be improved. Further, the support hook hole 20c formed in the support projecting piece 20b is bent in a dogleg shape so as to be inclined from the side on the opposite side (right side) where the hanging wall 20e is not formed toward the center of the tip. In addition, the width dimension of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the shaft support pin 633.

On the other hand, the lower support metal fitting 21 is a horizontal fixing piece 21a that is placed and fixed on the reinforcing metal fitting 22, and a vertical fixing piece that rises upward from the left end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a and is fixed to the inner side surface of the left side frame plate 12. 21b, a plate-shaped support projecting piece 21c projecting forward from the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 from the front end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a, and a pin-shaped projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the support projecting piece 21c. The support projection 21d and the like are provided. The main body frame shaft support formed on the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 (see FIG. 66 and the like) of the main body frame 3 described later is inserted into the support protrusion 21d of the lower support metal fitting 21. After inserting the support protrusion 21d of the support metal fitting 21 into the support hole of the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 in the main body frame 3, the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 is locked in the support hook hole 20c. As a result, the main body frame 3 can be easily opened and closed.

Further, as shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 of this example has two closing plates 24 and 25 mounted and fixed inside the right side frame plate 13 so as to be separated from each other by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction. These closing plates 24 and 25 are formed in a substantially L shape in a plan view, and the closing plate 25 arranged on the lower side has a rectangular opening 25a penetrating in the front-rear direction (FIG. 9). The closing plates 24, 25 and the hook portions 1054, 1065 (see FIG. 93) of the lock device 1000, which are attached along the open side of the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. The hook portion 1054, 1065 and the closing plates 24, 25 are disengaged by inserting the key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the locking device 1000 and rotating it in one direction, which will be described in detail later. The main body frame 3 can be opened with respect to the outer frame 2.

Further, the outer frame 2 of this example further includes a guide plate 26 fixed to the upper surface of the right end of the reinforcing metal fitting 22. The guide plate 26 is for smoothly guiding the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and is replaceably mounted and fixed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14 and the like, the outer frame 2 of this example further includes a lock member 27 supported on the back surface of the support projecting piece 20b in the upper support metal fitting 20, and is attached to the support projecting piece 20b by the rivet 28. On the other hand, it is rotatably supported. The lock member 27 is made of synthetic resin and is shorter than the stopper portion 27a that protrudes forward from the position pivotally supported by the rivet 28 and the stopper portion 27a to the right from the position that is pivotally supported by the rivet 28. The operating portion 27b that protrudes, the elastic piece 27c that protrudes from the side opposite to the position pivotally supported by the rivet 28 with respect to the operating portion 27b, and the tip of the stopper portion 27a are formed so as to bulge forward. It is provided with an arc-shaped tip surface 27d. As shown in the figure, the lock member 27 is formed in a substantially L shape by the stopper portion 27a and the operation portion 27b. Further, the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 is formed to have a width narrower than that of the stopper portion 27a and the operation portion 27b, and is formed so as to extend forward as the distance from the stopper portion 27a increases to the left.

As shown in FIGS. 14B and 15, when the lock member 27 is supported by the support protruding piece 20b of the upper support metal fitting 20 (normal state), the tip contact portion of the elastic piece 27c is a hanging wall. It is in contact with the inner surface of the 20e, and the stopper portion 27a closes the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c, and the tip portion of the stopper portion 27a is the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c. The head space portion of the above is not closed, and a space is formed in the head space portion of the support hook hole 20c into which the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 can be inserted. ..

In the support mechanism of the shaft support pin 633 using the upper support metal fitting 20 and the lock member 27 of this example, the shaft support pin 633 is inserted into the tip space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c to form the stopper portion 27a. A state in which the tip side faces the stop hanging portion 20f at the entrance end (in this state, there is a slight gap between the tip side side of the stopper portion 27a and the stop hanging portion 20f, and they are in contact with each other. In the normal shaft support state, the shaft support pin 633 located in the tip space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c formed by bending and the tip surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a, respectively. The centers are offset in the diagonal direction and face each other. Then, in this normal shaft support state, the shaft support pin 633 that supports the heavy main body frame 3 is in contact with the tip end portion of the support hook hole 20c, so that the shaft support pin 633 is in contact with the tip portion of the support hook hole 20c. Since the load on the tip surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a is hardly applied, the load is not applied to the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27. Since the tip of the stopper portion 27a is provided with an arcuate tip surface 27d, the lock member 27 rotates smoothly when the operation portion 27b is rotated to rotate the lock member 27. It has become. Further, in the figure, the arc center of the tip surface 27d is the center of the rivet 28 (the center of rotation of the lock member 27).

Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the shaft support pin 633 comes out along the inclination of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c and comes into contact with the arcuate tip surface 27d, the acting force F is applied to the shaft support. The component force F1 (in the normal direction of the arc of the tip surface 27d) acting on the contact portion between the pin 633 and the arc-shaped tip surface 27d, and one side of the inclined hole portion of the shaft support pin 633 and the support hook hole 20c. When divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the inner surface, the direction of the component force F1 faces the center of the rivet 28 (the center of rotation of the lock member 27), so that the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 The moment for rotating the tip portion in the direction away from the support protrusion piece 20b (clockwise in the figure) does not work, and the shaft support pin 633 is attached to the tip portion of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 and the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c. Holds the state of being sandwiched between the inner surface on one side. Therefore, even in the normal shaft support state or in the state where the acting force of the shaft support pin 633 is applied to the lock member 27, the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 is not constantly loaded, and the elasticity is integrally formed of the synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation due to creep of the piece 27c and prevent the shaft support pin 633 from falling out of the support hook hole 20c for a long period of time. Even if an unreasonable force is applied and the tip of the stopper 27a of the lock member 27 is rotated in a direction away from the support protrusion 20b (clockwise in the figure), one side of the tip of the stopper 27a Does not rotate in the direction of contacting the stop hanging portion 20f and further disengaging, so that the lock member 27 does not protrude to the outside of the support projecting piece 20b.

Even if the shape of the tip surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a is not arcuate, the tip portion of the lock member 27 faces the outside of the support protrusion piece 20b at a position where a rotational moment is not generated by the action of the component force F1 described above. By locating the rotation center of the lock member 27 (the shaft fixed by the rivet 28) at a position where a rotational moment is generated, the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 is not constantly loaded and the lock is locked. The applicant applies that the lock member 27 does not protrude to the outside of the support projecting piece 20b because the one side of the tip of the stopper portion 27a only abuts on the stop hanging portion 20f even if the member 27 rotates. I'm checking.

The operation of the lock member 27 of this example will be specifically described with reference to FIG. As a premise that the main body frame 3 is pivotally supported on the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, a lower support metal fitting is provided in a main body frame shaft support hole (not shown) formed in the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 (see FIG. 63) of the main body frame 3. It is necessary that the support protrusion 21d of 21 is inserted. Under such a premise, as shown in FIG. 16A, by pushing the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 into contact with the side surface of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27, FIG. As shown in 16 (B), since the lock member 27 rotates the elastic piece 27c counterclockwise while deforming it, the shaft support pin 633 can be inserted into the support hook hole 20c. Then, when the shaft support pin 633 reaches the leading space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c, as shown in FIG. 16C, the shaft support pin 633 and the tip side surface of the stopper portion 27a do not come into contact with each other. Therefore, the lock member 27 is urged by the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c to rotate clockwise, and the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 returns to the normal state again to close the inlet portion of the support hook hole 20c at the same time. The tip portion of the stopper portion 27a faces the shaft support pin 633 so that the shaft support pin 633 does not fall out of the support hook hole 20c.

Then, as shown in FIG. 16D, this state is maintained even when the main body frame 3 is completely closed or during the normal opening / closing operation of the main body frame 3. Next, in order to remove the shaft support pin 633 from the support hook hole 20c, as shown in FIG. 16E, a finger is inserted into the back surface of the support protrusion piece 20b, and the operation portion 27b of the lock member 27 is turned counterclockwise. By rotating, the lock member 27 rotates against the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c, and the tip portion of the stopper portion 27a is in a state of being retracted from the support hook hole 20c. Therefore, the shaft support pin 633 is supported by the support hook. It can be taken out from the hole 20c. After that, the main body frame 3 is lifted to disengage the main body frame shaft support hole formed in the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 from the support protrusion 21d of the lower support metal fitting 21, thereby making the main body frame 3 the outer frame 2 It can be removed from.

As described above, in the outer frame 2 of this example, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 constituting the outer shell of the outer frame 2 are made of wood as in the conventional case, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of lightweight metal ( For example, since it is an extruded material of aluminum alloy), when installing the pachinko machine 1 in the island equipment lined up in the amusement park, it is necessary to perform the work of fixing it at a predetermined angle to the vertical surface of the island. However, since such work is performed by driving nails to the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the island, it is possible to make the nails easier to drive, and the pachinko machine 1 can be installed on the existing island equipment without any problem. It can be installed. Further, since the side frame plates 12 and 13 are extruded materials of lightweight metal (for example, aluminum alloy), it is possible to form a thin wall thickness while maintaining the strength as compared with the conventional wooden outer frame. The left-right width when viewed from the front of the peripheral wall portion 605 (see FIG. 63, etc.) of the main body frame 3 adjacent to the inside of the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be widened, and the game board 4 having a large size in the left-right direction can be widened. Can be mounted on the main body frame 3, and at the same time, the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be formed large.

Further, the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 constituting the outer shell of the outer frame 2 are connected by the connecting member 14, and the connecting member 14 is the side frame plate 12 and 13. Since it is fixed in close contact with the inner surface and is fixed in a state where the connecting member 14, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are engaged with each other, the assembling strength of the outer frame 2 can be increased and it is sturdy. It can be used as a rectangular framework. Further, as shown in FIG. 10, when the upper support metal fitting 20 is attached to a predetermined position after the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are connected by the connecting member 14, each of them Since there is no member protruding outward from the outer surface (outer peripheral surface) of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility in a game hall (not shown), an adjacent device (for example, for example) It can be installed in close contact with the adjacent ball lending machine).

[1-2. Overall configuration of door frame]
Next, the door frame 5 provided on the front surface side of the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 25. 17 is a front view of the door frame, FIG. 18 is a rear view of the door frame, and FIG. 19 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front right. Further, FIG. 20 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the left front, and FIG. 21 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the right rear. Further, FIG. 22 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 23 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 24 is an exploded perspective view of the side speaker and the side speaker cover disassembled from the door frame and viewed from the front, and FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective view of the side speaker and the side speaker cover disassembled from the door frame and viewed from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view.

As shown in the figure, the door frame 5 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has a door frame having a game window 101 having an outer shape formed into a vertically long rectangular shape and an inner peripheral shape having a slightly vertically long circular shape (elliptical shape). The base unit 100, the right side decoration unit 200 attached to the right outer periphery of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and the left side of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 facing the right side decoration unit 200. The left side decoration unit 240 attached to the outer circumference, the upper decoration unit 280 attached to the upper outer circumference of the game window 101 in front of the door frame base unit 100, and the lower end lower side of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240. It includes a pair of side speaker covers 290 that are arranged and attached to the front surface of the door frame base unit 100.

Further, the door frame 5 penetrates the plate unit 300 attached to the lower part of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, the operation unit 400 attached to the upper center of the plate unit 300, and the plate unit 300. A handle device 500 attached to the lower right corner of the frame base unit 100 for driving a game ball, and a rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 arranged behind the dish unit 300 with the door frame base unit 100 in between. The foul cover unit 540 attached to the door frame, the ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the foul cover unit 540, and the game window 101 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to close. The glass unit 590 and the door are provided.

[1-2A. Door frame base unit]
Subsequently, the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 26 to 30. FIG. 26A is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and FIG. 26B is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. Further, FIG. 27 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 28 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 29 is a perspective view of the door frame base board cover and the wiring holding member in the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear, and FIG. 30 shows a state of wiring for electrically connecting the door frame and the main body frame. It is an enlarged perspective view.

As shown in the figure, the door frame base unit 100 of this example has a door having a game window 101 whose outer shape is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and whose inner circumference is formed in a vertically long substantially elliptical shape so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction. The frame base main body 110, the upper bracket 120 attached to the upper center of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base main body 110 to fix the upper decorative unit, and the lower left and right sides of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base main body 110. A pair of side speakers 130 arranged on both outer sides, a speaker bracket 132 for fixing the side speakers 130 to the door frame base body 110, and a front surface of the door frame base body 110 attached to the lower right corner of the front view. It includes a handle bracket 140 for supporting the handle device 500.

The door frame base unit 100 has a side surface of the side speaker 130 and a front side of the wiring 136 (see FIG. 24) connected to the right side decoration unit 200 and the like on the outside of the side speaker 130 on the right side when viewed from the front. A cover member 134 attached to the front surface of the door frame base main body 110 is further provided (see FIGS. 22 and 24, etc.). The cover member 134 can guide the wiring 136 along the outer circumference of the speaker mounting portion 111, and holds the wiring 136 so that the wiring 136 does not get in the way when attaching or detaching the side speaker 130. Can be done.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 is such that the metal frame-shaped reinforcing unit 150 fixed to the rear side of the door frame base main body 110 and the rear surface of the door frame base main body 110 cover the lower part of the game window 101. The security cover 180 to be attached, the glass unit locking member 190 rotatably attached to a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the game window 101 on the rear surface of the door frame base body 110, and the left side (open side) from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the rear. ), And the launch cover 191 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 along the lower end of the game window 101, and the rotation position of the handle device 500 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 under the launch cover 191. A handle device relay board 192 that relays the connection between the detection sensor 512 and the main control board 4100, a handle device relay board cover 193 that covers the rear side of the handle device relay board 192, and a launch cover 191 that sandwiches the center in the left-right direction. Door frame base board 194, which is arranged on the opposite side of the handle device relay board 192, etc. (on the right side (shaft support side) from the center in the left-right direction in the rear view) and attached to the rear surface of the door frame base body, and the door frame base board. A part of the door frame base board cover 195 that covers the rear side of the 194 and the wiring cord 196 that is rotatably supported on the rear surface of the door frame base board cover 195 and connects the door frame 5 side and the main body frame 3 side. A wiring holding member 197 for holding the door is provided.

In the door frame base unit 100 of this example, the rigidity of the entire door frame base unit 100 is increased by fixing a reinforcing unit 150 obtained by assembling a metal sheet metal with rivets or the like to the rear side of a rectangular door frame base body 110 made of synthetic resin. In addition, it has enough strength to sufficiently support each of the decorative units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300, and the like.

The door frame base board 194 in the door frame base unit 100 is connected to the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 of the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240, and is a peripheral control unit provided in the game board 4 described later. It is connected to the 4140 and includes an amplifier circuit that amplifies the acoustic signal sent from the peripheral control unit 4140 and outputs it to each speaker 130. In this example, the decorative units 200, 240, 280, the decorative substrates 430, 432 provided on the dish unit 300 and the operation unit 400, the dial drive motors 414 and the sensors 432a, 432b provided on the operation unit 400, The wiring code 196 that connects the 432c, the handle device relay board 192, the ball rental unit 360 of the dish unit 300, the payout control board 4110, the peripheral control unit 4140, etc. is on the right side (axis) of the door frame base board 194 when viewed from the rear. After being aggregated and bundled at the position of (support side), the details will be described later, but it is held by the wiring holding member 197 and extends backward, and the main relay terminal plate 880 of the main body frame 3 and the peripheral relay terminal plate It is designed to be connected to 882 (see FIGS. 1 and 30).

As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of this example is formed in a vertically long frame shape by synthetic resin, and penetrates in the front-rear direction and has a vertically long inner shape. The substantially elliptical game window 101 is formed so as to be offset upward as a whole. As shown in the figure, the game window 101 has the left and right side and the upper inner peripheral edge formed in a continuous smooth curved shape, while the lower inner peripheral edge is formed in a straight line extending to the left and right. ing. Further, on the inner peripheral edge of the door frame base body 110 on the lower side of the game window 101, a square notch 101a through which the first ball outlet 544a of the foul cover unit 540 can be inserted on the shaft support side (left side in front view). Is formed. The width of the upper side and the left and right side sides of the door frame base body 110 formed by the game window 101 is the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152, and the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 described later. The width is substantially the same as the width of the game window 101, and the game window 101 is formed as large as possible with respect to the size of the door frame base body in the front view. Therefore, a wider range of the game board 4 arranged on the rear side of the door frame 5 can be visually recognized from the player side, and a game area 1100 wider than that of the conventional pachinko machine can be easily formed. It has become like.

In addition to the game window 101, the door frame base main body 110 is arranged on both the left and right outer sides of the lower side of the game window 101, and mounts and fixes a speaker mounting portion 111 for mounting and fixing the side speaker 130 and a ball feed unit 580. The ball feed unit mounting recess 112 (see FIG. 28) and the game ball that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a predetermined position of the ball feed unit mounting recess 112 and is stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 to the ball feed unit 580. A ball feed opening 113 for supplying and a handle attachment for attaching the handle bracket 140, which is arranged in the lower right corner when viewed from the front and is inclined diagonally so that the right (open side) end of the front surface that bulges forward is retracted. The portion 114, the wiring passage port 115 that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a predetermined position of the handle mounting portion 114 and allows the wiring from the handle device 500 to pass through, and the tubular shape that extends shortly forward on the upper side of the handle mounting portion 114. It is provided with a lock hole 116 which is formed and into which a cylinder lock 1010 described later can be inserted.

Further, as shown in FIG. 28, the door frame base body 110 includes a relay board mounting portion 117 for mounting the handle device relay board 192 on the lower side in the ball feed unit mounting recess 112, and the door frame base body 110 when viewed from the rear. From the arrangement of the board mounting part 118 for mounting the door frame base board 194, which is arranged on the lower right side (shaft support side), and the rear view left side (open side) of the lower end of the game window 101, which is closer to the center than the speaker mounting part 111. The security cover mounting portion 119 for mounting the security cover 180 and the door frame base body 110 projecting rearward to mount the security cover 180 and the door frame base body 110 are recessed to the front side substantially along the inner circumference of the game window 101, and the glass unit 590. A glass unit support step 110a that can be brought into contact with the outer peripheral edge of the front surface of the game window The unit 110b and the like are further provided.

Further, the rear side of the door frame base main body 110 is provided with a door frame projecting piece 110c projecting rearward by a predetermined amount from the lower side thereof, and the door frame projecting piece 110c is provided with an engaging groove 603 of the main body frame 3 described later. It is designed to be inserted inside. As a result, the door frame 5 can be positioned and locked with respect to the main body frame 3, and an illegal tool such as a piano wire can be inserted into the pachinko machine 1 through the gap between the door frame 5 and the lower side of the main body frame 3. Even so, the door frame projecting piece 110c engaged with the engaging groove 603 can prevent the tool from entering, and the security function of the pachinko machine 1 is enhanced. Further, on the rear side of the door frame base main body 110, a positioning protrusion 110d that protrudes rearward from a position slightly lower right than the lock hole 116 when viewed from the rear and fits with the fitting groove 612 of the main body frame 3 is provided. By fitting the positioning protrusion 110d with the fitting groove 612, the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 are positioned at the correct positions.

Further, as shown in FIG. 27, the door frame base main body 110 is provided with a plurality of mounting bosses 110e projecting forward for fixing the decorative units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300, and the like on the front surface thereof. At the same time, a large number of mounting holes for mounting the upper bracket 120, the handle bracket 140, etc. are formed at appropriate positions. Further, the door frame base main body 110 has a mounting portion 110 g (see FIG. 24) for mounting the speaker bracket 132 for mounting the side speaker 130 and a mounting hole 110h (FIGS. 18, 24 and) for mounting the side speaker cover 290. (See FIG. 25 and the like) are formed at appropriate positions.

In the side speaker cover 290, as shown in FIG. 25, the glass unit 590 is arranged so as to penetrate the glass unit support step 110a into which the glass unit 590 is fitted from the rear side, one on each side, and the door frame base main body. With the glass unit 590 removed from the 110 (door frame 5), it can be attached and detached with a predetermined screw through the mounting hole 110h. Further, as shown in FIG. 18, the mounting hole 110h for mounting the side speaker cover 290 is covered on the rear side by fixing the security cover 180 to the door frame base main body 110. Therefore, in order to remove the side speaker cover 290, the security cover 180 and the glass unit 590 must first be removed from the door frame base main body 110. As a result, by making it take some time to remove the side speaker cover 290, it is possible to make the person who intends to commit fraudulent acts take time to remove the side speaker cover 290, and also to remove the relatively large glass unit 590. By doing so, the removal work can be made conspicuous, and the theft of the side speaker 130 and the fraudulent activity in the game area 1100 can be hesitated to enhance the deterrent (safety) against the fraudulent activity. It has become.

Further, in the door frame base main body 110, between the ball feed unit mounting recess 112 and the board mounting portion 118, the lower plate ball supply port 310 g and the foul cover unit 540 in the plate unit base 310 of the plate unit 300, which will be described later, are located. A rectangular ball passage port 110f penetrating in the front-rear direction is provided at a position corresponding to the two-ball outlet 544b.

Next, the upper bracket 120 in the door frame base unit 100 is fixed to the center of the upper front surface of the door frame base main body 110, and although detailed illustration is omitted, the left and right upper brackets attached to the door frame base unit 100 are left and right. The upper gap formed between the side decoration units 200 and 240 is concealed, and the left and right ends are supported by the side decoration units 200 and 240, respectively. Further, a part of the tip of the upper bracket 120 is inserted into the upper decorative unit 280, and the upper decorative unit 280 can be supported from above when the door frame 5 is assembled. It has become like.

Further, although detailed illustration of the pair of side speakers 130 in the door frame base unit 100 is omitted, the intersection of the central axes thereof is a predetermined distance (for example, 0.2 m to 1) from the center of the game area 1100 to the front in front view. It is fixed diagonally so as to be at the position of .5 m) so that the sound can reach the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 most efficiently. Further, the side speaker 130 is designed to mainly output sound in the mid-high range, and is arranged at a position as far as possible in the left-right direction from the pachinko machine 1, so that the left and right side speakers 130 can be used. By outputting related different sounds from the side speaker 130, it is possible to output a sound with a high stereo feeling.

The outer periphery of these side speakers 130 is sandwiched between a substantially annular speaker bracket 132 arranged on the front side and a speaker mounting portion 111 of the door frame base main body 110 arranged on the rear side, whereby the door frame It can be attached to the base body 110. The speaker bracket 132 can be attached to the attachment portion 110g of the door frame base main body 110 from the front side by a predetermined screw.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 27 to 29, the door frame base substrate cover 195 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a thin box shape with the front side open, and is formed on the rear surface on the rear side in the vertical direction. It is provided with a stepped portion 195a that is recessed forward at a position slightly lower than the center of the door. The wiring holding member 197 is rotatably attached to the step portion 195a of the door frame base substrate cover 195.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the wiring holding member 197 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a plate shape extending in the lateral direction and has an I-shaped cross section. , It is made of a relatively hard synthetic resin. Further, as shown in the figure, the wiring holding member 197 is provided with a plurality of holding holes 197a (three in each of the upper and lower sides in this example) at predetermined intervals along the longitudinal direction at both upper and lower ends. In the wiring holding member 197, the end portion on the side where the door frame 5 is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 in the state where the door frame 5 is assembled is vertically attached to the rear step portion 195a of the door frame base substrate cover 195. The wiring holding member 197 is rotatably supported around the extended shaft, and although detailed illustration is omitted, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 rotates toward the door frame base board cover 195 side, so that the wiring holding member 197 can be formed. It can be accommodated in the step portion 195a of the door frame base substrate cover 195.

The wiring holding member 197 is bound to a predetermined binding hole 197a paired up and down with a wiring cord 196 for electrically connecting the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 along the rear surface side. The wiring cord 196 can be held by inserting the band 198 and tightening the wiring cord 196 together with the wiring holding member 197 by the binding band 198 (see FIGS. 1 and 30).

When the wiring holding member 197 of this example is rotated with respect to the main body frame 3 in the direction of closing the door frame 5, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 extends from the free end side of the wiring cord 196 to the main body frame 3. It is pushed forward by the portion and rotates in a direction approaching the door frame base substrate cover 195 side. As a result, as the door frame 5 is closed, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 approaches the door frame base substrate cover 195, and the wiring cord 196 extending from the free end of the wiring holding member 197 to the main body frame 3 side is free. The bend becomes large (sharp) near the edge. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the wiring cord 196 is folded in two in the lateral direction on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197.

On the other hand, when the closed door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are relatively far apart, so wiring is performed by the wiring cord 196 connected to the main body frame 3 side. The free end side of the holding member 197 is pulled backward, and the wiring holding member 197 rotates smoothly so that the free end side moves away from the door frame base substrate cover 195 (direction of the main body frame 3). As a result, the wiring cord 196 folded on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 is expanded so as to extend straight, and the door frame 5 can be opened without being hindered by the wiring cord 196.

As described above, according to this example, the door frame base board cover 195 moves the end portion of the wiring holding member 197 on the same side as the side on which the door frame 5 is pivotally supported so that the free end side moves to the main body frame 3 side. The main body frame 3 is provided so that a part of the wiring cord 196 that electrically connects the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 is held so as not to move in the vertical direction while being rotatably supported on the rear surface. On the other hand, when opening and closing the door frame 5, the wiring cord 196 can be laterally folded and unfolded on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197, and the wiring cord 196 is caught when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. It is possible to prevent problems (disconnection of wiring cord 196, disconnection of connector, etc.) from occurring due to being pinched or pinched.

Further, according to this example, since the wiring holding member 197 is formed of a relatively hard and highly rigid synthetic resin, even if a force acts via the wiring cord 196 when opening and closing the door frame 5, even if a force acts through the wiring cord 196, It is possible to prevent blurring in the vertical direction, and the wiring cord 196 can be reliably folded in the horizontal direction to prevent the occurrence of defects.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the handle bracket 140 in the door frame base unit 100 has a cylindrical tubular portion 141 extending in the front-rear direction and a shaft of the tubular portion 141 from the rear end of the tubular portion 141. On the other hand, an annular flange portion 142 extending outward in the perpendicular direction and a plurality of (three in this example) ridges protruding into the tubular portion 141 and arranged at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 141. The 143 and the outer peripheral surface of the tubular portion 141 and the front surface of the flange portion 142 are connected to each other, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 144 arranged in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 141 are provided. The handle bracket 140 is attached to the handle mounting portion 114 by a predetermined screw in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 142 is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting portion 114 in the door frame base main body 110. Although not shown, the axis of the tubular portion 141 substantially coincides with the wiring passage port 115 in the state of being attached to the handle attachment portion 114.

The handle bracket 140 is provided with one ridge 143 on the upper side and two ridges 143 on the lower side in the tubular portion 141, and these ridges 143 are formed on the outer circumference of the cylindrical portion of the handle base 502 in the handle device 500. It is arranged and formed at a position corresponding to the three groove portions 502a. Then, the cylindrical portion of the handle device 500 can be inserted into the tubular portion 141 only when the three ridges 143 of the handle bracket 140 and the three groove portions 502a of the handle device 500 match. There is. Therefore, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 inserted and supported by the handle bracket 140 is supported in a state in which it cannot rotate relative to the handle bracket 140.

By attaching the handle bracket 140 to the handle mounting portion 114 that is inclined at an angle, the handle bracket 140 is attached so that the axis of the tubular portion 141 extends toward the right side (open side) as it goes forward in the front view. The shaft of the handle device 500 supported by the handle bracket 140 in this state is also tilted at an angle.

Subsequently, the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100 includes an upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 attached along the back surface of the upper side of the door frame base main body 110 and a door frame base main body, mainly as shown in FIGS. 27 and 28. The shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 attached along the back surface of the shaft support side side portion 110, the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 attached along the back surface of the open side side portion of the door frame base body 110, and the door frame base body 110. It is provided with a lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 attached along the lower back surface of the game window 101, and they are fastened to each other with screws, rivets, or the like to form a square shape.

As shown in FIG. 27, the reinforcing unit 150 has an upper shaft support portion 156 having a shaft pin 155 slidably provided on the upper surface of the upper and lower ends of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 in the vertical direction, and a lower surface thereof. It is integrally provided with a lower shaft branch 158 having a shaft pin 157 (see FIG. 18). Then, the upper and lower shaft pins 155 and 157 are pivotally supported by the upper shaft support metal fittings 630 and the lower shaft support metal fittings 640 formed above and below the shaft support side of the main body frame 3, so that the door frame 5 is pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 3. It is designed to be pivotally supported so that it can be opened and closed.

Further, the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 of the reinforcing unit 150 has a predetermined width and is formed to have substantially the same length as the width dimension of the door frame base main body 110, and is formed at the lower long side end edge of the long side end edges thereof. A lower bent projectile 159 bent forward (see FIG. 27) and an upper bent projectile 160 bent forward toward the right side (open side) of the upper long side edge in front view. A vertically bent projecting piece 161 that is bent rearward and extended in the vertical direction is provided at the central portion of the upper long side edge. The strength of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is increased by the lower bent projectile piece 159, the upper bent projecting piece 160, and the like. Further, the vertically bent projecting piece 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is formed so as to engage and lock with the locking piece 592b formed at the lower end of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590, which will be described later. When the unit 590 is fixed to the back surface side of the door frame 5, the vertically bent projecting piece 161 locks the locking piece 592b of the unit frame 592 in the glass unit 590, so that the lower end of the glass unit 590 moves in the left-right direction. It is possible to regulate the movement to the rear. The lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is formed with a notch 162 that substantially corresponds to the notch 101a of the door frame base main body 110.

Further, the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 includes open side outer bent projecting pieces 163 bent rearward on both sides of the long side between the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 and the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154. It is provided with an open-side inwardly bent projectile 164, and as shown in the figure, the open-side inwardly bent projectile 164 is formed so as to extend backward longer than the open-side outerly bent projectile 163. ing. Further, a hook cover 165 that comes into contact with the door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000, which will be described later, is provided in the lower rear portion of the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153. Further, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is provided with a U-shaped shaft support side U-shaped protrusion 166 that extends rearward to the outer end of the long side thereof and is open to the outside of the shaft support side (FIG. FIG. See 106). Further, the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 is provided with bent projecting pieces 167 bent rearward on both sides of its long side.

Since the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the reinforcing unit 150 is mounted and supported only at two points above and below the upper shaft support portion 156 and the lower shaft support portion 158 with respect to the main body frame 3, the shaft support side If an illegal tool such as a driver or a crowbar is inserted between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is deformed and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 becomes large and illegal. Although there is a risk that the action may be facilitated, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of this example is provided with the shaft support side U-shaped projecting piece 166, so that the strength of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is further increased. , The shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is difficult to bend. Further, in the shaft support side U-shaped protrusion 166 of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152, the front end piece 952b of the side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3 described later is inserted into the U shape (FIG. FIG. (Refer to 106), the insertion of the tool can be prevented, and only the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 can be prevented from bending, so that the crime prevention function of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced.

Next, the security cover 180 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28. The security cover 180 is provided with a security function that covers the lower back surface of the glass unit 590 to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game board 4, and as shown in the figure, the left and right sides are made of transparent synthetic resin. It is formed in a flat plate shape so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 590 arranged between the reinforcing sheets 152 and 153 of the above, and the upper side portion thereof is formed in an arc shape substantially along the lower arc surface of the inner rail 1112 of the game board 4. It includes a formed contact recess 181 and a crime prevention rear projection piece 182 that projects rearward along the upper end of the contact recess 181. Further, both the left and right ends of the security cover 180 are provided with security rear end projecting pieces 183 that project rearward along the shape of the ends. It should be noted that the crime prevention rear end projecting piece 183 on the right side (shaft support side) in the rear view is in a form of extending backward longer than the crime prevention rear end projecting piece 183 on the opposite side (open side). On the other hand, on the front surface of the security cover 180, a security front projecting piece 184 projecting along the downward shape of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 with the security cover 180 attached, and left and right outside the security front projecting piece 184. A U-shaped mounting elastic piece 185 that projects forward is provided at the lower end of the.

In this security cover 180, the mounting elastic piece 185 on the right side (open side) is mounted on the security cover mounting portion 119 of the door frame base unit 100 when viewed from the front, and the mounting elastic piece 185 on the opposite side (shaft support side) is mounted on the plate. By attaching it to the security cover attachment portion 364 of the unit 300, it can be detachably attached to the back surface side of the door frame 5. In the state where the security cover 180 is attached to the door frame 5, detailed illustration is omitted, but the security front projection piece 184 is fitted to the lower outer circumference of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590, and is also fitted. The rear surface of the lower end portion of the unit frame 592 comes into contact with the vertically bent projecting piece 161. Further, when the door frame 5 is closed, the security rear projection piece 182 projecting rearward is inserted into the lower side surface of the inner rail 1112 whose shaft support side half is fixed to the game board 4, and the open side half is the front. It is in a state of being inserted into the rail security groove 1118 of the inner rail 1112 of the component member 1110. As a result, even if an illegal tool is to be intruded into the game area 1100 of the game board 4, the intrusion can be prevented by the crime prevention rear projection piece 182 inserted under the inner rail 1112. ..

Since the security cover 180 can cover the lower front portion of the ball striking guide passage formed by the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 with the door frame 5 closed by the back surface thereof. , It is possible to prevent the hit ball that flies or reverses the guide passage portion from colliding with the glass plate 594.

Subsequently, the four glass unit locking members 190 in the door frame base unit 100 are rotatably fitted to the locking member mounting portion 110b protruding rearward from the door frame base main body 110 with the fitting portion 190a. A locking piece 190b for locking the locking projecting piece 451f of the glass unit 590 extending in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the fitting portion 190a is provided. In the glass unit locking member 190, a retaining screw is fixed to the tip of the locking member mounting portion 110b in a state where the locking member mounting portion 110b of the door frame base main body 110 penetrates the fitting portion 190a. By doing so, the shaft is rotatably supported with respect to the locking member mounting portion 110b.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the locking piece 190b of the glass unit locking member 190 has a ridge protruding rearward, and the ridge rotates when the glass unit 590 is attached or detached. It is a finger hook when operating. Of the four glass unit locking members 190, the locking piece 190b of the glass unit locking member 190 attached to the lower right when viewed from the rear does not have a ridge, and the rear surface is a flat surface. ing.

Further, the launch cover 191 of the door frame base unit 100 is fixed to the rear side of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 of the reinforcing unit 150. Further, the handle device relay board cover 193 and the door frame base board cover 195 are fixed at predetermined positions on the rear side of the door frame base main body 110, respectively. When the launch cover 191 and the handle device relay board cover 193 and the ball feed unit 580 are attached to the door frame base unit 100, their rear surfaces are substantially identical to each other. The front surface of the ball striking device 650 attached to the main body frame 3 can be covered.

[1-2B. Right side decoration unit]
Subsequently, the right side decoration unit 200 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31 (A) is a front perspective view of the right side decorative unit in the door frame, and FIG. 31 (B) is a rear perspective view of the right side decorative unit in the door frame. Further, FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decorative unit disassembled and viewed from the front. Further, FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decorative unit disassembled and viewed later.

As shown in the figure, the right side decoration unit 200 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment decorates the right half of the front outer circumference of the game window 101 excluding the lower part in the front view, and the inside is the game window 101. It is formed in an arc shape along the outside, and the outside is formed in a straight line along the outer circumference of the door frame base unit 100. The right side decorative unit 200 is provided with respect to the side decorative frame 202 forming the skeleton of the right side decorative unit 200, the side upper decorative member 204 arranged along the upper side of the side decorative frame 202, and the side upper decorative member 204. The side upper decorative lens 206, which is fitted from the rear side, and the upper side of the side decorative frame 202 and the side upper decorative member 204 are covered, and the side upper decorative member 204 is attached to the front side so as to sandwich the side upper decorative lens 206. The side upper cover 208, the side lens 210 that supports the lower part of the side upper cover 208 and is fitted and fixed to the side decorative frame 202 from the rear side, and the side inner lens 212 that is fitted to the back side of the side lens 210. And have.

Further, the right side decoration unit 200 is arranged on the rear side of the side inner lens 212 from substantially the center to the upper side in the vertical direction, and a plurality of LEDs 214a (full color LED) and 214b (white LED) are mounted on the surface of the right side decoration unit 200. The substrate 214, and the right side lower decorative substrate 216, which is arranged on the lower side from substantially the center of the side inner lens 212 in the vertical direction and has a plurality of LEDs 216a (full-color LED) and 216b (white LED) mounted on the surface. The right side upper decorative board cover 218 that covers the rear side of the right side upper decorative board 214 and is attached to the side inner lens 212 so as to sandwich the right side upper decorative board 214, and the right side that covers the rear side of the right side lower decorative board 216. It includes a side lens 210 and a right side lower decorative substrate cover 220 attached to the side decorative frame 202 so as to sandwich the lower decorative substrate 216.

Further, the right side decoration unit 200 supports the upper right speaker 222 arranged in the upper left portion in the front view of the side decoration frame 202 and the upper right side speaker 222, and is fitted to the rear upper portion of the side decoration frame 202. The speaker bracket 224, the upper speaker cover 226 sandwiched between the upper speaker bracket 224 and the side decorative frame 202, and the side sublens 228 attached from the inside to a predetermined position on the side surface of the side upper cover 208 are provided. There is. On the rear side of the side sub-lens 228, the LED 214c of the decorative substrate 214 on the right side is arranged, and the LED 214c emits and decorates the LED 214c.

In the right side decorative unit 200, the side decorative frame 202, the side upper decorative member 204, the right side upper decorative substrate cover 218, and the right side lower decorative substrate cover 220 are formed of a translucent member, and the side decoration A plating layer of a predetermined color is formed on the surfaces of the frame 202 and the side upper decorative member 204. Further, the side upper decorative lens 206, the side upper cover 208, the side lens 210, the side inner lens 212, the upper speaker cover 226, the upper speaker bracket 224, and the side sub lens 228 of the right side decorative unit 200 are transparent members. Side upper decorative lens 206, side lens 210, side inner lens 212, upper speaker bracket 224, upper speaker cover 226, and side sub lens 228 are substantially transparent. It is said that.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the back side of the side lens 210 and the upper speaker cover 226, which are formed substantially transparent, and the front side of the side inner lens 212 and the upper speaker bracket 224 are formed in a polyhedral shape. , Light can be diffusely refracted. Therefore, the LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a, 216b and the like mounted on the surface (front surface) of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 arranged behind the side lens 210 and the side inner lens 212 are used for the game. It is not clearly visible from the person's side. Further, the front surface of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 is white, and the right side decorative unit 200 is efficiently emitted and decorated by the mounted LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a, 216b and the like. In addition to being able to do so, the decorative substrates 214 and 216 are inconspicuous when the LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a and 216b are not lit. The upper right side decorative substrate 214 and the lower right decorative substrate 216 are connected to the peripheral control unit 4140, respectively, and the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, and 216a are driven by drive signals (light emission drive signals) from the peripheral control unit 4140. , 216b can be appropriately made to emit light, and the right side decoration unit 200 can be made to emit light.

As shown in the figure, the side decoration frame 202 in the right side decoration unit 200 of this example is formed in an arc shape substantially along the game window 101, and specifically, along the outer circumference of the game window 101. The arc-shaped inner frame 202a and the upper part which is arranged at a position separated outward from the inner frame 202a and is linear along the outer periphery of the side surface of the door frame 5 (door frame base unit 100) from the lower end to the upper part. The outer frame 202b is formed in an arc shape so as to be curved toward the upper end edge of the inner frame 202a, the upper end frame 202c connecting the outer frame 202b and the upper end edges of the inner frame 202a, and the outer frame 202b and the inner frame. The lower end frame 202d that connects the lower end edges of the 202a and the inner frame 202a and the outer frame 202b are arranged at a plurality of locations (four locations in this example) along the circumferential direction to connect the inner frame 202a and the outer frame 202b. A partition frame 202f having a slit 202e having a predetermined width is provided.

The inner frame 202a of the side decoration frame 202 extends at substantially the same position with respect to the front-rear direction and has substantially the same width in the circumferential direction of the game window 101. On the other hand, in the outer frame 202b, the rear end of the linear portion extending along the side surface of the door frame 5 is formed linearly at substantially the same position as the rear end of the inner frame 202a, whereas the front end is up and down. It is formed in an arc shape so that both ends of the door protrude forward. Further, the curved arcuate portion above the linearly extending vertically extending portion of the outer frame 202b is formed in an arcuate shape curved in the front-rear direction so that the upper end edge side protrudes forward. Further, the partition frame 202f of the side decorative frame 202 has a shape curved in the front-rear direction so that the portion between the inner frame 202a and the outer frame 202b protrudes most forward. The partition frame 202f is arranged on radiation extending radially from the vicinity of the lower center of the game window 101 in a state where the door frame 5 is assembled (see FIG. 17 and the like).

As shown in the figure, the side decorative frame 202 has a form in which the space between the inner frame 202a and the outer frame 202b is divided into a plurality of parts in the circumferential direction (longitudinal direction) by a plurality of partition wall frames 202f, and each of the divided side decorative frames 202 is divided. The opening is a light emitting decorative opening 202 g, and the peripheral lens portion 210 a of the side lens 210, which will be described later, is fitted from the rear side. Further, the radiation lens portion 210b of the side lens 210 is fitted into the slit 202e of the partition frame 202f from the rear side. Further, the partition wall 202f can partition the slit 202e and the light emitting decorative opening 202g, so that the light emitting modes can be different from each other.

As shown in the figure, the side upper decorative member 204 of the right side decorative unit 200 extends in the left-right direction at a constant height along the arc-shaped upper portion of the outer frame 202b of the side decorative frame 202, and has a rear surface. Is formed in a recessed state, and a plurality of openings 204a penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed on the front surface. The side upper decorative member 204 is provided with a Jomon-shaped relief on the upper side along the arranged openings 204a.

On the other hand, the side upper decorative lens 206 has a shape that can be fitted in the recessed rear surface of the side upper decorative member 204, and from the rear side of the side upper decorative member 204 to the vicinity of the front end thereof through the opening 204a. A plurality of light guide portions 206a capable of projecting are provided. The tip of the light guide portion 206a is formed in a polyhedral shape, and by inserting and fitting the light guide portion 206a into the opening 204a of the side upper decorative member 204, it is possible to make the opening 204a look as if a jewel is fitted. You can do it. Further, the light from the right side upper decorative substrate 214 arranged on the rear side by the light guide portion 206a of the side upper decorative lens 206 can be radiated forward (player side) from the opening 204a of the side upper decorative member 204. At the same time, the tip of the light guide portion 206a can be made to shine as a jewel.

The upper side surface and the right side surface (in front view) of the side upper cover 208 of the right side decorative unit 200 have a shape substantially along the outer circumference of the door frame 5 (door frame base unit 100), and the lower surface (lower end). Has a shape substantially in line with the side upper decorative member 204. The side upper cover 208 is formed with a mounting step portion 208a that is open downward and recessed rearward so that the side upper decorative member 204 can be accommodated in the lower part of the front surface, and is rear of the mounting step portion 208a. A mounting boss, mounting holes, and the like for mounting the side upper decorative member 204 and the like are formed on the end surface. Further, on the right side surface of the side upper cover 208, two notches 208b arranged vertically are formed, and the side sublens 228 attached internally via the notches 208b is desired toward the surface side. It has become. By fitting the side sub-lens 228 into the cutout portion 208b of the side upper cover 208, it is possible to emit light in a different manner only in this portion.

The side lens 210 of the right side decoration unit 200 has a shape substantially in line with the side decoration frame 202 and a shape in which the rear surface is recessed, and is inserted later into the light emitting decoration opening 202 g of the side decoration frame 202. It includes a peripheral lens portion 210a and a radiation lens portion 210b that is later inserted into the slit 202e of the side decorative frame 202. As shown in the figure, the side lens 210 does not have a peripheral lens portion 210a corresponding to a light emitting decorative opening 202g in contact with the upper end frame 202c of the side decorative frame 202, and the corresponding portions are opened forward and downward. It is said that the accommodating stage portion 210c is provided. The upper right speaker 222, the upper speaker bracket 224, and the like, which will be described later, are accommodated in the accommodating stage 210c. Further, the side lens 210 includes a mounting portion 210d that forms the upper surface of the accommodating step portion 210c and is fixed to the rear side of the mounting step portion 208a in the side upper cover 208.

The side lens 210 has a curved surface shape in which the front surfaces of the peripheral lens portion 210a and the radiation lens portion 210b bulge forward so as to substantially follow the front end of the partition wall frame 202f of the side decorative frame 202. Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the back surface (inner surface) side of the peripheral lens portion 210a is formed in a polyhedral shape by a plurality of surfaces facing different directions, and the plate thickness of the peripheral lens portion 210a is non-uniform. As a result, the light transmitted through the peripheral lens portion 210a is diffusely refracted. Further, the inner surface formed in the shape of a polyhedron makes it possible for the peripheral lens portion 210a to exhibit a brilliant and characteristic appearance.

The side inner lens 212 is inserted and fitted into the side lens 210 from the rear side, and corresponds to a portion of the side lens 210 in which the peripheral lens portion 210a and the radiation lens portion 210b are formed, as shown in the figure. The main body portion 212a having a recessed rear surface and the main body portion 212a continuously project from the rear end of the main body portion 212a and project forward from the main body portion 212a and correspond to the radiation lens portion 210b (slit 202e of the side decorative frame 202). It is provided with a plate-shaped light guide portion 212b arranged at the designated position. The main body 212a of the side inner lens 212 is formed so that the front surface thereof is reserved by a predetermined distance from the inner surface of the side lens 210. Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, one surface of the main body portion 212a of the side inner lens 212 is formed into a polyhedron shape by a plurality of surfaces facing different directions, similarly to the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210. It is formed so that the thickness of the main body 212a becomes non-uniform, so that the light transmitted through the main body 212a is diffusely refracted.

By combining this side inner lens 212 with the side lens 210, the light transmitted through the peripheral lens portion 210a and the main body portion 212a can be doubly refracted, and the shape of an object arranged on the opposite side can be changed. It is almost unrecognizable. Further, due to diffused refraction and diffused reflection due to the polyhedral shape, the appearance of the side lens 210 (peripheral lens portion 210a) can be made to shine and the perspective can be made to look unclear and mysterious.

The right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 of the right side decorative unit 200 are equipped with a plurality of high-brightness color LEDs on their surfaces, and the light emitting decorative opening 202 g of the side decorative frame 202 (around the side lens 210) The LEDs 214a and 216a arranged at positions corresponding to the lens portion 210a) have a relatively wide irradiation angle (for example, 60 ° to 180 °), and the slit 202e of the side decorative frame 202 (the side lens 210). As the LEDs 214b and 216b arranged at positions corresponding to the radiation lens portion 210b), those having a relatively narrow irradiation angle (for example, 15 ° to 60 °) are used. The LED 214c of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 that emits and decorates the side sub-lens 228 is a red LED in this example.

The upper right speaker 222 of the right side decoration unit 200 outputs sound in the mid-high range like the side speaker 130, and can be attached to a predetermined position in a predetermined direction by the upper speaker bracket 224. There is. The upper speaker bracket 224 that supports the upper right speaker 222 includes a cylindrical horn portion 224a that projects diagonally forward and downward at the center of the left and right sides of the pachinko machine 1 when viewed from the front. The upper right speaker 222 is fixed to the back side of the upper end of the horn portion 224a in the upper speaker bracket 224, so that the upper right speaker 222 cannot be seen from the player side by the horn portion 224a in front view. It has become.

The upper right speaker 222 of this example is emitted from the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 toward the lower player by the horn part 224a of the upper speaker bracket 224, and is caused by noise with respect to other pachinko machines. It has become difficult to hear. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the front surface of the upper speaker bracket 224 also faces a plurality of directions different from each other, similarly to the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210 and the main body portion 212a of the side inner lens 212. The surface is formed in a polyhedron shape, and the plate thickness becomes non-uniform, so that the light transmitted through the upper speaker bracket 224 is diffusely refracted.

Further, the upper speaker cover 226 covering the front side of the upper speaker bracket 224 is fitted from the rear side of the side decoration frame 202 so as to close the light emitting decoration opening 202g in contact with the upper end frame 202c of the side decoration frame 202. The surface is formed in a curved surface shape that is continuous with the surface of the side lens 210. Further, a plurality of through holes 226a are formed on the surface of the upper speaker cover 226 so that the sound from the upper right speaker 222 can be sufficiently transmitted to the player side.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the upper speaker cover 226 also has a plurality of inner surfaces facing different directions like the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210 and the main body portion 212a of the side inner lens 212. The surface of the speaker is formed in a polyhedron shape, and the thickness thereof becomes non-uniform, so that the light transmitted through the upper speaker cover 226 is diffusely refracted. Therefore, in the upper speaker cover 226 and the upper speaker bracket 224, the diffused refraction of light makes it difficult for the player to see the through hole 226a formed in the upper right speaker 222 and the upper speaker cover 226. , The appearance can be similar to that of the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210.

[1-2C. Left side decoration unit]
Subsequently, the left side decorative unit 240 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 to 36. FIG. 34 (A) is a front perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame, and FIG. 34 (B) is a rear perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame. Further, FIG. 35 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decorative unit disassembled and viewed from the front. Further, FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decorative unit as viewed after being disassembled.

As shown in the figure, the left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment decorates the left half of the front outer circumference of the game window 101 excluding the lower part in the front view, and the inside is the game window 101. It is formed in an arc shape along the outside, and is formed in a straight line along the outer circumference of the door frame base unit 100, and is formed substantially symmetrically with the right side decoration unit 200. The left side decoration unit 240 refers to the side decoration frame 242 forming the skeleton of the left side decoration unit 240, the side upper decoration member 244 arranged along the upper side of the side decoration frame 242, and the side upper decoration member 244. The side upper decorative lens 246 fitted from the rear side, the side upper decorative frame 242 and the upper side of the side upper decorative member 244 are covered, and the side upper decorative member 244 is attached to the front side so as to sandwich the side upper decorative lens 246. The side upper cover 248, the side lens 250 that supports the lower part of the side upper cover 248 and is fitted and fixed to the side decorative frame 242 from the rear side, and the side inner lens 252 that is fitted to the back side of the side lens 250. And have.

Further, the left side decoration unit 240 is arranged on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 from substantially the center in the vertical direction to the upper side, and a plurality of LEDs 254a (full color LED) and 254b (white LED) are mounted on the surface of the left side decoration unit 240. A substrate 254 and a decorative substrate 256 on the lower left side, which is arranged on the lower side from substantially the center of the side inner lens 252 in the vertical direction and has a plurality of LEDs 256a (full-color LED) and 256b (white LED) mounted on the surface. The left side upper decorative board cover 258, which covers the rear side of the left side upper decorative board 254 and is attached to the side inner lens 252 so as to sandwich the left side upper decorative board 254, and the left side, which covers the rear side of the left side lower decorative board 256. It includes a side lens 250 and a left side lower decorative substrate cover 260 attached to the side decorative frame 242 so as to sandwich the lower decorative substrate 256.

Further, the left side decoration unit 240 supports the upper left speaker 262 arranged in the upper right part in the front view of the side decoration frame 242 and the upper left side speaker 262 and is fitted to the rear upper part of the side decoration frame 242. A speaker bracket 264 and an upper speaker cover 266 sandwiched between the upper speaker bracket 264 and the side decorative frame 242 are provided.

In the left side decorative unit 240, the side decorative frame 242, the side upper decorative member 244, the left side upper decorative substrate cover 258, and the left side lower decorative substrate cover 260 are formed of a translucent member, and the side decoration is formed. A plating layer of a predetermined color is formed on the surfaces of the frame 242 and the side upper decorative member 244. Further, the side upper decorative lens 246, the side upper cover 248, the side lens 250, the side inner lens 252, the upper speaker cover 266, and the upper speaker bracket 264 of the left side decorative unit 240 are formed of a translucent member. The side upper cover 248 is substantially entirely milky white, and the side upper decorative lens 246, the side lens 250, the side inner lens 252, the upper speaker bracket 264, and the upper speaker cover 266 are substantially transparent.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the back side of the side lens 250 and the upper speaker cover 266, which are formed substantially transparent, and the front side of the side inner lens 252 and the upper speaker bracket 264 are formed in a polyhedral shape. , Light can be diffusely refracted. Therefore, the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b and the like mounted on the surface (front surface) of the left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 arranged on the rear side of the side lens 250 and the side inner lens 252 are used for the game. It is not clearly visible from the person's side. Further, the front surface of the left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 is white, and the left side decorative unit 240 is efficiently emitted and decorated by the mounted LEDs such as 254a, 254b, 256a, and 256b. The decorative substrates 254 and 256 are inconspicuous when the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, and 256b are not lit. The upper left side decorative substrate 254 and the lower left decorative substrate 256 are connected to the peripheral control unit 4140, respectively, and the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, and 256b are driven by drive signals (light emission drive signals) from the peripheral control unit 4140. Can be appropriately emitted to emit light to decorate the left side decoration unit 240.

As shown in the figure, the side decoration frame 242 in the left side decoration unit 240 of this example is formed in an arc shape substantially along the game window 101, and specifically, along the outer circumference of the game window 101. The arc-shaped inner frame 242a and the upper part which is arranged at a position separated from the inner frame 242a to the outside and is linear along the outer periphery of the side surface of the door frame 5 (door frame base unit 100) from the lower end to the upper part. The outer frame 242b is formed in an arc shape so as to be curved toward the upper end edge of the inner frame 242a, the upper end frame 242c connecting the outer frame 242b and the upper end edges of the inner frame 242a, and the outer frame 242b and the inner frame. The lower end frame 242d that connects the lower end edges of the 242a and the inner frame 242a and the outer frame 242b that are arranged at a plurality of locations (four locations in this example) along the circumferential direction are connected to the inner frame 242a and the outer frame 242b. A partition frame 242f having a slit 242e having a predetermined width is provided.

The inner frame 242a of the side decorative frame 242 extends at substantially the same position with respect to the front-rear direction and has substantially the same width in the circumferential direction of the game window 101. On the other hand, in the outer frame 242b, the rear end of the linear portion extending along the side surface of the door frame 5 is formed linearly at substantially the same position as the rear end of the inner frame 242a, whereas the front end is vertically formed. It is formed in an arc shape so that both ends of the door protrude forward. Further, the curved arcuate portion above the linearly extending vertical portion of the outer frame 242b is formed in an arcuate shape curved in the front-rear direction so that the upper end edge side protrudes forward. Further, the partition frame 242f of the side decorative frame 242 has a shape curved in the front-rear direction so that the portion between the inner frame 242a and the outer frame 242b protrudes most forward. The partition wall frame 242f is arranged on radiation extending radially from the vicinity of the lower center of the game window 101 in a state where the door frame 5 is assembled (see FIG. 17 and the like).

As shown in the figure, the side decorative frame 242 has a form in which the space between the inner frame 242a and the outer frame 242b is divided into a plurality of parts in the circumferential direction (longitudinal direction) by a plurality of partition wall frames 242f. The opening is a light emitting decorative opening 242 g, and the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250, which will be described later, is fitted from the rear side. Further, the radiation lens portion 250b of the side lens 250 is fitted into the slit 242e of the partition frame 242f from the rear side. Further, the partition wall frame 242f can partition the slit 242e and the light emitting decorative opening 242g, so that the light emitting modes can be different from each other.

As shown in the figure, the side upper decorative member 244 of the left side decorative unit 240 extends in the left-right direction at a substantially constant height along the arc-shaped upper portion of the outer frame 242b of the side decorative frame 242, and also has a rear surface. Is formed in a recessed state, and a plurality of openings 244a penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed on the front surface. The side upper decorative member 244 is provided with a Jomon-shaped relief on the upper side along the arranged openings 244a.

On the other hand, the side upper decorative lens 246 has a shape that can be fitted in the recessed rear surface of the side upper decorative member 244, and extends from the rear side of the side upper decorative member 244 to the vicinity of the front end thereof through the opening 244a. It is provided with a plurality of light guide portions 246a capable of projecting. The tip of the light guide portion 246a is formed in a polyhedral shape, and by inserting and fitting it into the opening 244a of the side upper decorative member 244, it is possible to make it appear as if a jewel is fitted in the opening 244a. You can do it. Further, the light from the left side upper decorative substrate 254 arranged on the rear side by the light guide portion 246a of the side upper decorative lens 246 can be radiated from the opening 244a of the side upper decorative member 244 to the front (player side). At the same time, the tip of the light guide portion 246a can be made to shine as a jewel.

The upper side surface and the left side surface (in front view) of the side upper cover 248 of the left side decorative unit 240 have a shape substantially along the outer circumference of the door frame 5 (door frame base unit 100), and the lower surface (lower end). Has a shape substantially in line with the side upper decorative member 244. The side upper cover 248 has a mounting step portion 248a that is open downward and recessed rearward so that the side upper decorative member 244 can be accommodated in the lower front portion, and is rear of the mounting step portion 248a. Mounting bosses, mounting holes, and the like for mounting the side upper decorative member 244 and the like are formed on the end surface. Further, the side upper cover 248 is provided with a covering portion 248b on its outer side surface (left side surface in front view) that covers the upper shaft support portion 156 of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100 from the front side.

The side lens 250 of the left side decoration unit 240 has a shape substantially in line with the side decoration frame 242 and a shape in which the rear surface is recessed, and is later inserted into the light emitting decoration opening 242 g of the side decoration frame 242. It includes a peripheral lens portion 250a and a radiation lens portion 250b that is later inserted into the slit 242e of the side decorative frame 242. As shown in the figure, the side lens 250 does not have a peripheral lens portion 250a corresponding to a light emitting decorative opening 242g in contact with the upper end frame 242c of the side decorative frame 242, and the corresponding portions are opened forward and downward. It is said that the accommodating stage portion 250c is provided. The upper left speaker 262, the upper speaker bracket 264, and the like, which will be described later, are accommodated in the accommodating stage 250c. Further, the side lens 250 includes a mounting portion 250d that forms the upper surface of the accommodating step portion 250c and is fixed to the rear side of the mounting step portion 248a in the side upper cover 248.

The side lens 250 has a curved surface shape in which the front surfaces of the peripheral lens portion 250a and the radial lens portion 250b bulge forward so as to substantially follow the front end of the partition wall frame 242f of the side decorative frame 242. Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the back surface (inner surface) side of the peripheral lens portion 250a is formed in a polyhedral shape by a plurality of surfaces facing different directions, and the plate thickness of the peripheral lens portion 250a is non-uniform. As a result, the light transmitted through the peripheral lens portion 250a is diffusely refracted. Further, the inner surface formed in the shape of a polyhedron makes it possible for the peripheral lens portion 250a to exhibit a brilliant and characteristic appearance.

The side inner lens 252 is inserted and fitted into the side lens 250 from the rear side, and corresponds to a portion of the side lens 250 in which the peripheral lens portion 250a and the radiation lens portion 250b are formed, as shown in the figure. Corresponds to the main body portion 252a having a recessed rear surface and the radial lens portion 250b (slit 242e of the side decorative frame 242) that is continuous from the rear end of the main body portion 252a and protrudes forward from the main body portion 252a. It is provided with a plate-shaped light guide portion 252b, which is arranged at such a position. The main body portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 is formed so that the front surface thereof is reserved by a predetermined distance from the inner surface of the side lens 250. Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, one surface of the main body portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 is formed into a polyhedron shape by a plurality of surfaces facing different directions, similarly to the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250. It is formed so that the plate thickness of the main body portion 252a becomes non-uniform, so that the light transmitted through the main body portion 252a is diffusely refracted.

By combining this side inner lens 252 with the side lens 250, the light transmitted through the peripheral lens portion 250a and the main body portion 252a can be doubly refracted, and the shape of an object arranged on the opposite side can be changed. It is almost unrecognizable. In addition, due to diffused refraction and diffused reflection due to the polyhedral shape, the appearance of the side lens 250 (peripheral lens portion 250a) can be made to shine and the perspective can be made to look unclear and mysterious.

The left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 of the left side decorative unit 240 are equipped with a plurality of high-brightness color LEDs on the surface, and the light emitting decorative opening 242 g of the side decorative frame 242 (periphery of the side lens 250). The LEDs 254a and 256a arranged at positions corresponding to the lens unit 250a) have a relatively wide irradiation angle (for example, 60 ° to 180 °), and the slit 242e of the side decorative frame 242 (of the side lens 250). As the LEDs 254b and 256b arranged at positions corresponding to the radiation lens portion 250b), those having a relatively narrow irradiation angle (for example, 15 ° to 60 °) are used.

The upper left speaker 262 of the left side decoration unit 240 outputs sound in the mid-high range like the side speaker 130, and can be attached to a predetermined position in a predetermined direction by the upper speaker bracket 264. There is. The upper speaker bracket 264 that supports the upper left speaker 262 includes a cylindrical horn portion 264a that projects diagonally forward and downward at the center of the left and right sides of the pachinko machine 1 when viewed from the front. The upper left speaker 262 is fixed to the back side of the upper end of the horn portion 264a in the upper speaker bracket 264 so that the upper left speaker 262 cannot be seen from the player side by the horn portion 264a in front view. It has become.

The upper left speaker 262 of this example is emitted from the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 toward the lower player by the horn part 264a of the upper speaker bracket 264, and is caused by noise with respect to other pachinko machines. It has become difficult to hear. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the upper speaker bracket 264 also has a plurality of front surfaces facing different directions like the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 and the main body portion 252a of the side inner lens 252. The surface is formed in a polyhedron shape, and the plate thickness becomes non-uniform, so that the light transmitted through the upper speaker bracket 264 is diffusely refracted.

Further, the upper speaker cover 266 covering the front side of the upper speaker bracket 264 is fitted from the rear side of the side decoration frame 242 so as to close the light emitting decoration opening 242g in contact with the upper end frame 242c of the side decoration frame 242. The surface is formed in a curved surface shape that is continuous with the surface of the side lens 250. Further, a plurality of through holes 266a are formed on the surface of the upper speaker cover 266 so that the sound from the upper left speaker 262 can be sufficiently transmitted to the player side.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the upper speaker cover 266 also has a plurality of inner surfaces facing different directions like the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 and the main body portion 252a of the side inner lens 252. The surface of the speaker is formed in a polyhedron shape, and the thickness thereof becomes non-uniform, so that the light transmitted through the upper speaker cover 266 is diffusely refracted. Therefore, in the upper speaker cover 266 and the upper speaker bracket 264, the diffused refraction of light makes it difficult for the player to see the through hole 266a formed in the upper left speaker 262 and the upper speaker cover 266. , The appearance can be similar to that of the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250.

[1-2D. Top decoration unit]
Subsequently, the upper decorative unit 280 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 37 to 40. FIG. 37 is a front perspective view of the upper decorative unit in the door frame, and FIG. 38 is a rear perspective view of the upper decorative unit in the door frame. Further, FIG. 39 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decorative unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decorative unit disassembled and viewed from the rear.

As shown in FIG. 17, the upper decorative unit 280 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is located at the upper center of the front surface of the door frame 5, and is located between the upper end edges of the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240 on the central side. It is attached between them and decorates between them. As shown in the figure, the upper decorative unit 280 has a substantially inverted isosceles triangular shape as a whole when viewed from the front, and penetrates the central opening 281a that largely penetrates the center and the left and right sides of the central opening 281a. A front decorative member 281 having a pair of side openings 281b into which the tip of the upper bracket 120 of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted above the central opening 281a, and a rear side inside the central opening 281a of the front decorative member 281. The central lens 282 fitted from the rear, the inner lens 283 arranged at the rear end of the central lens 282, the pair of side lenses 284 fitted from the rear side into the side opening 281b of the front decorative member 281, and the outer shape of the front view. A main body member 285 having a shape similar to that of the front decorative member 281 and attached to the rear side of the front decorative member 281 so as to sandwich the central lens 282, the inner lens 283, and the pair of side lenses 284 with the front decorative member 281. The upper decorative substrate 286, which is arranged on the rear side of the main body member 285 and has a plurality of color LEDs 286a and 286b mounted on the front surface, and the upper decorative substrate 286 having a front view having substantially the same shape as the main body portion so as to cover the upper decorative substrate 286 from the rear side. It is provided with a substrate cover 287 attached to the rear surface of the main body member 285.

Further, the upper decorative unit 280 extends rearward while being bent so as to be continuous from the lower end of the front decorative member 281. The upper part of the front end is supported by the front decorative member 281 and the rear end is attached to the door frame base unit 100 and is lowered. A lower surface decorative member 288 having a pair of lower opening 288a penetrating toward the lower surface, and a lower lens 289 fitted to the lower opening 288a of the lower surface decorative member 288 from above and fixed to the lower surface decorative member 288 and the substrate cover 287. , Is equipped. In this example, a plating layer having a metallic luster is formed on the surfaces of the front decorative member 281 and the lower surface decorative member 288. The LED 286a of the upper decorative substrate 286 is arranged at a position corresponding to the central lens 282, and the LED 286b is arranged at a position corresponding to the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289. The lens 284 and the lower lens 289 can be individually luminescent and decorated. Further, in this example, the LED 286a is a full-color LED, and the LED 286b is a high-brightness white LED.

In the front decorative member 281 of the upper decorative unit 280 of this example, the inner peripheral shape of the central opening 281a is a side in which the central upper end extends to the left and right in front view, the central lower end is the apex, and each side is a loose arc shape. It is formed in a variable pentagonal shape extending to, and has three protrusions extending into the central opening 281a from the substantially center of the upper side on both sides of the upper side and the apex of the lower end. Further, the front decorative member 281 is formed with a plurality of streaks extending diagonally outward and upward on the outside of the upper side of the central opening 281a, and the front decorative member 281 is formed from the central opening 281a by this streak. The blades are formed in a shape as if they are extended, and the side opening 281b is formed along the streak carving.

The central lens 282 fitted in the central opening 281a of the front decorative member 281 has an outer shape substantially the same as that of the central opening 281a, and has a shape that bulges forward and also has a front surface thereof. Is formed in a polyhedral shape by a plurality of surfaces facing different directions. The central lens 282 of this example is formed of a transparent (colorless and transparent, colored transparent) resin. By fitting the central lens 282 into the central opening 281a of the front decorative member 281, the central lens 282 looks like a tokat jewel, and the front decorative member 281 looks like a jewel pedestal. ..

Further, the inner lens 283 arranged on the rear side of the central lens 282 is formed of a transparent resin so as to close the opening on the rear side of the central lens 282, and has a fine lens (or prism) on the surface. A plurality of light is formed so that the light from the upper decorative substrate 286 can be widely diffused toward the central lens 282. On the other hand, the side lens 284 fitted in the side opening 281b of the front decorative member 281 is formed of a transparent resin so that the front surface thereof is substantially continuous with the front surface of the front decorative member 281 in a state of being fitted in the side opening 281b. Has been done. Similar to the inner lens 283, a plurality of fine lenses (or prisms) are formed on the back surface side of the side lens 284, and the entire side lens 284 is substantially uniform due to the light emitted from the upper decorative substrate 286. It is possible to emit light.

The inner lens 283 and the side lens 284 have a feeling of cloudiness due to a plurality of fine lenses formed on the surface, so that the rear side cannot be clearly seen through the inner lens 283 and the side lens 284. It has become.

The main body member 285 of the upper decorative unit 280 extends in a tubular shape in the front-rear direction in an outer shape substantially following the shape of the central opening 281a of the front decorative member 281, and the front end opening is inclined diagonally downward and the rear end is closed. The central portion 285a, which is inclined diagonally upward, and the rear end, which is arranged and closed on both sides of the central portion 285a, are located at substantially the same position as the rear end of the central portion 285a, and the front end extends shorter than the central portion 285a. It is provided with a concave side portion 285b and a plurality of openings 285c formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs 286a and 286b that penetrate the rear end surfaces of the central portion 285a and the side portions 285b and are mounted on the upper decorative substrate 286. ing. When the upper decorative substrate 286 is arranged on the rear side of the main body member 285, the LED 286a of the upper decorative substrate 286 is inserted and arranged in the opening 285c so that the light from the LED 286a does not leak to the rear side. It has become. Further, the central portion 285a and the side portion 285b of the main body member 285 are recessed from the front side to the rear side so that the light from the corresponding LEDs 285a and 286b does not affect the sides.

Further, the lower surface decorative member 288 of the upper decorative unit 280 is formed so as to become thinner toward the rear, and the left and right side surface shapes thereof are the upper speaker covers 226 and 226 in the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240. The shape is substantially the same as the shape of the ends of the upper end frames 202c and 242c of the upper end frames 202c and 242c, and the ends of the upper end frames 202c and 242c of the upper speaker covers 226 and 266 are placed and fixed. ing. The lower lens 289 is sandwiched between the lower surface decorative member 288 and the upper speaker covers 226 and 266. Further, light from the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the left side upper decorative substrate 254 is supplied to the lower lens 289 via the upper speaker brackets 224 and 264 of the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240. It is designed to emit light.

[1-2E. Side speaker cover]
Next, the pair of side speaker covers 290 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 25. The side speaker cover 290 covers and decorates the front surface of the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame base unit 100, and includes the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, and the plate unit 300. It is placed between.

The side speaker cover 290 supports the cover body 291 having a plurality of disc-shaped holes curved so as to cover the front surface of the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame base unit 100, and the outer periphery of the cover body 291 from the front side. A main body member 292 having an annular opening and being formed to be continuous with the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, and a lower plate of the plate unit 300 arranged under the main body member 292. It includes a lower member 293 formed so as to be continuous with the left and right rear ends of the cover 328. In this example, since the cover body 291 is formed of a predetermined punching metal, it is difficult to be deformed even if it is pushed or hit from the front side, and the side speaker 130 can be used. It can be protected as much as possible.

The side speaker cover 290 has a plating layer having a metallic luster formed on the surface of the main body member 292. Further, the lower member 293 is formed of a milky white translucent member similar to the lower dish cover 328 in the dish unit 300 described later.

The side speaker cover 290 of this example is mounted on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 independently of the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, and the dish unit 300, and is the door frame base main body. Through a mounting hole 110h (see FIG. 18) formed at a predetermined position of the 110, the door frame base main body 110 is fixed to the door frame base main body 110 by a predetermined screw inserted from the rear side of the door frame base main body 110.

As a result, the side speaker cover 290 can be removed to the front side by removing the security cover 180 in the door frame 5 and then removing the screw attaching the side speaker cover 290 from the rear side of the door frame 5. By removing the speaker bracket 132 from the front side of the door frame 5, the side speaker 130 can be removed. Therefore, even if it becomes necessary to replace the side speaker 130 for some reason, the front surface of the side speaker 130 does not need to be removed from the door frame 5, the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, the plate unit 300, and the like. Only the side speaker cover 290 that covers the side speaker cover 290 can be easily removed, and the side speaker 130 can be easily replaced.

[1-2F. Dish unit]
Subsequently, the dish unit 300 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44. FIG. 41 is a front perspective view of the dish unit in the door frame, and FIG. 42 is a rear perspective view of the dish unit in the door frame. Further, FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled and viewed from the rear.

The plate unit 300 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment includes an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 for storing the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 described later, and the game stored in the upper plate 301. The ball can be supplied to the hitting ball launching device 650, which will be described later, via the ball feeding unit 580. As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the dish unit 300 of this example is a substantially plate-shaped dish unit base 310 extending in the left-right direction fixed to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and the dish unit base 310. The front end of the dish-shaped upper plate body 312, which is fixed to the center of the front surface and the upper and rear sides are opened and the left side (shaft support side) of the front view bulges forward greatly, and the upper outer circumference of the upper plate body 312 are both front. The upper plate has an upper plate upper panel 314 formed in a curved shape so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward in the visual direction, and a plurality of openings 316a attached to the upper front end edge of the upper plate upper panel 314 and penetrating in the vertical direction. It has a plurality of light guide portions 318a arranged between the plate front decorative member 316, the upper plate front decorative member 316, and the upper plate upper panel 314 and fitted into the opening 316a of the upper plate front decorative member 316. The pair of left and right upper plate upper lenses 318 and the upper plate upper lens 318 are arranged on opposite sides of the upper plate upper panel 314, and are attached to the lower surface of the upper plate upper panel 314, and a plurality of color LEDs 320a, Upper plate right decorative substrate 320 and upper plate left decorative substrate 322 on which 322a is mounted, and upper plate right decorative substrate 320 and upper plate left decorative substrate 322 arranged between the upper plate upper lens 318 and the upper plate upper panel 314. It is provided with an upper plate upper inner lens 319 having a plurality of fine prisms that diffuse light from the upper plate upper lens 318 side.

Further, in the plate unit 300, the plate unit 300 is fixed to the front surface of the plate unit base 310 on the lower side of the upper plate body 312, and the upper side and the rear side are opened. A dish-shaped lower plate main body 324 formed so as to become lower toward the direction, and a dish-shaped lower plate main body 324 fixed to the upper part of the lower plate main body 324 A lower plate having a plate-shaped lower plate top plate 326 curved so as to become higher toward the center, an opening 328a along the front end of the lower plate top plate 326 and the lower plate main body 324, and a lower plate covering the outer periphery of the opening 328a. The cover 328, the dish side middle cover 330 arranged on both the left and right sides of the lower dish cover 328 and having an opening 330a penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the dish side middle cover fitted into the opening 330a of the dish side middle cover 330 from the rear side. It includes a lens 332 and a plate side outer cover 334 that is arranged on both the left and right outer sides of the plate side inner cover 330 and extends in the left-right direction to a position corresponding to the left and right ends of the door frame base unit 100. The countersunk side middle cover 330 arranged on the right side when viewed from the front has a lock hole 330b formed at the right end thereof so that the cylinder lock 1010 of the locking device 1000, which will be described later, faces. Further, a handle insertion hole 334a into which the handle device 500 is inserted is formed in the dish side outer cover 334 on the right side when viewed from the front.

Further, the plate unit 300 includes an upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 for pulling out the game balls attached to the plate unit base 310 and the upper plate main body 312 and stored in the upper plate 301 to the lower plate 302, and a lower plate main body 324. A lower plate ball pulling mechanism 350 attached to the lower surface for pulling out the game ball stored in the lower plate 302 downward, and a lower plate ball removing mechanism 350 attached to the upper left side of the plate unit base 310 and installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. It includes a ball lending unit 360 for operating a ball lending machine (also referred to as CR unit 6, see FIG. 113).

The plate unit 300 of this example constitutes an upper plate 301 capable of storing game balls by a part of the plate unit base 310, an upper plate main body 312, an upper plate upper panel 314, and the like. Further, the plate unit 300 constitutes a lower plate 302 capable of storing game balls by a part of the plate unit base 310, a lower plate main body 324, a lower plate top plate 326, a lower plate cover 328, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 43, the dish unit base 310 in the dish unit 300 is formed in a substantially plate shape extending in the left-right direction, and a decorative portion 310a having a predetermined shape is formed on the upper end edge extending to the left and right. It is prepared. A ball rental unit mounting portion 310b for mounting the ball rental unit 360 is formed at the left end of the decorative portion 310a so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction. The plate unit base 310 is arranged below the ball rental unit mounting portion 310b (near the upper left corner when viewed from the front), and has a horizontally long rectangular upper plate ball supply port 310c that penetrates in the front-rear direction and an upper plate ball supply port 310c. An upper plate ball discharge port 310d that penetrates in the front-rear direction and extends in the vertical direction below the right end of the decorative portion 310a on the lower side of the mouth 310c (approximately in the middle of the plate unit base 310 in the height direction), and the upper plate. It is provided with a pair of lower plate support portions 310e arranged directly below the ball discharge port 310d and the upper plate ball supply port 310c and projecting forward and having the same upper surface. The upper plate ball discharge port 310d is continuously formed up to an intermediate position in the front-rear direction on the upper surface of the lower plate support portion 310e arranged directly below.

Further, the plate unit 300 is arranged between a pair of lower plate support portions 310e and is fitted with the rear ends of the lower plate main body 324 and the lower plate top plate 326 to form a horizontally long rectangular ring-shaped lower plate support in a front view. It is provided with a groove 310f and a rectangular lower plate ball supply port 310g arranged in the lower part on the right side of the center of the portion surrounded by the lower plate support groove 310f and penetrating in the front-rear direction. Further, as shown in FIG. 44, the dish unit base 310 has a lower dish ball supply gutter 310h extending rearward in a tubular shape so as to be continuous with the lower dish ball supply port 310g, and an open side of the lower dish ball supply gutter 310h. It is provided with a notch 310i formed on the side surface and having a size through which a game ball can pass.

The upper plate ball supply port 310c of the plate unit base 310 is a foul cover attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit via the notches 101a and 162 of the door frame base main body 110 and the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100. It communicates with the first ball outlet 544a of the unit 540. The front end of the upper plate ball supply port 310c is provided with an induction recess 310j that extends long to the right in the front view and is recessed rearward. The guide recess 310j is inclined so that the right end side in the front view is slightly lower in the left-right direction, and is inclined so that the front end side is lower in the front-rear direction. As a result, the height difference between the front end of the guide recess 310j and the bottom surface of the upper plate body 312 becomes higher toward the right end of the guide recess 310j, and the right end of the guide recess 310j is equal to the bottom surface of the upper plate body 312. The height difference of is slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball.

Therefore, in this example, when the front side of the upper plate ball supply port 310c is closed by the game ball stored in the upper plate 301, the game ball paid out from the prize ball device 740 via the foul cover unit 540 is Since it is not possible to linearly exit the upper plate 301 in front of the upper plate ball supply port 310c, the dispensed game ball comes into contact with the game ball that closes the front side of the upper plate ball supply port 310c and rolls. The direction changes, and the guide is guided to roll in the guide recess 310j to the right in the front view, and is discharged from the vicinity of the right end of the guide recess 310j to the upper side of the game ball stored in the upper plate 301. Become. As a result, the game balls can be automatically stored in the upper and lower two stages in the upper plate 301, so that the player does not pull the game balls by hand when the game balls block the front of the upper plate ball supply port 310c. However, it is possible to continue to supply (release) the paid-out game balls into the upper plate 301, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed by the storage of the game balls in the upper plate 301. , It is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest in the game by devoting himself to the operation of driving the game ball and the game by the driven game ball, and to increase the storage amount of the game ball in the upper plate 301. Can be done.

The upper plate ball discharge port 310d of the plate unit base 310 has an opening 344a of the upper plate ball removal base 344 in the upper plate ball removal mechanism 340 and a ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. It communicates with the entrance 581a of the ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 via the door frame base unit 100. Further, in the lower plate ball supply port 310 g, the lower plate ball supply gutter 310h extending rearward from the rear side penetrates the ball passage port 110f of the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100 and extends rearward. Above, the notch 310i of the lower plate ball supply gutter 310h is connected to the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100, and the notch 310i of the lower plate ball supply gutter 310h is in the upper plate ball removal mechanism 340. It is connected to the ball removal flow path 344c of the upper plate ball removal base 344.

In this example, as shown in the figure, the front end of the lower plate ball supply port 310 g is provided with an opening portion 310k that expands to the left in front view, and the lower plate ball supply port is provided by the expansion portion 310k. The front end of 310 g is in a state of spreading in the left-right direction. As a result, it is possible to prevent early ball clogging at the lower plate ball supply port 310 g due to the game balls in the lower plate 302 accumulated on the front side of the lower plate ball supply port 310 g, and more games can be played. The ball can be supplied into the lower plate 302.

The upper plate body 312 of the plate unit 300 is formed so that the left side (shaft support side) of the plate unit 300 bulges forward from the center and the bottom surface is generally lower on the left end side (open side) and the rear end side. There is. The bottom surface of the upper plate body 312 has a rear end on the shaft support side near the bottom of the upper plate ball supply port 310c in the plate unit base 310, and a rear end on the open side of the upper plate ball discharge port 310d in the plate unit base 310. The game balls are formed so as to be located near the intermediate positions in the vertical direction, and the game balls supplied from the upper plate ball supply port 310c to the upper plate main body 312 (upper plate 301) are guided to the upper plate ball discharge port 310d. It has become so.

A metal upper plate rail 312a that can come into contact with the game ball is attached to the upper plate main body 312 from the center in the left-right direction to the open side at the rear end of the bottom surface. Although not shown, the precision rail 312a is electrically grounded so that static electricity charged on the game ball can be removed.

The upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 extends in a curved shape so that the center of the door frame 5 in the left-right direction protrudes forward from the upper end of the upper plate main body 312, and is outside the open side of the upper plate main body 312. A mounting hole 314a is formed which penetrates in the vertical direction and into which the upper plate ball removal button 341 of the upper plate ball removal mechanism 340 described later is attached. The upper plate upper panel 314 is formed in a step shape at the front end one step lower than the upper front end of the upper plate main body 312, and is upper at the center in the left-right direction with the decorative mounting portion 314b for attaching the upper plate front decorative member 316. It is provided with an operation unit mounting portion 314c, which is formed in a stepped shape lower than the decorative mounting portion 314b at a position on the front side of the dish body 312 and for mounting the operation unit 400 described later.

Although detailed description is omitted, the decorative mounting portion 314b of the upper plate upper panel 314 is vertically oriented at positions corresponding to the LEDs 320a and 322a of the upper plate right decorative substrate 320 and the upper plate left decorative substrate 322 mounted on the lower surface. An opening or a notch is formed through the operation unit, and an opening or the like through which a wiring cord connecting the operation unit 400 and the peripheral control unit 4140 can pass is formed in the operation unit mounting portion 314c.

The upper plate front decorative member 316 has a shape extending in a curved shape in the left-right direction along the front end of the upper plate upper panel 314, and the light guide portion of the upper plate upper lens 318 is formed through the plurality of openings 316a from the lower side. The 318a is fitted, and the upper plate upper lens 318 can be sandwiched between the upper plate upper panel 314 by attaching to the decorative mounting portion 314b of the upper plate upper panel 314. Further, below the upper plate upper lens 318, an upper plate upper inner lens 319 having a plurality of fine lenses (prisms) on the surface is arranged, and the upper plate right decorative substrate 320 and the upper plate left decorative substrate 322 are arranged. The light from the plate can be sufficiently diffused to uniformly emit and decorate the entire upper plate upper lens 318. As shown in the figure, the inner peripheral shape of the opening 316a in the upper plate front decorative member 316 is formed in a pear shape, and the same applies to the light guide portion 318a of the upper plate upper lens 318 fitted in the opening 316a. The shape is formed, and by fitting the light guide portion 318a, the opening 316a of the upper plate front decorative member 316 is provided with an appearance as if a pear-shaped cut jewel is fitted. ..

The lower plate body 324 of the plate unit 300 has a bottom plate 324a formed so as to spread forward in a fan shape in a plan view, a rear end formed linearly in the left-right direction, and a substantially center of the upper surface to be the lowest, and a center of the bottom plate 324a. It is provided with a lower plate ball punching hole 324b formed so as to penetrate in the vertical direction, and a side plate 324c rising upward from the front end and the side end excluding the rear end of the bottom plate 324a. The side plate 324c of the lower plate main body 324 is formed in a curved shape so that the upper end rising upward from the side end of the bottom plate 324a is the lowest on the front side and becomes higher toward the rear side, and the side of the bottom plate 324a. The upper end that rises upward from the end is formed in a straight line, and the left and right ends of the lower plate top plate 326 are placed and connected to the straight portion of the upper end.

In the lower plate main body 324, the rear ends of the bottom plate 324a and the side plate 324c are inserted and supported in the lower plate support groove 310f formed on the front surface of the plate unit base 310. Further, the lower plate ball removing hole 324b of the lower plate main body 324 is closed by the opening / closing shutter 352 of the lower plate ball removing mechanism 350 arranged on the back surface side of the bottom plate 324a.

The lower plate cover 328 has an outer shape that bulges downward when viewed from the front, and each side is formed in an inverted triangular shape with an arc, and has an opening 328a that penetrates in the front-rear direction at the center. The inner shape of the opening 328a has a shape that matches the shape formed by the front end of the lower plate main body 324 and the lower plate top plate 326, and forms the opening of the lower plate 302. Further, the lower plate cover 328 is formed of a milky white resin having translucency, and although not shown, color LEDs are arranged on the back side at predetermined intervals, and the entire lower plate cover 328 emits light. It can be decorated.

The plate side middle cover 330 is arranged on both the left and right outer sides of the lower plate cover 328 in the front view, and is predetermined along the lower side side of the lower plate cover 328 from the substantially center in the left-right direction to the side surface of the door frame 5 in the front view. The upper rear end extending to the side surface of the door frame 5 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base main body 110 of the door frame base unit 100. The dish side middle cover 330 is provided with an opening 330a penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the dish side middle cover lens 332 is fitted into the opening 330a from the rear side. Further, in the front view, the right side (open side) plate side middle cover 330 has a lock hole 330b penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 near its outer end (right end). Is formed, and when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the lock hole of the cylinder lock 1010 faces from the lock hole 330b.

The plate side middle cover 330 further includes a bottom plate portion 330c extending rearward from the lower part of the front end thereof, and the rear end of the bottom plate portion 330c is attached to the front surface of the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. It has become like. Further, a part of the lower side of the lower plate main body 324 is covered by the bottom plate portion 330c of the plate side middle cover 330.

The dish side outer cover 334 is arranged on both the left and right outer sides of the dish side middle cover 330 in front view, and has a substantially triangular shape along the side and bottom sides of the door frame 5 in front view, and is open rearward and upward. It is formed in the shape of a box. In this example, the dish side outer cover 334 on the right side (open side) is formed with a handle insertion hole 334a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the handle bracket 140 in the door frame base unit 100. The dish side outer cover 334 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base main body 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and a part of the dish side outer cover 334 is attached to the dish unit base 310. Further, the lower side of the lower plate main body 324 except the central portion is covered by the plate side outer cover 334 and the plate side inner cover 330.

The upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 in the plate unit 300 is for operating the upper plate ball removing button 341 and the upper plate ball removing button 341 that are vertically attached to the mounting hole 314a of the upper plate upper panel 314. The operating piece 342, which moves up and down more than the vertical movement of the upper plate ball removal button 341 and is supported on the front side of the plate unit base 310, and the ball feed unit 580, which slides up and down by the vertical movement of the operating piece 342, will be described later. The upper plate ball removal slider 343 and the upper plate ball removal slider 343, which are provided with a contact piece 343a that comes into contact with the operating rod 583c of the ball removal member 583 and are arranged on the rear side of the plate unit base 310, can be slid vertically. It is provided with an upper plate ball removing base 344, which is supported and attached to the rear side of the plate unit base 310.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 has an operating piece 342 that moves up and down together with the upper plate ball removing button 341 so that the upper plate ball removing button 341 is located at the upper moving end. It is urged upward by a coil spring. Further, the upper plate ball removal slider 343 is in a state of being urged upward by a coil spring provided between the upper plate ball removal slider 343 and the upper plate ball removal base 344.

The upper plate ball removal base 344 of the upper plate ball removal mechanism 340 closes the upper plate ball discharge port 310d of the plate unit base 310 and at the same time communicates with the upper plate ball discharge port 310d and opens forward 344a (FIG. (See 43) and the ball guidance flow path 344b (FIGS. 42 and FIG. 44), and after extending downward from the lower side of the ball guiding flow path 344b, extending substantially along the lower side of the upper plate ball removing base 344 toward the right end (shaft support side) in rear view. It is provided with a ball removal flow path 344c, which allows the game ball to be distributed.

In the upper plate ball removal base 344, the opening 344a communicates with the upper plate ball discharge port 310d, and the lower end of the ball guidance flow path 344b communicating with the opening 344a is the ball of the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. The game ball stored in the upper plate 301 is communicated with the entrance 581a of the ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base main body 110 via the feed opening 113, and the ball feed unit 580 is used. Can be supplied to.

Further, in the ball pulling flow path 344c of the upper plate ball pulling base 344, the upper end adjacent to the ball guiding flow path 344b communicates with the ball feeding port 581b of the ball feeding unit 580 via the ball feeding opening 113 of the door frame base main body 110. At the same time, the lower end extending toward the shaft support side communicates with the notch 310i of the lower plate ball supply gutter 310h in the plate unit base 310, and the game ball discharged from the ball outlet 581b of the ball feed unit 580 is inserted. It can be guided to the lower plate 302. The lower part of the rear end of the ball removal flow path 344c is closed by the upper plate ball removal flow path cover 345.

When the upper plate ball removal mechanism 340 presses the upper plate ball removal button 341 downward against the urging force of the coil spring, the upper plate ball removal slider 343 slides downward and the contact piece 343a protruding rearward also Move down. Then, in the operating rod 583c of the ball pulling member 583 in the ball feeding unit 580 that comes into contact with the upper surface of the contact piece 343a, the partition portion 583a of the ball pulling member 583 rotates in a predetermined direction as the contact piece 343a moves downward. It moves, and the partition between the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b partitioned by the partition portion 583a is released, and the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b are in communication with each other. As a result, the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 are sent from the upper plate ball discharge port 310d to the entrance 581a of the ball feed unit 580 via the opening 344a of the upper plate ball removal base 344 and the ball guidance flow path 344b. After entering, it is discharged from the ball extraction port 581b to the ball extraction flow path 344c of the upper plate ball extraction base 344, and is discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 310g to the lower plate 302 via the lower plate ball supply trough 310h of the plate unit base 310. It can be discharged to.

Since the ball pulling member 583 of the ball feeding unit 580 is in contact with the upper surface of the contact piece 343a in the upper plate ball pulling slider 343 whose operating rod 583c is urged upward by the coil spring, the ball pulling member 583 Even if the game ball is vigorously supplied onto the partition portion 583a, the impact can be absorbed by the coil spring that urges the upper plate ball pulling slider 343 via the operating paddle 583c, and the ball pulling member 583 or the like can absorb the impact. It is possible to prevent the game ball from being damaged and to prevent the game ball from bouncing off at the partition portion 583a.

The lower plate ball removing mechanism 350 in the plate unit 300 is a lower plate ball removing base 351 arranged between the bottom plate portions 330c of the plate side middle cover 330 arranged on the left and right sides of the lower plate main body 324 in front view. The plate-shaped opening / closing shutter 352, which is rotatably supported on the upper surface of the lower plate ball removing base 351 and can open / close the lower plate ball removing hole 324b of the lower plate main body 324, and the opening / closing shutter 352 are rotated and the lower plate is opened. A lower plate ball removal slider 353 that is slidably supported in the front-rear direction on the upper surface of the ball removal base 351 and a lower plate ball removal button 354 that is attached to the front end of the lower plate ball removal slider 353 are provided.

The lower plate ball removing base 351 is provided with a base ball removing hole 351a penetrating in the vertical direction at a position facing the lower plate ball removing hole 324b of the lower plate main body 324. Further, the opening / closing shutter 352 has a closing portion 352a capable of closing the lower plate ball removing hole 324b, and a shutter ball removing hole arranged in front of the closing portion 352a and penetrating in the vertical direction substantially matching the lower plate ball removing hole 324b. 352b and the lower plate ball extraction base 351 are urged by a coil spring so that the closing portion 352a is positioned to close the lower plate ball extraction hole 324b and the base ball extraction hole 351a.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the open / close shutter 352 is provided with an abutting pin capable of contacting the lower plate ball removing slider 353, and the contact pin abuts on the lower plate ball removing slider 353. , The lower plate ball removal slider 353 is rotated so that the closing portion 352a and the shutter ball extraction hole 352b are moved rearward, and the lower plate ball removal slider 353 is slid forward by the urging force of the coil spring. Can be done.

Further, as shown in the figure, the lower plate ball removal button 354 is arranged at a position sandwiched between the left and right plate side middle covers 330 on the lower side in the center in the left-right direction of the lower plate cover 328 in the plate unit 300. The surface shape is such that it is smoothly continuous with the surface shape of the lower plate cover 328 and the plate side middle cover 330.

Further, in the lower plate ball removing mechanism 350, the shutter ball removing hole 352b of the opening / closing shutter 352 substantially coincides with the lower plate ball removing hole 324b of the lower plate main body 324 and the base ball removing hole 351a of the lower plate ball removing base 351. In order to hold the lower plate ball removal slider 353 in the moving position, a holding mechanism 355 for holding the lower plate ball removing slider 353 in a predetermined position is further provided.

The lower plate ball removing mechanism 350 is in a closed state in which the lower plate ball removing button 354 is moved to the front end in a state where the surface shape of the lower plate ball removing button 354 is continuous with the surface shape of the lower plate cover 328 or the like. There is, and the lower plate ball extraction hole 324b of the lower plate main body 324 is closed by the closing portion 352a of the opening / closing shutter 352. In this state, the game ball can be stored in the lower plate main body 324 (lower plate 302). When the lower plate ball removal button 354 in the closed state is pressed backward, the lower plate ball removal button 354 and the lower plate ball removal slider 353 slide backward, and the lower plate ball removal slider 353 slides backward. The opening / closing shutter 352 rotates against the urging force of the coil spring so that the closing portion 352a and the shutter ball extraction hole 352b move rearward.

Then, as the opening / closing shutter 352 rotates rearward, the shutter ball extraction hole 352b overlaps with the lower plate ball extraction hole 324b and the base ball extraction hole 351a, and eventually the shutter ball extraction hole 352b and the lower plate ball extraction hole 352b. Matching with 324b, the game ball stored in the lower plate 302 can be discharged to the lower side of the plate unit 300 through the lower plate ball extraction hole 324b. When the lower plate ball extraction slider 353 moves rearward to a position where the shutter ball extraction hole 352b and the lower plate ball extraction hole 324b substantially coincide with each other, the lower plate ball extraction slider 353 is held by the holding mechanism 355. By locking (holding) the slide of the lower plate ball removal slider 353, the lower plate ball removal button 354 remains in the open state retracted rearward, and the shutter ball removal hole 352b is the lower plate ball. It is held in a state of matching with the drawing hole 3324b, and the game ball stored in the lower plate 302 can be discharged downward even if the lower plate ball removing button 354 is not held down.

On the other hand, when closing the lower plate ball removal hole 324b, when the retracted open lower plate ball removal button 354 is further pressed backward, the holding of the lower plate ball removal slider 353 by the holding mechanism 355 is released, and the lower plate is released. The ball pulling slider 353 can be slid, and the closing portion 352a is urged in the direction of closing the lower plate ball pulling hole 324b by the coil spring, and the closing portion 352a is urged by the urging force to close the lower plate. It will rotate in the direction of moving in the direction (forward) of the ball extraction hole 324b. Then, as the opening / closing shutter 352 rotates forward, the lower plate ball removing slider 353 slides forward, the lower plate ball removing hole 324b is closed by the closing portion 352a, and the lower plate ball removing button 354 is lowered. It returns to the closed position substantially coincided with the front surface of the plate cover 328 and the like, and the game ball can be stored in the lower plate 302.

The holding mechanism 355 of the lower plate ball removing mechanism 350 uses a known technique having the above-mentioned function, and the detailed mechanism thereof will be omitted.

The ball lending unit 360 in the plate unit 300 includes a ball lending button 361 and a return button 362 that can be pressed backward, and also includes a lending balance display unit 363 between the ball lending button 361 and the return button 362. The ball lending unit 360 inserts cash or a prepaid card into the ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1, and then presses the ball lending button 361 to release a predetermined number of game balls to the plate unit 300. You can rent (pay out) into the upper plate 301, and when you press the return button 362, the balance of cash and prepaid cards that you put in after subtracting the rest of the lent amount will be returned. There is. In addition, the loan balance display unit 363 displays the remaining number of cash and prepaid cards inserted into the ball lending machine.

The ball rental unit 360 is attached from the rear side to the ball rental unit mounting portion 310b formed on the decorative portion 310a at the upper end of the dish unit base 310. Further, the ball rental unit 360 is provided with a security cover mounting portion 364 that projects rearward from the rear surface and mounts and locks the mounting elastic piece 185 on the shaft support side (left side in front view) of the security cover 180.

[1-2G. Operation unit]
Next, the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 to 51. FIG. 45 is a front perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 46 is a rear perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame. Further, FIG. 47 is an exploded perspective view of the operating unit disassembled and viewed from the upper right front, and FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the operating unit disassembled and viewed from the lower right front. Further, FIG. 49 is a cross-sectional view of the operation unit, and FIG. 50 is a cross-sectional view showing the pressing operation unit in the operation unit in a pressed state.

The operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is arranged in front of the upper plate 301 at substantially the center in the left-right direction of the front view, and the dial operation unit 401 that can be rotated by the player and the press that the player can press. It is equipped with an operation unit 405, which can accept the player's operation according to the game state and the dial operation unit 401 can be moved, so that the player can not only drive the game ball but also operate the game ball. , It is intended to be able to participate in the production during the game.

The operation unit 400 is an annular driven operation unit connected to an annular dial operation unit 401, a cylindrical pressing operation unit 405 inserted into the ring of the dial operation unit 401, and a lower end of the pressing operation unit 405. A gear 410, a disk-shaped drive gear 412 that meshes with the driven gear 410, a dial drive motor 414 in which the drive gear 412 is fixed to a rotating shaft, an annular gear rail 416a that rotatably supports the driven gear 410, and an annular gear rail 416a. The operation unit holding member 416 having a cylindrical button support cylinder 416b that slidably supports the pressing operation unit 405 in the vertical direction, and the pressing operation unit 405 arranged in the button support cylinder 416b of the operation unit holding member 416. A base member having an upward urging spring 418, a gear rail 416a of the operation unit holding member 416 and an opening 420a through which the button support cylinder 416b can pass, and the operation unit holding member 416 and the dial drive motor 414 being fixed to the lower surface. The base is mounted so as to sandwich the base member 420 under the upper cover 422 and the upper cover 422 having an opening 422a that covers the upper surface of the base member 420 and allows the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 to pass through. It mainly includes a member 420 and a lower cover 424 that covers the lower surface of the dial drive motor 414.

Further, the operation unit 400 is fixed to the base member 420 so as to cover the upper side of the upper cover 422 and extends outward from both the left and right sides of the opening 426a through which the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 can pass and the opening 426a. A cover main body 426 having a fixing portion 426b for fixing to the operation unit mounting portion 314c in the dish unit 300, a surface cover 428 covering the upper surface of the cover main body 426, and an operation portion holding member 416 attached to the upper surface of the base member 420. The dial decorative board 430 has an opening 430a through which the inner cylinder portion 401a of the button support cylinder 416b and the dial operation portion 401 can pass, and a plurality of color LEDs 430b are mounted at positions corresponding to the ring of the dial operation portion 401 on the upper surface. A pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b fixed to the lower side of the base member 420 to detect the rotation of the dial operation unit 401, a pressure detection sensor 432c to detect the operation of the pressing operation unit 405, and a pressing operation unit 405. It includes a button decorative substrate 432 having a color LED 432d mounted on the upper surface directly below.

The dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 of this example is made of a translucent material, and has a tubular inner cylinder portion 401a extending in the vertical direction and an inner cylinder portion 401a from the upper end to the outside. An annular top plate 401b with a predetermined decoration on the extending surface, an outer cylinder 401c shorter than the inner cylinder 401a extending downward from the outer peripheral end of the top plate 401b, and an outer cylinder. It mainly includes a flange portion 401d extending outward from the lower end of the portion 401c in an annular shape. The outer diameter of the flange portion 401d of the dial operation portion 401 is larger than the inner diameter of the opening 422a of the upper cover 422. Further, the dial operation unit 401 is provided with a connection locking portion (see FIG. 48) at the lower end of the inner cylinder portion 401a, and the dial operation unit 401 is locked by locking the connection locking claw 410b of the driven gear 410. The 401 and the driven gear 410 can be connected to each other.

Further, the dial operation unit 401 is further provided with a projecting portion 401f protruding from the inner wall of the inner cylinder portion 401a toward the center at a position lowered by a predetermined distance from the upper end. The protruding portion 401f of the dial operating portion 401 is formed in an annular shape along the inner circumference of the inner cylinder portion 401a. Although the details will be described later, the protruding portion 401f can come into contact with the stepped portion 407a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operation portion 405, and the stepped portion 407a of the button cap 407 protrudes from the dial operating portion 401. By contacting the portion 401f, it is possible to prevent the button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) from further immersing in the inner cylinder portion 401a (see FIG. 50).

As shown in the figure, the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 and the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operation portion 405 are lowered so that their contact surfaces become lower toward the center of the dial operation portion 401. The surface is sloped so that the contact area when they come into contact with each other becomes large. As a result, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be more dispersed (released) to the dial operation unit 401 side, and the vibration from the dial operation unit 401 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 side. It has become.

Further, the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400 is formed in a cylindrical shape with the upper end closed, and has a bottomed tubular button body 406, a button cap 407 that closes the upper end of the button body 406, and a button cap. It includes a cap inner 408 that is arranged inside the 407 and is sandwiched between the upper end of the button body 406 and the button cap 407. The button body 406 of the pressing operation unit 405 has a truncated cone shape in which the lower surface of the bottom portion narrows downward, and the upper end of the coiled spring 418 is inserted into the lower surface of the truncated cone shape. In addition, a through hole 406a penetrating in the vertical direction is provided in the center of the lower end surface of the truncated cone shape, and light from the LED 432d of the button decorative substrate 432 is irradiated to the button cap 407 and the cap inner 408 through the through hole 406a. It has become like.

Further, the button body 406 has a pair of locking claws 406b whose lower end extends downward from the lower part of the outer circumference and protrudes outward in the direction perpendicular to the axis, and the locking claws 406b are the operating portion holding member 416. By locking with the locking convex portion 416g (see FIGS. 49 and 50) formed in the button support cylinder 416b, the upward moving end is moved so that the button body 406 does not come off from the button support cylinder 416b. It can be regulated. Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, a contact portion for preventing the locking claw 406b of the button main body 406 from moving in the circumferential direction is provided in the button support cylinder 416b of the operation portion holding member 416. The button body 406 (pressing operation unit 405) is prevented from rotating in the button support cylinder 416b. A predetermined amount of gap is formed in the circumferential direction between the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 and the contact portion in the button support cylinder 416b, and the gap allows the button body 406 to have a predetermined angle. It can rotate within the range.

Further, the button body 406 includes a press detection piece 406c that can be detected by the press detection sensor 432c of the button decorative substrate 432 that extends downward from a position different from that of the locking claw 406b. When the button body 406 (pressing operation unit 405) moves downward against the urging force of the spring 418, the pressing detection piece 406c is detected by the pressing detection sensor 432c.

Further, as shown in the figure, the button cap 407 of the pressing operation unit 405 has an outer diameter lower than the substantially center in the vertical direction and a smaller diameter than the upper side, and the step portion 407a is located between the upper side and the lower side. Is formed. The button cap 407 (pressing operation unit 405) has a diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the protrusion 401f in the dial operation unit 401 on the lower side of the step portion 407a, and a dial operation unit on the upper side of the step portion 407a. The diameter is smaller than the inner diameter of the inner cylinder portion 401a of the 401 and is larger than the inner diameter of the protruding portion 401f. As a result, when the button cap 407 (pressing operation unit 405) is inserted into the inner cylinder portion 401a from the upper side of the dial operation unit 401, the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 comes into contact with the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation unit 401. , The button cap 407 (pressing operation unit 405) can no longer be immersed in the inner cylinder portion 401a (see FIG. 50).

Further, the button cap 407 and the cap inner 408 of the pressing operation unit 405 are formed of a material having a translucent ring. The characters "Push" are displayed on the upper surface of the cap inner 408, and the characters can be visually recognized from the outside through the button cap 407.

The driven gear 410 in the operation unit 400 includes a plurality of gear teeth that mesh with the drive gear 412 on the outer circumference of the annular shape. The inner diameter of the driven gear 410 is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the button support cylinder 416b in the operating portion holding member 416, and the annular sliding surface is in contact with the gear rail 416a of the operating portion holding member 416 on the lower surface. It has a moving surface 410a. By inserting the driven gear 410 into the button support cylinder 416b and bringing the sliding surface 410a into contact with the gear rail 416a, the driven gear 410 can slide and rotate substantially concentrically with the button support cylinder 416b. It has become.

Further, the driven gear 410 includes a pair of connecting locking claws 410b that extend upward from the opposite positions of the upper ends and then project inward, and the connecting locking claws 410b are used in the dial operation unit 401. By locking the inner cylinder portion 401a with the connection locking portion 401e, the driven gear 410 and the dial operation portion 401 are integrally rotatably connected.

Further, the driven gear 410 includes a plurality of rotation detection pieces 410c that project downward from the lower end and are arranged in a row at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. These rotation detection pieces 410c are detected by a pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decorative substrate 432, and details will be described later, but the rotation detection piece 410c and the rotation detection piece 410c are of each other. With the slit 410d formed between them, the rotation direction of the driven gear 410, that is, the dial operation unit 401 can be detected by the detection patterns of the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b with respect to the rotation detection piece 410c. In this example, the rotation detection piece 410c and the slit 410d have substantially the same length in the circumferential direction.

Further, as shown in the figure, the drive gear 412 in the operation unit 400 is a spur gear that meshes with the driven gear 410, and is fixed so as to be integrally rotatable with the rotation shaft of the dial drive motor 414. Further, the dial drive motor 414 is a known two-phase stepping motor capable of arbitrarily controlling the rotation direction, rotation speed, and rotation angle, and the dial drive motor 414 rotates the drive gear 412 via the rotation shaft. By driving, the dial operation unit 401 can be rotated via the driven gear 410. Further, the dial operation unit 401 can be vibrated by repeating the forward rotation and the reverse rotation of the drive gear 412 (rotation shaft) in small steps by the dial drive motor 414. Further, by stopping the rotation of the dial drive motor 414 for a short time at each predetermined rotation angle based on the detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 342b, the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 is clicked. It is possible to give a feeling.

Further, the operation unit holding member 416 of the operation unit 400 has an annular gear rail 416a that rotatably supports the driven gear 410 and a button body 406 of the operation unit 405 that protrudes upward from the inside of the gear rail 416a in a tubular shape. A button support cylinder 416b that slidably supports the button body 416b and a locking convex portion 416g that is formed on the inner peripheral surface of the button support cylinder 416b near the bottom and can be locked with the locking claw 406b of the button body 406. (See FIGS. 49 and 50) and a through hole 416c that penetrates the center of the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and sends light from the LED 432d mounted on the button decorative substrate 432 into the button support cylinder 416b (pressing operation unit 405). The opening 416d through which the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decorative substrate 432 can pass through the bottom portion outside the button support cylinder 416b in the vertical direction, and the bottom portion inside the button support cylinder 416b in the vertical direction. The opening 416e desired from above by the press detection sensor 432c attached to the button decorative substrate 432, and a pair of substrate holding claws 416f for locking and holding the button decorative substrate 432 extending downward from the lower surface. I have.

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the operation unit holding member 416 is arranged in the button support cylinder 416b, forms a predetermined amount of gap in the circumferential direction with respect to the locking claw 406b of the button main body 406, and is locked. It is further provided with a plurality of contact portions capable of contacting the claw 406b. The contact portion allows the button body 406 (pressing operation portion 405) to rotate within a predetermined angle range and does not rotate around in the button support cylinder 416b. Further, although detailed description of the operation unit holding member 416 is omitted, a screw hole for fixing to the base member 420, a positioning boss for positioning with the base member 420 and the button decorative substrate 432, and the like are appropriately positioned. Be prepared for.

The operation unit holding member 416 slides the driven gear 410 (dial operation unit 401) around a predetermined rotation axis by inserting the driven gear 410 on the outer circumference of the button support cylinder 416b and mounting it on the gear rail 416a. It can be supported so that it can move and rotate. Further, by inserting the button body 406 of the pressing operation unit 405 into the button support cylinder 416b, the pressing operation unit 405 can be slidably supported in the vertical direction via the button body 406. .. A coiled spring 418 is arranged between the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and the truncated cone-shaped lower surface of the button body 406. The spring 418 causes the button body 406 (pressing operation unit). 405) is in a state of being urged upward.

The base member 420 in the operation unit 400 is made of a metal such as an aluminum alloy, so that the operation unit 400 is not easily damaged even if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 is strongly hit. The base member 420 penetrates the lower concave portion 420b, which is recessed upward so that the outer periphery of the operating portion holding member 416 can be fitted, and the bottom portion (ceiling portion) of the lower concave portion 420b in the vertical direction, and the operating portion holding member 416 An opening 420a having an inner shape through which the gear rail 416a of the above can pass, and an upper recess 420c which is arranged on the opposite side of the opening 420a from the lower recess 420b and which is recessed downward so as to accommodate at least the driven gear 410. It has. Further, as shown in FIG. 48, the base member 420 is opened downward to the outside of the lower recess 420b, and the motor mounting portion 420d for mounting the dial drive motor 414 and the lower recess 420b from the outside to the lower side. It is provided with a plurality of (four in this example) leg portions 420e protruding by a predetermined amount, and a positioning hole 420f that opens downward at the lower end of each leg portion 420e.

Further, the base member 420 has a plurality of cover fixing portions 420g for fixing the cover main body 426 arranged above the upper recess 420c, and the cover fixing portion 420g is upward from different positions on the outside of the upper recess 420c. It is provided with a plurality of board mounting bosses 420h for mounting the dial decorative board 430 projecting to. Further, although detailed description is omitted, the base member 420 is formed with positioning bosses, mounting holes, and the like for positioning each member at appropriate positions on the upper surface and the lower surface thereof.

The base member 420 has a predetermined screw after fitting and inserting the operation portion holding member 416 into the lower recess 420b so that the button support cylinder 416b and the gear rail 416a pass from the lower side with respect to the central opening 420a. Is screwed into the operation portion holding member 416 from the upper side through the ceiling portion of the lower recess 420b, so that the operation portion holding member 416 can be supported. Although detailed illustration of the base member 420 is omitted, when the operation portion holding member 416 is supported, the upper end of the gear rail 416a is slightly above the upper surface of the ceiling portion of the lower recess 420b, that is, the bottom surface of the upper recess 420c. The driven gear 410 mounted on the gear rail 416a can slide and rotate in the upper recess 420c without any problem.

Further, in the leg portion 420e of the base member 420, the positioning hole 420f formed at the lower end thereof is fitted with the positioning projection 424a formed on the upper surface of the bottom portion of the lower cover 424 described later, and the base member 420. The 420 and the lower cover 424 can be positioned at positions determined to each other. Further, the board mounting boss 420h of the base member 420 projects to a position above the driven gear 410 housed and arranged in the upper recess 420c, and the dial decorative board 430 mounted on the board mounting boss 420h is driven. It is designed so that it does not come into contact with the gear 410.

Further, the base member 420 comes into contact with the upper surface of the dial drive motor 414 by attaching the dial drive motor 414 to the motor mounting portion 420d, and heat from the dial drive motor 414 is transferred to the base member 420 side. The heat of the dial drive motor 414 can be sufficiently dissipated by the base member 420. As a result, overheating of the dial drive motor 414 can be suppressed, and it is possible to prevent a malfunction of the dial drive motor 414 or the like due to overheating.

The upper cover 422 of the operation unit 400 has a box shape with an open bottom, and has an inner diameter opening 422a through which the outer cylinder portion 401c of the dial operation portion 401 can pass and the collar portion 401d cannot pass through. ing. The upper cover 422 has a long direction (left-right direction in the pachinko machine 1) connecting the axis of the pressing operation unit 405 (driven gear 410) and the axis of the dial drive motor 414 (drive gear 412) in a plan view. It is formed so as to extend, and has engaging claws 422b protruding downward at both ends in the longitudinal direction thereof. By engaging the engaging claws 422b with the engaging portion 424b of the lower cover 424, the upper part The cover 422 and the lower cover 424 can be assembled.

Further, the upper cover 422 extends downward from the outer circumference in one of the short axis directions (front-rear direction in the pachinko machine 1) (front side in the pachinko machine 1), and the lower end protrudes outward in a claw-shaped locking piece 422c. It has. The locking piece 422c can be locked to the upper plate front decorative member 316 of the plate unit 300, and by locking the locking piece 422c to the upper plate front decorative member 316, the locking piece 422c can be locked to the upper plate front decorative member 316. It is possible to prevent the operation unit 400 from coming out of the operation unit mounting portion 314c upward.

The upper cover 422 has the operation unit holding member 416, the driven gear 410, the dial decorative substrate 430, the dial operation unit 401, and the like attached to the base member 420, and the dial operation unit 401 from below with respect to the opening 422a. By covering the upper part of the base member 420 so as to pass through, it is possible to prevent the dial operation unit 401 from coming out upward by the opening 422a.

On the other hand, the lower cover 424 of the operation unit 400 has a box shape with an open upper part, and the outer peripheral shape is substantially the same as the outer circumference of the upper cover 422. It is provided with a positioning protrusion 424a that can be fitted with the positioning hole 420f at the lower end of the 420e. The lower cover 424 is provided with engaging portions 424b that can be engaged with the engaging claws 422b of the upper cover 422 at the upper portions of both ends in the long axis direction (left-right direction in the pachinko machine 1), and the engaging portions 424b are provided with the engaging portions 424b. By engaging the engaging claw 422b, the upper cover 422 can be attached to the lower cover 424.

As shown in the figure, the cover body 426 of the operation unit 400 has an opening 426a that penetrates vertically in the center and allows the dial operation unit 401 (excluding the collar portion 401d) to pass through, and extends outward from both the left and right sides of the opening 426a. It includes a fixing portion 426b fixed to the operation unit mounting portion 314c of the serving plate unit 300, and a fixing boss 426c fixed to the cover fixing portion 420g of the base member 420 extending downward from the lower surface of the outer periphery of the opening 426a. ..

The operation unit 400 of this example is attached to the dish unit 300 via the fixing portion 426b of the cover main body 426, and although detailed illustration is omitted, it is attached to the operation unit mounting portion 314c of the dish unit 300. In the state, the lower surface of the operation unit 400 (lower cover 424) is mounted so as to be slightly above the upper surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c (for example, 0.5 mm to 2.0 mm), and the operation unit 400 is mounted. The cover body 426 is elastically deformed when the cover body is pressed or hit, so that the impact can be mitigated.

In the operation unit 400, with the surface cover 428 removed, the fixing portion 426b of the cover main body 426 is attached to the operation unit mounting portion 314c of the dish unit 300 with a predetermined screw, and then the cover main body 426 The structure is such that the surface cover 428 is attached to the upper surface.

In the operation unit 400 of the present embodiment, the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410 that rotates together with the dial operation unit 401 has the length in the circumferential direction in the slit between the adjacent rotation detection pieces 410c and the circumference of the rotation detection piece 410c. The lengths in the directions are the same. Further, in the pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decorative substrate 432, the circumferential interval corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 is 2.5 times the circumferential length of the rotation detection piece 410c. It is said that. As a result, although details will be described later, when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401, a time lag occurs in the detection / non-detection of the rotation detection piece 410c by the pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b, and each rotation detection From the detection pattern of the rotation detection piece 410c by the sensors 432a and 432b, it is possible to detect in which direction the dial operation unit 401 is rotating.

Further, although the details of the operation unit 400 of this example will be described later, the dial operation unit 401 can be rotated clockwise or counterclockwise by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414. .. Further, the operation unit 400 rotates the dial operation unit 401 stepwise by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414 using the stepping motor, or when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401, the operation unit 400 rotates the dial operation unit 401. It is possible to assist the rotation, prevent it from rotating intentionally, and give a click feeling to the rotation. Further, the operation unit 400 can vibrate the dial operation unit 401 by repeatedly rotating the dial drive motor 414 in the forward and reverse directions in small steps.

Further, in the operation unit 400 of this example, as shown in FIG. 50, when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed downward, the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 comes into contact with the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation unit 401, and the button cap Since the 407 (pressing operation unit 405) can no longer be immersed in the inner cylinder portion 401a, the load applied to the pressing operation unit 405 is dialed via the step portion 407a and the protruding portion 401f. It can be dispersed to the operation unit 401 side, and the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit 400) is not easily broken.

Further, in the operation unit 400 of this example, the dial drive motor 414 is moved in small steps in a state where the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 and the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation unit 401 are in contact with each other by pressing the pressing operation unit 405. By repeating the rolling and reversing, the pressing operation unit 405 can be vibrated together with the dial operating unit 401, and the vibration of the pressing operation unit 405 can surprise the player and entertain the game and the production. It has become.

[1-2H. Handle device]
Next, the handle device 500 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 51. FIG. 51 is an exploded perspective view of the handle device in the door frame as viewed after being disassembled. As shown in the figure, the handle device 500 of the present embodiment is attached to the handle bracket 140 attached to the front surface of the door frame base main body 110 of the door frame base unit 100 through the handle insertion hole 334a of the dish side outer cover 334 of the dish unit 300. A fixed, cylindrical handle base 502 with a rounded front end bulging in the direction perpendicular to the axis, an annular rotary handle body rear 504 arranged on the front side of the handle base 502 so as to be rotatable relative to the handle base 502, and a rotary handle. Rotating handle fixed to the front of the rear 504 of the main body and rotatable integrally with the rear 504 of the main body. A front end cover 508 that rotatably supports the front 506 of the rotary handle body and the rear 504 of the rotary handle body in cooperation with each other is provided.

Further, the handle device 500 is mounted and fixed so as to project from the front side to the rear side at the rotation center in front of the rotary handle body, and has a shaft member 510 having a non-circular bearing portion 510a at the rear end and a bearing portion of the shaft member 510. The rotation position detection sensor 512, which has a detection shaft portion 512a that is fitted to the 510a and is rotatable and is non-rotatably fitted to the front surface of the handle base 502, and the rotation position detection sensor 512 are sandwiched between the handle base 502. A sensor support member 514 having a through hole 514a fixed to the front surface of the handle base 502 and through which the detection shaft portion 512a of the rotation position detection sensor 512 can pass, a touch sensor 516 attached to the rear surface of the sensor support member 514, and a touch. The sensor 516 is a launch stop switch 518 attached to a different position on the rear surface of the sensor support member 514, a single-shot button 520 rotatably supported by the sensor support member 514 to operate the launch stop switch 518, and a shaft member 510. With a handle return spring 522 that is arranged so as to cover the outer circumference of the rotary handle body and urges the rotary handle body front 506 and the rotary handle body rear 504 to return to the initial rotation position (rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). , Is equipped.

As shown in the figure, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 of this example has a hemispherical shape that bulges toward the front end side and a cylindrical shape with the rear end side open. Three groove portions 502a extending in the axial direction are formed on the outer circumference of the cylinder on the rear end side. The three groove portions 502a of the handle base 502 are one on the upper side, two on the lower side, and unequally spaced in the circumferential direction so as to correspond to the three ridges 143 in the tubular portion 141 of the handle bracket 140. Have been placed. The handle base 502 is supported in a non-rotatable state by being inserted into the tubular portion 141 of the handle bracket 140 so that the groove portion 502a fits with the ridge 143.

In the handle device 500, an arcuate slit 506a arranged concentrically with the rotation shaft is formed in the front 506 of the rotary handle body, and three mounting bosses 508a protruding rearward are formed in the front end cover 508. These mounting bosses 508a are fixed to the front surface of the handle base 502 through the slit 506a of the rotary handle main body front 506. As a result, the circumferential end of the slit 506a in the front 506 of the rotary handle body comes into contact with the mounting boss 508a of the front end cover 508, so that the rotation range of the rotary handle body 504 and 506 is restricted.

Further, in the handle device 500, a locking protrusion 506b projecting rearward is formed in the front 506 of the rotary handle body, and one end side (front end side) of the coil-shaped handle return spring 522 is formed in the locking protrusion 506b. Is locked, and the other end side (rear end side) of the handle return spring 522 is locked to the sensor support member 514. The handle return spring 522 locks the rotary handle body 504. , 506 are urged to rotate counterclockwise in front view.

The handle device 500 of this example is adapted to be attached to the handle attachment portion 114 of the door frame base main body 110 via the handle bracket 140. Since the mounting surface of the handle mounting portion 114 of the door frame base main body 110 is inclined so as to face the outside (open side) in a plan view viewed from above, the handle mounted via the handle bracket 140. The device 500 is also tilted outward in a plan view (in other words, its tip is tilted toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front vertical plane of the pachinko machine 1) to form a door frame. It is designed to be mounted and fixed to 5. As a result, the player can easily grip the handle device 500, and the rotation operation can be easily performed without any discomfort in the rotation operation.

Further, in the handle device 500, the rotation position detection sensor 512 is a variable resistor, and when the rotation handle main body 504,506 (handle device 500) is rotated, the rotation position detection sensor 512 is detected via the shaft member 510. The shaft portion 512a will rotate. Then, the internal resistance of the rotation position detection sensor 512 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft portion 512a, and the driving force of the launch solenoid 654 in the ball launching device 650 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the rotation position detection sensor 512. Then, the game ball is driven into the game area 1100 with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle device 500.

The outer peripheral surfaces of the rotary handle main body 504, 506 and the front end cover 508 are conductively plated, and the touch sensor 516 detects the contact when the player comes into contact with the rotary handle main body 504, 506 and the like. It has become like. Then, when the rotation handle main body 504, 506 rotates while the touch sensor 516 detects the contact of the player, the rotation drive of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled by the strength corresponding to the rotation, and the game ball You can type in. That is, even if the player tries to drive the game ball by rotating the handle device 500 in some way without touching the handle device 500, the launch solenoid 654 is not driven and the game ball cannot be driven. It is possible to prevent the player from playing a game different from the original one and reduce the load (burden) on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, when the player presses the single-shot button 520 while rotating the handle device 500, the firing stop switch 518 detects the operation of the single-shot button 520, and the firing control unit 4120 stops the rotational drive of the firing solenoid 654. It has become like. As a result, the firing of the game ball can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotation operation of the handle device 500, and by releasing the pressing operation of the single-shot button 520, before the single-shot button 520 is operated. It is possible to launch a game ball with the driving strength.

The handle device 500 of this example electrically detects the rotation operation of the rotation handle main bodies 504 and 506 by the rotation position detection sensor 512, and then launch control based on the detection of the rotation position from the rotation position detection sensor 512. Since the rotation drive strength of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled by the unit 4120, the handle device 500 provided in the door frame 5 and the ball launching device 650 provided in the main body frame 3 are provided as in the conventional pachinko machine. It is not necessary to provide a mechanical (for example, joint unit) mechanism so that the door frame 5 is linked to each other when the door frame 5 is closed and the linkage is released when the door frame 5 is opened, which simplifies the configuration of the pachinko machine 1. In addition to this, it is possible to eliminate the occurrence of defects in the joint unit, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest due to the malfunction of the gaming ball.

[1-2I. Foul cover unit]
Next, the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 52 to 54. FIG. 52 is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit in the door frame disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit in the door frame disassembled and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 54 is a front view showing a state in which the front cover of the foul cover unit is removed.

The foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 is attached to the rear surface below the game window 101 in the door frame base unit 100, and is launched by a game ball paid out from the prize ball unit 700, which will be described later, or a hit ball launching device 650. Despite this, the game ball (foul ball) that has not reached the game area 1100 is guided to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300. The foul cover unit 540 of this example includes a cover base 542 whose front side is open and has a plurality of game ball flow paths inside, and a front cover 544 that closes the front end of the cover base 542.

As shown in FIG. 53, the cover base 542 of the foul cover unit 540 has a first ball inlet 542a arranged in the upper right corner in the rear view and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a front end of the cover base 542 communicating with the first ball entrance. The first ball passage 542b that expands to the right side in the front view, the second ball entrance 542c that is located outside the first ball entrance 542a (on the right side in the rear view) and is larger than the first ball entrance 542a, and the second. Inside the cover base 542 that communicates with the ball passage 542d, a second ball entrance 542c that extends downward and is inclined so as to be lowered toward the lower right corner in the front view is provided. The first ball entrance 542a and the second ball entrance 542c are the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 77 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. They are formed at positions facing each other. As shown in the figure, the height of the portion of the cover base 542 extending in the left-right direction along the lower end of the second ball passage 542d is about three times as high as the outer diameter of the game ball. , A storage space 546 that can accommodate a predetermined amount of game balls is formed.

Further, the cover base 542 communicates with the foul ball inlet 542e, which is arranged at the substantially central upper part in the left-right direction and opens upward, and the foul ball entrance 542e, and can guide the game ball to the upper part near the downstream side of the second ball passage 542d. It is provided with a foul ball passage 542f. Further, the cover base 542 is provided with an opening / closing actuating piece 542g for operating the opening / closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 on the lower rear surface of the second ball inlet 542c. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the opening / closing operating piece 542g abuts on the spherical contact portion 793d of the opening / closing crank 793 in the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 to rotate the opening / closing crank 793. The open / close shutter 792 can be opened.

The front cover 544 of the foul cover unit 540 is formed in a substantially plate shape that closes the front surface of the cover base 542, is arranged in the upper left corner of the front view, communicates with the first ball passage 542b of the cover base 542, and penetrates in the front-rear direction. The first ball outlet 544a is provided, and the second ball outlet 544b which is arranged in the lower right corner of the front view and communicates with the downstream end of the second ball passage of the cover base 542 and penetrates in the front-rear direction. The first ball outlet 544a of the front cover 544 is connected to the upper plate ball supply port 310c of the plate unit 300 through the notch 101a of the door frame base unit 100. Further, the second ball outlet 544b is connected to the rear end of the lower plate ball supply gutter 310h in the plate unit 300 through the ball passage port 110f of the door frame base main body 110.

In the foul cover unit 540 of this example, the game ball supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 to the first ball entrance 542a is passed through the first ball passage 542b to the first ball outlet. It is possible to supply from 544a to the upper plate 301 via the upper plate ball supply port 310c of the plate unit 300. Further, the foul cover unit 540 passes the game ball supplied from the full tank outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 to the second ball entrance 542c through the second ball passage 542d to the second ball outlet. It is possible to supply from 544b to the lower plate 302 via the lower plate ball supply gutter 310h and the lower plate ball supply port 310g of the plate unit 300.

Further, although the details of the foul cover unit 540 will be described later, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball entrance 542e is located below the foul space 626 of the main body frame 3. If the game ball launched by the hitting ball launching device 650 does not reach the game area 1100 and becomes a foul ball and falls in the foul space 626, it can be received by the foul ball entrance 542e. Then, the foul cover unit 540 discharges (supplies) the game ball received at the foul ball inlet 542e from the second ball outlet 544b to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 through the foul ball passage 542f and the second ball passage 542d. ) Can be done.

Further, the foul cover unit 540 of this example forms a side surface on the upstream side (left side in the front view) of the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d, and can be swung by the game ball stored in the accommodation space 546. A swing member 548 pivotally supported by the swing member 548, a full tank detection sensor 550 that detects the swing of the swing member 548, and a spring that urges the swing member 548 in a direction in which the full tank detection sensor 550 is in a non-detection state. 552 and. As shown in FIG. 54, the lower end of the swing member 548 is rotatably supported with respect to the cover base 542, and the upper end of the swing member 548 rotates to the left side in the front view, and is substantially vertical. The left side wall of the accommodation space 546 is formed in such a state. Further, the swing member 548 is urged by a spring 552 to a position where it is in a substantially vertical state. Further, the rocking member 548 is formed with a detection piece 548a projecting outward on the side surface opposite to the accommodation space 546 side, and the detection piece 548a is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550. There is.

Further, the foul cover unit 540 includes an earth rail 554 arranged at the bottom of the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d, and a plate-shaped earth metal fitting 556 that covers the right end and the left end of the cover base 542 when viewed from the rear. , And can remove static electricity generated by rolling resistance due to the circulation of game balls.

In this example, the game ball paid out from the prize ball unit 700 is supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 via the foul cover unit 540. Even if the upper plate 301 is full, if the game ball is further paid out from the prize ball unit 700, it stays in the first ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540, and further, at the normal ball outlet 774 in the full tank branch unit 770. When the upstream normal passage 773 is also full, the game balls are circulated to the full tank passage 775 side through the branch space 772 of the full tank branch unit 770 (see FIG. 79), and the full tank branch unit 770 It will be supplied from the full tank outlet 776 to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 via the second ball inlet 542c, the second ball passage 542d, and the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540.

Then, when the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 was filled with the game balls, the game balls could not be discharged from the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540, and the game balls stayed in the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d. The game balls will be stored. Further, as the game balls are discharged from the prize ball unit 700 and a large number of game balls are stored in the accommodation space 546, the storage pressure of the game balls acts on the swing member 548 to resist the urging force of the spring 552. The upper end of the swing member 548 will move to the left. Then, when the detection piece 548a of the rocking member 548 is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550, the payout control board 4110 stops paying out the game balls from the prize ball unit 700, and the dish unit is for the player. A notification is provided to urge the game balls in the 300 to be discharged to the outside.

When the game ball in the accommodation space 546 (lower plate 302) is discharged and the swing member 548 returns to a substantially vertical state by the urging force of the spring 552, the detection piece 548a is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550. It is not detected, and the payout of the game ball from the prize ball unit 700 is restarted.

[1-2J. Ball feed unit]
Subsequently, the ball feed unit 580 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 55 and 57. FIG. 55 is a front perspective view of the ball feed unit in the door frame. FIG. 56 is a rear perspective view of the ball feed unit in the door frame. Further, FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the ball feed unit disassembled and viewed from the front. FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the ball feed unit with the rear case removed and viewed from the rear. The ball feed unit 580 in the door frame 5 can supply the game balls supplied from the upper plate 301 in the plate unit 300 to the hitting ball launching device 650 one by one, and also supplies the game balls stored in the upper plate 301. The upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 can be removed to the lower plate 302 by operating the upper plate ball removing button 341.

In the ball feed unit 580, the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 are supplied through the upper plate ball discharge port 310d of the plate unit base 310 and the ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base main body 110 in the front-rear direction. A box-shaped front cover 581 having a penetrating entrance 581a and a ball outlet 581b that opens below the entrance 581a and having an open rear, and a box-shaped front cover 581 that closes the rear end of the front cover 581 and opens the front. A rear cover 582, a rear cover 582, and a front cover, which are box-shaped and have a ball hitting supply port 582a for supplying a game ball that penetrates in the front-rear direction and enters from the entrance 581a of the front cover 581 to the ball launching device 650. A ball pulling member 583 that is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between 581 and has a partition portion 583a that separates the entrance 581a and the ball pulling port 581b on the rear side of the front cover 581. , The game balls on the partition portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 are sent one by one to the hit ball supply port 582a of the rear cover, and are rotatably supported around the axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover 581 and the rear cover 582. The ball feed member 584 and the ball feed solenoid 585 that rotates the ball feed member 584 are provided. In this example, as shown in the figure, the ball feed member 584 is arranged on the right side of the entrance 581a in front view, the ball feed member 583 is on the left side of the ball feed member 584, and the ball feed solenoid 585 is on the right side. It is arranged.

The front cover 581 of the ball feed unit 580 is provided with an arcuate slit 581c formed concentrically with respect to the rotation center of the ball extraction member 583 on the left side of the ball extraction port 581b in front view. From 581c, the operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583, which will be described later, extends forward. Further, the front cover 581 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 581a, and when assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the rear end opening of the ball guiding flow path 344b in the upper plate ball removing base 344. Is formed to close.

Further, the ball pulling member 583 has a partition portion 583a and a partition portion 583a whose upper surface is lowered toward the ball feeding member 584 by partitioning between the entrance 581a and the ball ejection port 581b below the entrance 581a. It extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feed member 584, and bends in a dogleg shape from the middle of the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 581b, and the lower end extends in the front-rear direction around the axis. A rotating paddle portion 583b that is rotatably supported, a rod-shaped operating rod 583c that protrudes forward from the upper end of the rotating rod portion 583b, and a side surface of the rotating rod portion 583b below the operating rod 583c. It is provided with a weight portion 583d projecting from the partition portion 583a to the opposite side to the partition portion 583a. The operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 is formed so as to project forward through an arc-shaped slit 581c formed in the front cover 581 (see FIG. 55), and a ball feed opening of the door frame base main body 110. It comes into contact with the upper end of the contact piece 343a of the upper plate ball removing slider 343 in the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 of the plate unit 300 via 113.

Further, the ball feed member 584 has a fan-shaped blocking portion 584a and a blocking portion 584a centered on a rotation axis extending in the vertical direction in the direction of the entrance 581a and the partition portion 583a of the ball pulling member 583. It is provided with a ball holding portion 584b recessed in an arc shape from the rear end toward the center of rotation axis, and a rod-shaped rod-shaped rod portion 584c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 584b. The blocking portion 584a and the ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 54 are each formed within an angle range of about 90 ° about the center of rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 584 has a size capable of holding one game ball. The ball feed member 584 rotates around the rotation shaft core by moving the paddle portion 584c arranged at a position eccentric to the rotation shaft core in the left-right direction by driving the ball feed solenoid 585. ing.

In the ball feed member 584, the blocking portion 584a faces the direction of the partition portion 583a, and at the same time, the ball holding portion 584b faces the direction in which the ball holding portion 584b communicates with the hit ball supply port 582a, and the ball holding portion 584b faces the direction of the partition portion 583a. It is designed to rotate with and from the holding position. When the ball feed member 584 is in the supply position, the game ball held by the ball holding portion 584b is supplied to the hitting ball launching device 650 from the hitting ball supply port 582a, and the game enters the partition portion 583a from the entrance 581a. The ball is blocked from moving toward the ball holding portion 584b (ball hitting port 582a) by the blocking portion 584a, and stays on the partition portion 583a. On the other hand, when the ball feed member 584 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 584b faces the direction of the partition portion 583a, and the end of the ball holding portion 584b on the paddle portion 584c side closes the ball hitting supply port 582a. , Only one game ball on the partition portion 583a is held in the ball holding portion 584b.

Further, the ball feed unit 580 has a ball feed operating rod 586 whose tip swings in the vertical direction by driving (energizing) the ball feed solenoid 585 and a ball feed operating rod 586 that swings back and forth by the movement of the tip swinging in the vertical direction. It includes a ball feed crank 587 that rotates around an axis extending in the direction and rotates the ball feed member 584 around an axis extending in the vertical direction. The ball feed crank 587 has an engaging portion 587a extending in the left-right direction so as to be able to engage with the vertically moving tip of the ball feed operating rod 586, and a side of the engaging portion 587a that engages with the ball feed operating rod 586. Is arranged on the opposite side and is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 581 and the rear cover 582. It is provided with a transmission portion 587c that engages with a rod-shaped rod-shaped rod portion 584c (see FIG. 57) that protrudes downward from a position eccentric with respect to the center of rotation. In this example, a flapper solenoid in which the ball feed solenoid 585 and the ball feed operating rod 586 are integrally formed is used.

In the ball feed unit 580 of this example, the ball feed operation rod 586 and the ball feed crank 587 transmit the movement of the ball feed operation rod 586 that swings by the drive of the ball feed solenoid 585 that advances and retreats in the vertical direction to transmit the ball feed member. The 584 can be rotated. When the ball feed solenoid 585 is not driven (normal time), the tip of the ball feed operating rod 586 that swings away from the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 585 is positioned downward. In this state, the ball feed member 584 is located at the supply position. Further, when the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven, the ball feed operating rod 586 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 585 and the swinging tip is positioned upward so that the ball feed member 584 rotates to the holding position. It has become. That is, when the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven (ON state), the ball feed member 584 accepts one game ball, and when the drive of the ball feed solenoid 585 is released (OFF state), the ball feed member 584 receives the ball feed member 584. The game ball is sent (supplied) to the hit ball launching device 650 side. The drive of the ball feed solenoid 585 in the ball feed unit 580 is controlled by the launch control unit 4120 in synchronization with the drive control of the launch solenoid 654.

Further, the ball pulling member 583 rotatably supported by the ball feed unit 580 of this example is subjected to a moment such that the weight portion 583d rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front. The rotation of the operating rod 583c protruding forward is restricted by contacting the upper end of the contact piece 343a of the upper plate ball removing slider 343 in the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 of the plate unit 300. In the normal state, the partition portion 583a of the ball pulling member 583 partitions between the entrance 581a and the ball pulling port 581b so that the game ball does not enter the ball pulling port 581b side. Then, when the player presses the upper plate ball removal button 341 of the upper plate ball removal mechanism 340 in the plate unit 300 downward, the upper plate ball removal slider 343 slides downward together with the abutting piece 343a to abut. As the piece 343a moves downward, the working paddle 583c also moves relatively downward.

In this way, when the operating rod 583c moves downward together with the contact piece 343a of the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340, the ball removing member 583 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the entrance by the partition portion 583a. The partition between the 381a and the ball ejection port 381b is released, and the game ball that has entered from the entrance 381a is discharged from the ball extraction port 381b to the ball extraction flow path 344c of the upper plate ball extraction base 344 of the plate unit 300. , It is designed to be discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 302.

Since the contact piece 343a of the upper plate ball pulling slider 343 with which the operating paddle 583c of the ball pulling member 583 abuts is urged upward by the coil spring, the game ball is vigorously supplied onto the partition portion 583a. However, the impact can be absorbed by the coil spring that urges the upper plate ball pulling slider 343 via the operating paddle 583c, so that the ball pulling member 583 and the like can be prevented from being damaged, and the game ball can be moved. The partition portion 583a can prevent it from bouncing back.

[1-2K. Glass unit]
Next, the glass unit 590 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23. The glass unit 590 has an opening of substantially the same size as the game window 101, an annular and vertically long octagonal unit frame 592 molded from synthetic resin, and two pieces that close the front and rear ends of the opening of the unit frame 592, respectively. It includes a transparent glass plate 594 (see FIG. 106). The unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 is composed of four pieces 592a which are arranged apart from each other in the vertical direction at both left and right ends and extend outward in a plate shape, and a plate extending in the horizontal direction along the lower end and extending downward. It is provided with a locking piece 592b and the like.

The glass unit 590 locks the locking piece 592b at the lower end so as to engage with the vertically bent projecting piece 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 from the rear upper side. Then, the outer peripheral edge of the unit frame 592 is fitted into the glass unit support step 110a of the door frame base main body 110, and the stop piece 592a of the unit frame 592 is locked by the glass unit locking member 190 to lock the door frame. It is designed to be detachably attached to the base unit 100 (see FIGS. 23, 28, etc.).

As described above, in the door frame 5 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 for storing the game balls are arranged vertically on the lower side of the vertically elongated elliptical game window 101, and the lower plate 302 is arranged vertically. On the right side of the front view of the lower plate 302, the game ball stored in the upper plate 301 is driven into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 arranged behind the transparent glass unit 590 that closes the game window 101. The handle device 500 is arranged. Further, in the door frame 5, the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, and the upper decoration unit 280 are arranged so as to surround the left, right, and upper sides of the game window 101, and surround the lower side of the game window 101. As described above, the dish unit 300 is arranged so as to be continuous with the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 with the side speaker cover 290 in between, and the appearance of each unit 200, 220, 280, 300 is rounded. It has an appearance with continuous integration.

Further, the door frame 5 emits light from LEDs mounted on the decorative plates 214, 216, 254, 256, 286, 320, 322, etc. provided in the units 200, 220, 280, 300, and the like, thereby causing the game window 101 to emit light. And, it is possible to illuminate and decorate the lower plate cover 328 with an arbitrary luminescent color so as to surround the opening 328a. Further, among the LEDs mounted on the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256 provided on the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, on the rear side of the radiation lens portions 210b, 250b of the side lenses 210, 250. By turning on and off the arranged LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256, it is possible to change the mode of the light emitting decoration surrounding the game window 101.

Specifically, the light emitting modes of the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a corresponding to the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250 and the light emitting modes of the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the radiating lens portions 210b, 250b. If the modes are the same light emitting mode (the light emitting color and the light emitting pattern are the same), the entire light emitting decoration can be made substantially uniform, and if the light emitting modes are different so as to emphasize the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a. It can be used as a light emitting decoration with a break in the circumferential direction, and when the light emitting modes are different so as to emphasize the radial lens portions 210b and 250b, they shine radially around the center of the game window 101. It can be a luminescent decoration, which can strongly attract the attention of the player.

Further, in the door frame 5, the base member 420 that supports the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400 is made of die-cast aluminum alloy, and the base member 420 is made of the dish unit 300 by the cover body 426. Since it is suspended from the operation unit mounting portion 314c, when the dial operation portion 401 or the pressing operation portion 405 is hit, the cover body 426 is elastically deformed so as to bend, and then the base member 420 is lowered. The contact with the upper surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c via the cover 424 can alleviate the impact applied to the dial operation portion 401, the pressing operation portion 405, etc., and prevent the operation unit 400 from being damaged. You can do it.

Further, the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 has the pressing operation unit 405 inserted into the annular dial operation unit 401, and even if a player or the like tries to hit the pressing operation unit 405 strongly, the dial operation unit 401 is also included. Since the door is hit, the impact of the hit can be dispersed by the dial operation unit 401, and the impact can be prevented from concentrating to prevent damage. Further, the gear rail 416a of the operation unit holding member 416 that rotatably supports the dial operation unit 401 is attached so as to slightly project from the lower surface to the opening 420a of the metal base member 420 to operate the dial. When the impact of hitting the portion 401 is transmitted to the operating portion holding member 416 (gear rail 416a) via the driven gear 410 and the operating portion holding member 416 bends downward, the lower surface of the driven gear 410 is the outer circumference of the metal opening 420a. Since it comes into contact with the upper surface and the impact can be received by the base member 420, the load on the operation unit holding member 416 can be reduced and the gear rail 416a can be prevented from being crushed by the impact. , The durability of the operation unit 400 can be improved.

Further, since the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 is attached to the dish unit 300 from above, even if the operation unit 400 is damaged, the operation unit 400 can be easily replaced and operated. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1 due to the replacement of the unit 400.

[1-2L. Luminous decoration on the door frame]
Subsequently, the light emitting decoration in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60. FIG. 59 is a front view showing the arrangement of LEDs for light emitting decoration in the door frame. Further, FIG. 60 is a front view showing a system of LEDs for light emitting decoration in the door frame. In the door frame 5 of the present embodiment, the outer periphery of the game window 101 substantially corresponding to the game area 1100 of the game board 4 by the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, the upper decoration unit 280, and the plate unit 300 is substantially circular. It is formed so as to surround it. Each of these units 200, 240, 280, 300 is provided with decorative substrates 214,216, 254, 256, 286, 320, 322 on which LEDs are mounted, and by appropriately emitting light from each LED, the game window 101 It is possible to decorate the outer circumference of the window with light emission.

As described above, the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 are formed so as to surround most of the outer periphery excluding the lower side of the game window 101, and a plurality of circumferences of the side lenses 210 and 250. The lens portions 210a and 250a are arranged along the outer periphery of the game window 101, and the radial lens portions 210b and 250b extend along a radial axis centered on the vicinity of the lower center in the left-right direction of the game window 101. It is arranged between the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a adjacent to each other. The peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a and the radiating lens portions 210b, 250b of the side lenses 210, 250 are outer peripherally formed by the side decorative frames 202, 242 that are impermeable (in this example, have a plating layer on the surface). Is surrounded.

Side inner lenses 212 and 252 are arranged on the rear side of these side lenses 210 and 250, and the main body portions 212a and 252a of the side inner lenses 212 and 252 with respect to the rear surface of the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a. It is formed so as to be separated by a predetermined distance, and the plate-shaped light guide portions 212b and 252b are formed so as to extend to a position as close as possible to the rear surface of the radiation lens portions 210b and 250b. Has been done. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the main bodies 212a and 252a of the side inner lenses 212 and 252 are formed with a plurality of fine prisms on the surface thereof, and the decorative substrates 214,216 and 254 arranged on the rear side thereof. , 256 can be diffused.

The right side upper decorative substrate 214, the right side lower decorative substrate 216, the left side upper decorative substrate 254, and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 arranged behind the side inner lenses 212 and 252 have peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a. It includes LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a arranged at corresponding positions, and LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b arranged at positions corresponding to the radiation lens portions 210b, 250b. In this example, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a corresponding to the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a are full-color LEDs, and the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the radiation lens portions 210b, 250b are white LEDs (upper decoration). The normal brightness is lower than that of the LED 286b of the upper decorative substrate 286 in the unit 280). Further, the two LEDs 214c arranged above and below corresponding to the side sub-lens 228 on the right side upper decorative substrate 214 are red LEDs.

In this example, the surfaces of the right side upper decorative substrate 214, the right side lower decorative substrate 216, the left side upper decorative substrate 254, and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 are white photoresist and white printing (for example, silk printing). ), White paint, etc. to make it white. As a result, the reflectance of the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256 can be increased, so that the light from the player side is reflected by the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256 when the LEDs 210a, 210b, etc. are not lit. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the side lenses 210 and 250 from becoming too dark and unsightly, and by reflecting the light from the light emitting LEDs 210a, 210b and the like toward the player side by the substrate, the side lenses 210 and 250 can be prevented from becoming too dark. The lenses 210 and 250 can be brightly luminescent and decorated.

Next, as described above, the upper decorative unit 280 of the door frame 5 connects between the ends of the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240 facing the center side in the left-right direction of the door frame 5. It is formed so as to decorate the upper center of the game window 101. The upper decorative unit 280 includes a large central lens 282 formed in a jewel shape in the center, side lenses 284 formed in a blade shape on both the diagonally upper left and right sides of the central lens 282, and lower left and right sides of the central lens 282. It is equipped with an arranged lower lens 289. The central lens 282 of the upper decorative unit 280 is formed of a bluish transparent member, and the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289 are formed of a translucent white (milky white) member. .. As a result, the inner lens 283 arranged on the rear side of the central lens 282 can be visually recognized from the player side.

The inner lens 283 of the upper decorative unit 280 has a plurality of fine lenses (including prisms) formed on the surface thereof, and can diffusely reflect or refract light, so that the light can be diffusely reflected or refracted through the transparent central lens 282. Looking at the inner lens 283, the central lens 282 seems to have a deep taste, and the central lens 282 itself seems to be shining. Further, the player side cannot see the upper decorative substrate 286 arranged on the rear side of the inner lens 283.

The upper decorative substrate 286 in the upper decorative unit 280 includes a plurality of (six in this example) LEDs 286a corresponding to the central lens 282 and arranged behind the inner lens 283, and after the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289. It is provided with a plurality of LEDs 286b arranged on the side (in this example, two for the side lens 284 and one for the lower lens 289, which are arranged on the left and right sides). In this example, the LED 286a corresponding to the central lens 282 is a full-color LED, and the LED 286b corresponding to the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289 is a high-brightness white LED. Further, the front surface of the upper decorative substrate 286 is also white, so that the same effects as described above can be obtained.

Subsequently, in the plate unit 300, a plurality of jewel-shaped light guide portions 318a in the upper plate upper lens 318 along the front end of the upper plate 301 so as to connect the lower ends of the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240 to the upper plate. The front decorative members 316 are arranged in a row so as to be exposed through the opening 316a. (Lower side) is designed to be decorated. Below the upper plate upper lens 318, an upper plate upper inner lens 319 having a protrusion corresponding to each light guide portion 318a is arranged. The upper plate upper lens 318 of the plate unit 300 is formed of a bluish transparent member, and the upper plate upper inner lens 319 is formed of a transparent member.

The upper plate upper inner lens 319 of the plate unit 300 has a plurality of fine prisms formed on the surface (upper surface) corresponding to the light guide portion 318a of the upper plate upper lens 318 to diffusely reflect or refract light. As with the central lens 282 of the upper decoration unit 280, the light guide portion 318a of the upper plate upper lens 318 is given a deep taste and a glittering shine to guide the light. The light part 318a looks like a jewel. Further, the upper plate upper inner lens 319 prevents the upper plate right decorative substrate 320 and the upper plate left decorative substrate 322 arranged on the lower side from being seen through the light guide portion 318a from the player side.

On the upper surfaces of the upper plate right decorative substrate 320 and the upper plate left decorative substrate 322 in the plate unit 300, a plurality of (six in this example) are provided so as to correspond to the light guide portion 318a of the upper plate upper lens 318. LEDs 320a and 322a are provided. In this example, the LEDs 320a and 322a of the upper plate right decorative substrate 320 and the upper plate left decorative substrate 322 are full-color LEDs. Further, the surfaces (upper surface) of the upper plate right decorative substrate 320 and the upper plate left decorative substrate 322 are also white, so that the same effects as described above can be obtained.

Next, the operation unit 400 attached to the dish unit 300 has a translucent annular dial operation unit 401 and a translucent columnar pressing operation unit arranged inside the dial operation unit 401. A dial decorative board 430 and a button decorative board 432 are respectively arranged under the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405. The dial decorative substrate 430 is provided with LEDs 430b arranged in a plurality (four in this example) in the circumferential direction so as to correspond to the dial operation unit 401. Further, the button decorative substrate 432 is provided with one LED 432d so as to correspond to the pressing operation unit 405. In this example, the LED 430b of the dial decorative substrate 430 is a high-brightness white LED, and the LED 432d of the button decorative substrate 432 is a full-color LED. Further, the surfaces (upper surface) of the dial decorative substrate 430 and the button decorative substrate 432 are also white, so that the same effects as described above can be obtained.

By the way, the door frame 5 of this example corresponds to the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a of the side lenses 210 and 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 that cover the outer periphery above the lower side of the game window 101. LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a are arranged outside the first annular group 102 (within the hatch in FIGS. 59 and 60) near the game window 101 and the second annular group 103 outside the first annular group 102. It is divided into (within the range of the crosshatch in FIGS. 59 and 60), and by appropriately emitting the LEDs of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103, the game window 101 is substantially concentric so as to surround the game window 101. It is possible to make multiple (two in this example) light emitting decorations. That is, when all the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the first annular group 102 are made to emit light, the range of the hatch near the game window 101 is illuminated and decorated in an annular manner, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the second annular group 103 are emitted. When all the light is emitted, the range of the cross hatch away from the game window 101 is illuminated and decorated in a ring shape.

Further, in the door frame 5, the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the radiation lens portions 210b, 250b of the side lenses 210, 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 are the first annular group 102 and the first ring group 102. A radial group 104 (within the shaded area in FIGS. 59 and 60) extending radially around the lower center in the left-right direction of the game window 101 (game area 1100) so as to divide the bicyclic group 103 in the circumferential direction. ing. By appropriately emitting light of the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b of the radial group 104, the outside of the game window 101 can be radiated and decorated, and the ring-shaped by the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103. The luminescent decoration can be luminescent so as to be divided in the circumferential direction. Further, the LED 214c corresponding to the side sub-lens 228 on the upper right surface of the right side decoration unit 200 is designated as the upper right side group 105, and by appropriately emitting light from the LED 214c, one of the upper right surfaces of the door frame 5 is formed. The part (side sub-lens 228) can be decorated with light emission.

Further, in the door frame 5, the LED 286a corresponding to the central lens 282 in the upper decoration unit 280 that decorates the upper center of the game window 101 emits light and decorates the upper center of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103. It is group 106. By appropriately emitting light from the LED 286a of the upper center group 106, the upper center of the game window 101 can be light-emitting and decorated, and also as a reference point for the ring-shaped light emitting decoration by the first ring group 102 and the second ring group 103. It is possible to make a luminescent decoration like this. Further, the LED 286b corresponding to the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289 in the upper decoration unit 280 is an upper center side group 107 that illuminates both the left and right sides of the upper center group 106. By appropriately emitting light of the LED 286b of the upper center side group 107, the boundary between the first ring group 102 and the second ring group 103 and the upper center group 106 can be light-emitting and decorated, or the upper side (including the upper part) of the game window 101 is emitted. It is possible to make a V-shaped luminescent decoration.

Further, in the door frame 5, the LED 320a corresponding to the light guide portion 318a of the upper plate upper lens 318 fitted into the plurality of openings 316a of the upper plate front decorative member 316 in the plate unit 300 that decorates the lower side of the game window 101. , 322a are lower groups 108 that illuminate and decorate the outer periphery of the lower side of the game window 101 so as to connect the left and right lower ends of the first ring group 102 and the second ring group 103. By appropriately emitting light of the LEDs 320a and 322a of the lower group 108, the lower side of the game window 101 and the front edge of the upper plate 301 can be light-emittingly decorated, and the LEDs 214a of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 can be illuminated. By interlocking with, 216a, 254a, and 256a, the entire outer periphery of the game window 101 can be luminescently decorated in a ring shape.

Further, in the door frame 5, the LEDs 430b and 432d corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 arranged in the upper center of the plate unit 300 at the lower center of the game window 101 press the operation unit 400. It is said to be an operation group 109 for luminescent decoration. By appropriately emitting light of the LEDs 430b and 432d of the operation group 109, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be light-emitting and decorated, and the operation timing and operation direction of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be played. It is possible to inform people.

More specifically, the light emitting decoration in the door frame 5 in the present embodiment will be described in more detail. In this example, the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 286a provided in the door frame 5 286b, 320a, 322a, 430b, 432d are further subdivided according to the control system within the groups 102, 103, 104, 106, 107, 108, 109 to which each belongs. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 60, the 20 LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a belonging to the first annular group 102 are 102a to 102j for each of the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250. The 26 LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a belonging to the second annular group 103 are divided into 10 systems, and each of the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a of the side lenses 210 and 250 is divided into 10 systems of 103a to 103j. Has been done.

Further, the 20 LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b belonging to the radial group 104 are divided into eight systems of 104a to 104h for each of the radial lens portions 210b, 250b of the side lenses 210, 250. Further, the two LEDs 214c belonging to the upper right side group 105 are divided into two systems, an upper 105a and a lower 105b. Further, the six LEDs 286a belonging to the upper center group 106 are divided into three systems of a lower part 106a, an upper right part 106b, and an upper left part 106c. Further, the six LEDs 286b belonging to the upper center side group 107 are divided into two systems, a right side 107a and a left side 107b.

Further, the 12 LEDs 320a and 322a belonging to the lower group 108 are divided into four systems 108a to 108d in groups of three from the right side in the front view. Further, in the five LEDs 430b and 432d belonging to the operation group 109, the four LEDs 430b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 are arranged diagonally with the pressing operation unit 405 in between, and the left and right 109a and the front and rear 109b are arranged as a set. The two systems, one LED 432c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405, is divided into three systems. As described above, in the door frame 5 of this example, each LED 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 286a, 286b, 320a, 322a, 430b, 432d is divided into 42 systems. ing.

By the way, in the door frame 5, as described above, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 286a, 320a, 322a, 432d are full-color LEDs, and these LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 286a, 320a, 322a, The 28 systems 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 106a to 106c, 108a to 108d, and 109c to which the 432d belongs are further provided with three independent systems of RGB in order to emit light in full color. It is doubled to 84 systems. Further, the LEDs 286b and 430b are white LEDs with high brightness, and the four systems 107a, 107b, 109a and 109b to which the LEDs 286b and 430b belong require a large amount of current to emit light with high brightness. Two systems are connected to each, and the actual light emission control is doubled to eight systems.

The LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b are white LEDs having normal brightness, and belong to eight systems 104a to 108h. Further, the LED 214c is a red LED and belongs to two systems 105a and 105b. Since the 10 systems 104a to 108h, 105a, 105b by these LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b, and 214c can be sufficiently controlled by each system, the same number of 10 systems is obtained even in the actual light emission control.

Therefore, the actual number of systems for light emission control in the door frame 5 is 102, and each LED 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 286a, 286b, 320a, 322a, For each system to which 430b and 432d belong, lighting, blinking, etc. are controlled by dynamic lighting, and gradation (color and brightness) is controlled by PWM control (pulse width modulation control). .. This makes it possible to produce an expressive light emission.

As the light emitting effect in the door frame 5, for example, by sequentially emitting light from the first annular group 102 to the second annular group 103 (sequential emission of the same color or a similar color), the light emission effect spreads outward around the game window 101. A light emitting effect, or conversely, a light emitting effect that converges from the outside toward the game window 101 by sequentially emitting light from the second ring group 103 to the first ring group 102 (sequentially emitting light in the same color or a similar color). Alternatively, by simultaneously emitting light from the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103, it is possible to produce a light emitting effect that causes the entire outer periphery of the game window 101 to emit light widely.

Further, by cooperating with the LEDs provided on the front surface of the game board 4 and the front unit 2000 (detailed illustration is omitted), the LEDs of the game board 4 and the LEDs of the first annular group 102 close to the game window 101 are used. And, the LED of the second ring group 103 arranged outside the first ring group 102 makes it possible to perform a more expressive light emitting effect, and it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, in the first ring group 102, the second ring group 103, and the lower group 108, the light circulates around the outer periphery of the game window 101 by appropriately causing the systems 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 108a to 108d to emit light. Such as light emission effect, light moves toward the central lens 282 of the upper decoration unit 280 along the outer periphery of the game window 101, or light from the central lens 282 is along the outer periphery of the game window 101. It is possible to create a light emitting effect that makes it move. In this example, the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are divided (divided into 10) into 10 systems 102a to 102j and 103a to 103j in the circumferential direction, but the present invention is not limited to this. If it is divided into about 8 systems (about 8 divisions), it is possible to satisfactorily perform a light emitting effect such that light circulates around the outer periphery of the game window 101.

Further, by emitting light only in the radial group 104, a light emitting effect of emitting light radially around the game window 101 is produced, or the first ring group 102, the second ring group 103, and the lower group 108 are emitted at the same time as the radial group 104. By making the game window 101 emit light substantially uniformly, the radial group 104 emits light (lights / blinks) during the light emission of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103. It is possible to create a light emitting effect that gives an accent to the light emitting decoration of. Further, by causing each system 104a to 104h of the radial group 104 to emit light individually, it is possible to produce a light emitting effect such that the radial lens portions 210b and 250b circulate.

Further, the light emission effect that the entire central lens 282 emits light by simultaneously emitting light from each system 106a to 106c of the upper center group 106, and the light rotates in the central lens 282 by sequentially emitting light from each system 106a to 106c. It is possible to perform various light emission effects. In addition, by emitting light from the upper center side group 107, the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289 are light-emitting and decorated with high brightness to give the player a chance or a specific gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state, a probabilistic gaming state). It is possible to perform a light emitting effect that suggests a state, a time-saving game state, a probability variation time-saving game state, etc.). The lower lens 289 is arranged so as to irradiate light from above the player toward the player, so that the light emission of the high-brightness LED 286b can be easily noticed by the player. ..

Further, by appropriately emitting light from each system 108a to 108d of the lower group 108, a light emitting effect for illuminating and decorating the front edge of the upper plate 301 can be produced, or by emitting light in association with the operation group 109, the dial operation unit 401 can be emitted. Or a light emitting effect that encourages the operation of the pressing operation unit 405. Further, by appropriately emitting light of the systems 109a and 109b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 in the operation group 109, it is possible to promote the operation of the dial operation unit 401 and to guide the rotation operation direction of the dial operation unit 401. can do. Further, by causing the system 109c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation group 109 to emit light, it is possible to produce a light emitting effect that encourages the operation of the pressing operation unit 405.

Since the systems 109c of the first ring group 102, the second ring group 103, the upper center group 106, the lower group 108, and the operation group 109 are full-color LEDs, each group 102, 103, 106, 108, It is possible to perform light emission effects with different gradations such as emission color and brightness for each 109 and each system 102a-102j, 103a-103j, 106a-106c, 108a-108d, 109c, and it has a variety of expressions. It is possible to produce a rich light emission.

As described above, in the door frame 5 of this example, in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a corresponding to the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a are the first close to the game window 101. Since the annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 far from the game window 101 on the outside of the first annular group 102 can be divided into light emitting light, a plurality of outsides of the game window 101 (game area 1100) can be emitted. It is possible to decorate the pachinko machine with light emission in a substantially concentric circle, and by surrounding the outer circumference of the game window 101 with light, it is possible to perform a light emission effect that has not been seen in conventional pachinko machines, and the pachinko machine that strongly attracts the interest of players. It can be set to 1.

Further, one peripheral lens unit 210a and 250a is provided with two systems of LEDs arranged substantially concentrically, and even if the appearance looks like one, each of the two systems of LEDs emits light. Since the light emitting decoration can be made substantially concentrically, it is possible to make it difficult to imagine the mode of the light emitting decoration from the appearance, and the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a (right side decoration unit 200 and left side decoration unit 200) by the light emitting decoration. The change in 240) can be made large, and the impact of the light emitting decoration can be increased to make the pachinko machine 1 that strongly attracts the attention of the player.

[1-3. Overall configuration of the main body frame]
Next, the main body frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 67. FIG. 61 is a front view of the main body frame, and FIG. 62 is a rear view of the main body frame. Further, FIG. 63 is a front perspective view of the main body frame, and FIG. 64 is a rear perspective view of the main body frame. Further, FIG. 66 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled and viewed from the front, FIG. 65 is a left side view of the main body frame, and FIG. 67 is a perspective view of the main body frame disassembled and viewed from the rear. It is a figure. The main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is pivotally supported on the left side of the front view with respect to the outer frame 2, and is supported in a door shape so as to open and close the front surface of the outer frame 2 on the rear side of the door frame 5. , The front side can be opened and closed by the door frame 5. Further, the main body frame 3 can detachably hold the game board 4 from the front side at a position corresponding to the game window 101 of the door frame 5.

The main body frame 3 of this example has a main body frame base 600 having a rectangular game board holding port 601 for forming a skeleton of the main body frame 3 and penetrating in the front-rear direction to hold the game board 4, and a main body frame base. The upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 for axially supporting the door frame 5 as well as being attached to the upper end and the lower end of the left end of the front view of 600, respectively, and the main body frame base 600. The ball launching device 650, which is attached to the lower front surface of the game board 4 to drive the game ball into the game area 1100 of the game board 4, and the game ball is paid out to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600. When the prize ball unit 700 for the purpose and the door frame 5 attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600 are opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the flow of the game ball from the prize ball unit 700 to the plate unit 300 of the door frame 5 is blocked. It is provided with a ball outlet opening / closing unit 790.

Further, the main body frame 3 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and various control boards, power supply boards 851, etc. for controlling the door frame 5 excluding the game board 4 and the electrical parts provided in the main body frame 3 and the like. The board unit 800 that is unitized as a unit, the back cover 900 that covers the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame base 600, and the side security plate 950 that covers the left end of the main body frame base 600 in front view. A locking device 1000 attached to the right end of the main body frame base in front view to open / close the main body frame 3 to the outer frame 2 and to open / close the door frame 5 to the main body frame 3 is mainly provided.

[1-3A. Body frame base]
Next, the main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 68 and 69. FIG. 68 is a front perspective view of the main body frame base in the main body frame. Further, FIG. 69 is a rear perspective view of the main body frame base in the main body frame. The main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is integrally molded with synthetic resin, and the outer shape in the front view is a vertically long rectangular shape along the outer shape of the door frame 5, and is substantially in the front-rear direction. It is formed to have a constant depth D (see FIG. 65). As a result, when the prize ball unit 700, the board unit 800, the back cover 900, the lock device 1000, etc. are attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, the main body frame base 600 is turned down. In addition, the rear surface of the main body frame base 600 is in a substantially flat state at the height of the depth D of the main body frame base 600, the prize ball unit 700 and the like can be easily placed, and the workability related to the assembly of the main body frame 3 Can be improved.

As shown in the figure, the main body frame base 600 has a game board holding port that can fit and hold the outer periphery of the game board 4 by penetrating in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction within a range of about 3/4 of the whole from the upper part to the lower part. 601 and the U-shaped front end frame portion 602 forming the outer periphery of the front end excluding the left side of the main body frame base 600 in front view, and the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame 5 which is recessed from the front to the rear of the front end frame portion 602. The door frame projecting piece 110c projecting rearward from the lower end of the door frame, the upper bent projecting piece 167 projecting rearward of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5, and the open side outside projecting rearward of the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153. It includes an engaging groove 603 into which the bent projectile 163 is inserted and engaged.

Further, the main body frame base 600 extends from the lower side of the game board holding port 601 to the lower end of the main body frame base 600, and is recessed from the front end of the front end frame portion 602 to the rear side by a predetermined amount and spreads in a plate shape in the left-right direction. 604 and a peripheral wall portion 605 that protrudes rearward from the front end frame portion 602 and forms an inner peripheral wall of the game board holding port 601 are provided. The peripheral wall portion 605 connects the free ends (upper and lower left ends of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602) to each other, and the outer shape of the main body frame base 600 becomes a frame shape. It has become like.

Further, the main body frame base 600 is formed by forming the lower side of the game board holding port 601 at the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604 and mounting the game board 4 on the game board mounting portion 606 and the game board mounting portion 606. A positioning protrusion 607 that protrudes upward from approximately the center in the left-right direction and engages with the out ball discharge groove 1156 of the game panel 1150 in the game board 4, and a game board of the game board 4 that is formed at a predetermined position on the inner wall on the right side of the front view of the peripheral wall portion 605. The game board locking portion 608 (see FIG. 61) to which the stopper 1120 is fastened, and the lower end of the peripheral wall portion 605 that hangs downward from the upper inner wall and has a plate shape that can contact the upper end of the game board 4 in the left-right direction. It is provided with a plurality of arranged upper end regulation ribs 609. By fitting the positioning protrusion 607 of the main body frame base 600 with the out ball discharge groove 1156 of the game board 4, it is possible to regulate the lower end of the game board 4 from moving in the left-right direction and the rear direction. ing. Further, the game board locking portion 608 can regulate the movement of the right side of the game board 4 in the front-rear direction by locking the game board stopper 1120 of the game board 4. There is. Although the details of the left side of the game board 4 in the front view will be described later, the movement in the front-rear direction is restricted by the positioning member 956 of the side security plate 950.

Further, the main body frame base 600 is attached with metal fittings for attaching the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 to the rear surface of the free end portion (upper and lower left end portions) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602. It includes a section 610 (see FIG. 69). As shown in FIG. 68 and the like, the metal fitting mounting portion 610 is reinforced by a plurality of ribs whose front side extends vertically and horizontally, and the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 are attached with sufficient strength. Can be done. Further, the main body frame base 600 is formed with a substantially circular cylinder lock through hole 611 penetrating in the front-rear direction in the upper right end of the lower rear wall portion 604 in the front view and a door frame 5 formed in the lower left of the front view of the cylinder lock through hole 611. A U-shaped fitting groove 612 that fits with a positioning protrusion 110d projecting rearward from the door frame base main body 110 and a launch solenoid 654 of the ball launching device 650 formed in the lower left of the fitting groove 612 in the front view are accommodated. It is provided with a solenoid accommodating recess 613.

As described above, the main body frame base 600 of this example is formed at a position where the lower rear wall portion 604 is recessed one step rearward from the front surface of the front end frame portion 602, and is formed on the right side of the lower rear wall portion 604 when viewed from the front. The ball launching device 650 is attached to the front surface so that the launching solenoid 654 of the ball launching device 650 is housed in the solenoid accommodating recess 613. When the ball launching device 650 is attached to the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, as shown in FIGS. 63 and 98, the ball launching device 650 is on the left side in the front view from the upper end of the launch rail 660, in the left direction and A foul space 626 that extends downward is formed. In this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball entrance 542e in the foul cover unit 540 is located at the lower part of the foul space 626, and the foul space 626 is lowered. The game ball is received by the foul ball entrance 542e of the foul cover unit 540 and discharged to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300.

Further, the main body frame base 600 is formed in a plurality of openings 614 that penetrate in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction to the left side of the left-right center of the lower rear wall portion 604 in the front view, and on the upper side of the opening 614 and on the left and right sides in the front view. It is provided with a through hole 615 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The opening 614 of the main body frame base 600 is closed by the relay terminal plate cover 692 (see FIG. 66 and the like) from the front side, and the lower rear wall portion 604 is passed through the opening 692a of the relay terminal plate cover 692. The main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 of the board unit 800 mounted on the rear surface face the front side. Further, the plurality of through holes 615 are for transmitting the sound from the speaker box 820 of the substrate unit 800 to the front side of the main body frame base 600. The through holes 615 arranged on both the left and right sides of the opening 614 are ventilation type holes having an opposition wall on the front side.

Further, the main body frame base 600 is a fixture support portion that rotatably supports the game board fixture 690 for detachably fixing the game board 4 near the upper end of the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 on the upper side of the opening 614. It is provided with 616 and a stopper 617 that projects forward from the lower right of the front view of the fixture support portion 616 and regulates the rotation position of the game board fixture 690.

Here, as shown in FIG. 61 and the like, the game board fixture 690 includes a fixing piece 690a and a fixing piece 690a that spread in a fan shape around an axial center pivotally supported by the fixture support portion 616 of the main body frame base 600. It includes an operation piece 690b that extends outward from one end side in the circumferential direction (the side that becomes the rear end when rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view). The game board fixture 690 is axially supported by the fixture support portion 616 of the main body frame base 600, and then the operation piece 690b is operated to rotate the game board fixture 690 in the clockwise direction in the front view. The fixed piece 690a protrudes upward from the game board mounting portion 606 and is inserted into the fixed recess 1121 of the game board 4 mounted on the game board mounting portion 606. Can be prevented from moving forward. Further, in the game board fixture 690, the operation piece 690b comes into contact with the stopper 617, and by contacting the stopper 617, the rotating end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front is restricted. It has become.

Further, the main body frame base 600 is provided with a door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 on the lower front surface of the cylinder lock through hole 611, with respect to the main body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is opened (opened), the pressure is released so that the opening of the door frame 5 can be detected. Further, in the main body frame base 600, a main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 is attached to the rear surface below the position where the door frame opening switch 618 is attached ( (See FIG. 69), when the main body frame 3 is opened (opened) with respect to the outer frame 2, the pressing is released so that the opening of the main body frame 3 can be detected.

Further, the main body frame base 600 has three vertically elongated penetrations in the front-rear direction on the inside (shaft support side) of the engagement groove 603 on the right side (open side) side in the front view of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602. It is provided with a door hook hole 620 and two lock locking holes 621 that penetrate in the front-rear direction and are lined up in the left-right direction under the door hook hole 620 at the lower end. These three door hook holes 620 are formed in the vicinity of both upper and lower ends in the vertical direction and substantially in the center in the vertical direction, respectively. Locking protrusions 1004 provided on both upper and lower ends of the locking device 1000 are engaged and locked in the upper and central door hook holes 620 and the lock locking hole 621, and the front end frame portion 602 The lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600 along the outer wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 on the rear side of the right side of the front view. When the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600, the three door frame hook portions 1041 of the lock device 1000 project forward from the three door hook holes 620 and the cylinder lock of the lock device 1000. The 1010 is in a state of protruding forward from the cylinder lock through hole 611 (see FIG. 63).

Further, the main body frame base 600 gently and diagonally descends from the upper right end toward the substantially center in the left-right direction on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, and then the lower rear wall portion 604 at the substantially center in the left-right direction. It is provided with a main body frame base ball pulling passage 622 that hangs down from the middle in the vertical direction to a position slightly upward in the above direction and allows game balls to be distributed. The rear side of the main body frame base ball pulling passage 622 is closed by the board unit base 810 in the board unit 800, and the details will be described later. It is now in circulation.

Further, a plurality of main body frame bases 600 are arranged at the rear end of the left side of the peripheral wall portion 605 in the vertical direction at predetermined intervals, and the shaft support pins 906 of the back cover 900 are rotatably supported by the back cover shaft support portion 623. A mounting portion 624 for mounting the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 on the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 and diagonally upper left in the front view of the opening 614, and a locking device 1000 on the right side (open side) side surface of the peripheral wall portion 605 in the front view. It is provided with a lock mounting portion 625 for mounting and fixing.

Although detailed description will be omitted, in addition to the above, mounting bosses, mounting holes, etc. for mounting the ball launching device 650, the prize ball unit 700, the board unit 800, etc. are appropriately positioned on the main body frame base 600. Is formed in.

[1-3B. Upper shaft support and lower shaft support]
Next, the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67. The upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 in the main body frame 3 are attached to the metal fitting mounting portions 610 on the upper and lower rear surfaces of the left end of the main body frame base 600 by using predetermined screws, respectively, to the main body frame 3. The door frame 5 can be pivotally supported so that the door frame 5 can be opened and closed, and the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported with respect to the outer frame 2.

First, the upper shaft support bracket 630 has a plate-shaped mounting portion 631 that is attached to the upper bracket mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 and extends in the vertical and horizontal directions, and a plate-shaped mounting portion 631 that extends forward from the upper end of the mounting portion 631. The front extension portion 632, the shaft support pin 633 projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the front extension portion 632, and the shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 arranged on the left side of the front view of the shaft support pin 633. The door frame shaft support hole 634 (see FIG. 63, etc.) through which the door frame is inserted and the door frame shaft support hole 634 (see FIG. It includes a stopper 635 (see FIGS. 65 and 107) that regulates the ends. The upper shaft support metal fitting 630 is integrally formed by bending and molding a single metal plate with a mounting portion 631, a forward extending portion 632, and a stopper 635.

On the other hand, the lower shaft support bracket 640 is arranged below the door frame shaft support bracket 642 for pivotally supporting the door frame 5 and the door frame shaft support bracket 642, and supports the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2. It is provided with a main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 for the purpose. The door frame shaft support bracket 642 in the lower shaft support bracket 640 is attached to the lower bracket mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 and has a plate-shaped mounting portion 642a that extends in the vertical and horizontal directions, and the mounting portion 642a from the lower end to the front. A plate-shaped front extension portion 642b that extends, a door frame shaft support hole 642c that penetrates vertically near the front end of the front extension portion 642b and into which the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted, and a front extension portion. It is provided with a stopper 642d which is erected upward from the left end portion of the front view of the 642b and regulates the rotating end of the door frame 5 toward the open side. The door frame shaft support bracket 642 has a mounting portion 642a, a front extending portion 642b, and a stopper 642d integrally formed by bending and molding a single metal plate.

Further, the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 in the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 is attached to the metal fitting mounting portion 610 on the lower side of the main body frame base 600 and extends in the vertical and horizontal directions from the plate-shaped mounting portion 644a and the lower end of the mounting portion 644a. It is provided with a front extending portion 644b extending forward and a main body frame shaft support hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction near the front end of the front extending portion 644b. The main body frame shaft support bracket 644 also has a mounting portion 644a and a front extending portion 644b integrally formed by bending and molding a single metal plate.

In the lower shaft support bracket 640 of this example, the mounting portion 642a of the door frame shaft support bracket 642 and the mounting portion 644a of the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 are overlapped (contacted) in the front-rear direction, and the door frame is in contact with each other. The front extension portion 642b of the shaft support bracket 642 and the front extension portion 644b of the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 are attached to the lower metal fitting mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 in a state of being separated from each other by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction. It has become like.

The upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600, and the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the main body frame shaft support hole (not shown) of the lower shaft support metal fitting 640. Is positioned coaxially, and the main body frame shaft support hole of the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 in the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 is fitted and inserted into the support protrusion 21d of the lower support metal fitting 21 in the outer frame 2. As described above, the front extension portion 644b of the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 is placed on the support protrusion 21c of the lower support bracket 21, and then the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 is attached to the outer frame 2. By inserting the upper support metal fitting 20 into the support hook hole 20c, the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported with respect to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable.

Further, the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600, and the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the door frame shaft support of the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 are attached. The door is positioned coaxially with the metal fitting 642, and the door is inserted so that the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 642c of the door frame shaft support metal fitting 642 in the lower shaft support metal fitting 640. After placing the lower shaft support portion 158 of the frame 5 on the front extension portion 642b of the door frame shaft support bracket 642, the shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 is placed in the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630. By inserting the door frame 5, the door frame 5 can be pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 3. In this example, the shaft pin 155 on the upper side of the door frame 5 is slidable in the vertical direction, and when the shaft pin 155 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630, the shaft pin 155 is inserted. Slide the door frame downward once so that the upper shaft support portion 156 of the door frame 5 and the front extension portion 632 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 overlap each other, and then slide the shaft pin 155 upward to open the door. It can be inserted into the frame shaft support hole 634.

[1-3 C. Hit ball launcher]
Next, the hitting ball launching device 650 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. FIG. 70 is a front perspective view of the hitting ball launching device in the main body frame. Further, FIG. 71 is a rear perspective view of the hitting ball launching device in the main body frame. The hitting ball launching device 650 can hit the game ball supplied from the ball feeding unit 580 of the door frame 5 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with a strength corresponding to the rotation operation of the handle device 500. is there.

In the ball launching device 650 of the present embodiment, the launch base 652 of a metal plate attached to the front predetermined position of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, and the rotation drive shaft 654a projecting forward on the lower rear surface of the launch base 652. The launching solenoid 654 attached so as to be mounted, the hammer 656 fixed integrally to the drive shaft 654a of the launching solenoid 654, the mallet 658 fixed to the tip of the hammer 656, and the movement trajectory of the mallet 658. Hammer tip of ball hammer 656 between the launch rail 660 attached to the front of the launch base 652 and the launch rail 660 above the base end of the launch rail 660, extending diagonally to the upper left of the front view with the predetermined position above as the base end. At the same time that 658 is made passable, a ball stop piece 662 that forms a gap through which the game ball cannot pass and holds the game ball at the base end of the launch rail 660, and a ball stop piece 662 holds the game ball at the base end of the launch rail 660. It is provided with a stopper 664 that restricts the hammer 656 (hammer tip 658) from rotating toward the launch rail 660 side from the hitting position where the game ball can be hit.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the firing solenoid 654 in the hitting ball launching device 650 is configured such that the drive shaft 654a reciprocates with a strength (speed) corresponding to the rotation operation angle of the handle device 500. Further, the ball striking mallet 656 of the ball striking device 650 has a fixed portion 656a fixed to the drive shaft 654a of the launch solenoid 654 and a tip extending from the fixed portion 656a in a gentle arc shape with respect to the axis of the drive shaft 654a. It is provided with a paddle portion 656b in which the mallet tip 658 is fixed to the tip facing the normal direction, and a stopper portion 656c that can come into contact with the stopper 664 extending to the opposite side of the paddle portion 656b with the fixing portion 656a in between. ing. When the stopper portion 656c of the hitting mallet 656 comes into contact with the stopper 664, the mallet tip 658 at the tip rotates toward the launch rail 660 from the hitting position (rotating end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). It is becoming regulated.

Further, the launch rail 660 of the ball striking device 650 has a loose arc shape with a lower portion recessed substantially along the lower end extension line of the outer rail 1111 of the game board 4 (see FIG. 98), and in the front-rear direction. On the other hand, the center has a V-shaped depression, and the game ball hit by the hitting mallet 656 can be smoothly guided to the game board 4 side along the launch rail 660. The launch rail 660 is formed by bending a metal plate.

Further, the hitting ball launching device 650 has a stopper cover 666 covering the front surface of the stopper 664 that can regulate the rotation end of the hitting mallet 656 toward the hitting position side, and rotation at a position away from the hitting position of the hitting mallet 656. It is provided with a stopper 668 that regulates an end (a rotating end in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front). In the hitting ball launching device 650 of this example, the surfaces of the stoppers 664 and 668 are covered with rubber, so that the impact when the hitting mallet 656 comes into contact can be absorbed and the generation of noise due to the contact is suppressed. You can do it.

As shown in FIGS. 63 and 98, when the ball launching device 650 of this example is attached to the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, the upper end of the launch rail 660 is substantially in the center in the left-right direction and is lower. It is located below the upper end of the rear wall portion 604, that is, below the game board mounting portion 606 (lower side of the game board holding port 601), and is outside the game board 4 held by the game board holding port 601. A foul space 626 that extends downward with a predetermined width in the left-right direction is formed between the rail 1111 and the lower end. Then, the hit ball launching device 650 of this example launches the game ball so as to jump over the foul space 626 on the left side of the launch rail 660, thereby hitting the game ball into the game area 1100 of the game board 4. Can be done. As described above, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball entrance 542e of the foul cover unit 540 is located at the lower part of the foul space 626, and the game area 1100 The game ball, which has become a foul ball without being driven in, falls in the foul space 626, is received at the foul ball entrance 542e, and is discharged to the lower plate 302.

Further, in the ball striking device 650, the launch solenoid 654 is driven by the launch control unit 4120 with a drive strength corresponding to the rotation operation of the handle device 500, and the ball feed solenoid 585 of the ball feed unit 580. It is designed to be driven in synchronization with the drive of. Specifically, in the ball feeding unit 580 that supplies the game ball to the hitting ball launching device 650, when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven (ON), the ball feeding member 584 receives the game ball, and the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven from that state. When the ball feed member 584 is released (OFF), the game ball received by the ball feed member 584 is sent to the ball feed launcher 650 side, so that the launch solenoid 654 is driven substantially at the same time as the ball feed solenoid 585 of the ball feed unit 580. By turning (ON), the game ball can be smoothly supplied from the ball feed unit 580 to the rear end of the launch rail 660, and the game ball can be reliably launched by the rotation of the ball hammer 656. ing.

[1-3D. Prize ball unit]
Next, the prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 to 79. FIG. 72 is a front perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main body frame, and FIG. 73 is a rear perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main body frame. Further, FIG. 74 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 75 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 76 is an exploded perspective view showing the relationship between the prize ball tank and the tank rail unit in the prize ball unit from the rear. FIG. 77 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball device in the prize ball unit as viewed after being disassembled. FIG. 78 is a rear view showing the relationship between the payout passage, the payout motor, and the payout rotating body in the prize ball device. Further, FIG. 79 is a cross-sectional view showing a ball circulation passage in the prize ball unit.

The prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment stores the game balls supplied from the island equipment side to the pachinko machine 1 in the island equipment in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and then gives a predetermined payout instruction. It is to be paid out to the upper plate 301 of the pachinko machine 1 based on the above. The prize ball unit 700 has a prize ball base 710 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600 and a prize ball tank 720 attached to the upper part of the rear surface of the prize ball base 710 to receive and store game balls supplied from the island equipment side. The tank rail unit 730, which is arranged under the prize ball tank 720 and stores the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720, is aligned and sent to the downstream side, and the game balls arranged by the tank rail unit 730 are paid out. The payout device 740 to be paid out based on the instruction and the game ball paid out by the payout device 740 can be guided to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit, and the game ball paid out when the upper plate 301 is full with the game ball. Is mainly provided with a full tank branching unit 770 capable of branching and guiding the lower plate 302 side.

Further, the prize ball unit 700 includes a prize ball passage lid 780 that closes the rear opening of the prize ball passage 715 formed in the prize ball base 710, and an earth fitting for grounding the tank rail unit 730 and the prize ball device 740. 782, an external terminal plate 784 attached to the rear surface of the prize ball base 710, and an external terminal plate cover 786 that covers the rear side of the external terminal plate 784 are provided. The prize ball passage lid 780 in the prize ball unit 700 is for fastening and fixing the back cover engaging groove 780a for fixing the back cover 900 to the rear surface and the back cover 900 on the left side of the back cover engaging groove 780a when viewed from the rear. The back cover fastening hole 780b is formed (see FIGS. 73 and 75, etc.).

In this prize ball unit 700, the prize ball base 710 is formed in an inverted L shape along the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front, and the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail unit 730 are formed on the upper side. In addition to being arranged, a vertically long prize ball device 740 is arranged on the left side, and a full tank branch unit 770 is arranged below the prize ball device 740. Further, an external terminal plate 784 and an external terminal plate cover 786 are arranged directly above the prize ball device 740 and above the tank rail unit 730 so as to be adjacent to the prize ball tank 720.

Next, as shown in the figure, the prize ball base 710 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in an inverted L shape in front view so as to substantially correspond to the left side of the game board holding port 601 in front view with the upper side of the main body frame base 600. And is integrally molded with a transparent synthetic resin. The prize ball base 710 is arranged so that the peripheral wall portion 710a extending rearward along the outer outer circumference of the inverted L shape and the peripheral wall portion 710a extend inward from the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 710a with a predetermined width and substantially on the same plane. It is provided with a rear wall portion 710b. In this example, as shown in FIG. 75, the upper side of the peripheral wall portion 710a is formed so as to extend rearward from a position one step lower than the upper end of the prize ball base 710. The prize ball base 710 has a rear wall portion 710b located at a position deeper than the front end, and when attached to the main body frame base 600, a space capable of accommodating the game board 4 can be formed. ing.

Further, the prize ball base 710 is arranged next to the tank mounting portion 711 for mounting the prize ball tank 720 on the upper side of the peripheral wall portion 710a and the tank mounting portion 711 (on the right side when viewed from the rear), and the external terminal plate 784 and the external terminal plate. An external terminal plate mounting portion 712 for mounting the cover 786, a plurality of mounting locking portions 713 for mounting the tank rail unit 730 on the rear side of the lower end of the upper side of the rear wall portion 710b, and the rear side of the vertical side of the rear wall portion 710b. The prize ball device mounting portion 714 for mounting the prize ball device 740, the prize ball passage 715 that guides the game ball paid out from the prize ball device 740 adjacent to the prize ball device mounting portion 714, and the rear wall. A mounting locking portion 716 for mounting the full tank branch unit 770 is provided at the lower end of the portion 710b.

Further, the prize ball base 710 has a relief hole 717 for allowing the payout motor 744 and the like protruding forward from the prize ball device 740 to pass through the position of the prize ball device mounting portion 714 of the rear wall portion 710b in the front-rear direction, and the back surface. It is provided with a back cover engaging groove 718 for fixing the cover 900. Further, although detailed description is omitted on the prize ball base 710, mounting holes, mounting bosses, etc. for mounting the prize ball tank 720, the prize ball device 740, etc., or mounting on the main body frame base 600 are appropriately positioned. Is formed in.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 76, the prize ball tank 720 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with an open upper part, and a bottom wall portion having a horizontally long substantially rectangular shape in a plan view. 721 and the outer peripheral wall portion 722 rising upward from the outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721 and projecting rearward from the bottom wall portion 721 in a rectangular shape only on the right rear portion (rear portion on the open side) in a plan view, and the outer peripheral wall portion. A plate-shaped discharge port 723 formed by a portion of the 722 that protrudes rearward from the bottom wall portion 721 at the rear right side and opens downward from the left side (shaft support side) of the discharge port 723 in a plan view to the left end of the prize ball tank 720. A prize ball formed in the vicinity of the base end of the shaft portion 725 and the front end of the outer peripheral wall portion 722, the eaves portion 724 extending to the eaves portion 724, the rod-shaped shaft portion 725 extending rearward from the lower left end of the eaves portion 724 in a plan view, and the outer peripheral wall portion 722. A mounting portion 726 for mounting the tank 720 to the prize ball tank mounting portion 711 of the prize ball base 710 is provided.

In the prize ball tank 720, the outer circumference of the bottom wall portion 721 is surrounded by the outer peripheral wall portion 722, and a predetermined amount of game balls can be stored on the bottom wall portion 721. Further, the prize ball tank 720 is inclined so that the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 is lowered toward the discharge port 723, so that the game ball on the bottom wall portion 721 rolls toward the discharge port 723. It has become.

Further, the prize ball tank 720 includes two ball leveling members 727 that are rotatably supported by the shaft portion 725. As shown in the figure, the ball leveling member 727 has one end side pivotally supported by the shaft portion 725 and holds a weight inside, and the other end side hangs down due to its own weight. .. The ball leveling member 727 hangs down in the tank rail unit 730, which will be described later, and allows the game balls circulating in the tank rail unit 730 to be leveled and aligned. Further, the eaves 724 of the prize ball tank 720 is formed so as to cover substantially the upper half of the tank rail unit 730, so that it is possible to prevent the game ball from overflowing from the inside of the tank rail unit 730 and the tank. It is possible to prevent dust and the like from entering the rail unit 730.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 of the prize ball tank 720 is inclined so that the left side (the side far from the discharge port 723) becomes lower toward the right side in a plan view. In a plan view, the right side (the side closer to the discharge port 723) is formed so as to incline toward the rear discharge port 723. As a result, the flow of the game ball can be smoothed, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging in the prize ball tank 720, and from the discharge port 723 to the tank rail unit 730 side. The game ball can be discharged smoothly.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76, the tank rail unit 730 of the prize ball unit 700 includes a tank rail 731 that is arranged below the prize ball tank 720 and extends long in the left-right direction. The tank rail 731 has a gutter shape with an open upper part and a predetermined depth, and has a width (depth) that allows game balls to be aligned in two rows in the front-rear direction. The bottom is tilted so that The tank rail 731 includes a discharge port 731a (see FIG. 79) that opens downward to the left end (shaft support side) end, a partition wall 731b extending upward from the bottom at substantially the center in the front-rear direction, and the lower surface of the front end. A plurality of locking projecting pieces 731c (see FIG. 74), which project downward and are locked from above to the mounting locking portion 713 of the prize ball base 710, are provided.

The end of the tank rail 731 on the right side (open side) of the front view is located directly below the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720, and the game ball discharged from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720 is placed. After receiving it, it can be rolled to the left and delivered from the discharge port 731a to the prize ball device 740 side. Further, by locking the locking projection piece 731c of the tank rail 731 to the mounting locking portion 713 of the prize ball base 710, the tank rail 731, that is, the tank rail unit 730 can be mounted on the prize ball base 710. ing.

Further, the tank rail unit 730 is continuous with the alignment gear 732 rotatably supported on the upper portion of the discharge port 731a of the tank rail 731, the gear cover 733 covering the upper portion of the alignment gear 732, and the right end of the gear cover 733 in the front view. A ball holding plate 734 that closes the upper part of the tank rail 731, and a ball stop piece that is capable of advancing and retreating into the tank rail 731 and can stop the game ball in the tank rail 731 from rolling toward the discharge port 731a. It includes a 735 and a ground plate 736 that is arranged in the tank rail 731 and is in contact with the game ball in the tank rail 731. As shown in the figure, two alignment gears 732 are provided side by side in the front-rear direction so as to correspond to the two flow paths of the game balls partitioned in two rows by the partition wall 731b of the tank rail 731. Further, the ball holding plate 734 includes a mounting portion 734a to which the ball stop piece 735 is mounted on the upper portion, and two slits 734b that penetrate in the vertical direction and allow the projecting piece 735a of the ball stop piece 735 to be inserted.

In the tank rail unit 730, two ball leveling members 727 pivotally supported by the prize ball tank 720 are inserted from above on the upstream side (open side) of the ball holding plate 734. The game balls discharged from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720 into the tank rail 731 by the ball leveling member 727 can be smoothed in one step and arranged in two rows along the partition wall 731b. You can do it. Further, the ball holding plate 734 is for forcibly making the game ball which was not made one step by the ball leveling member 727 into one step, and the gap between the ball holding plate 734 and the bottom of the tank rail 731 becomes narrower toward the discharge port 731a side. It is attached to the tank rail 731 as described above.

As shown in the figure, the alignment gear 732 of the tank rail unit 730 has a plurality of teeth formed on the outer circumference, and is pivotally supported so that the pitch of the teeth in the pair of alignment gears 732 is deviated by half a pitch. As a result, when the upper part of the game ball flowing down the tank rail 731 flows down to the discharge port 731a on the downstream side while meshing with the teeth of the alignment gear 732, the game balls arranged in two rows are alternately awarded one by one. It is designed to be sent to the device 740.

The bottom of the tank rail 731 is formed with fine grooves that penetrate vertically so that foreign matter such as dust that rolls together with the game ball in the tank rail 731 falls downward from the fine grooves. It has become. Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the ground plate 736 arranged on the inner wall of the tank rail 731 is grounded to the outside via the grounding connector of the power supply board 851 via the grounding metal fitting 782. When the game ball comes into contact with the ground plate 736 in the tank rail 731, the charged static electricity can be removed.

Further, the tank rail unit 730 rotates the ball stop piece 735 rotatably attached to the mounting portion 734a of the ball holding plate 734, and passes the projecting piece 735a of the ball stop piece 735 through the slit 734b into the tank rail 731. By inserting it into, the projecting piece 735a can close the two rows of flow paths in the tank rail 731, and the game ball can be stopped from being supplied to the prize ball device 740 side. There is.

Further, in the tank rail unit 730, the tank rail 731 is made of a transparent synthetic resin so that the state of the game ball or the like in the tank rail 731 can be visually recognized from the outside.

Subsequently, the prize ball device 740 in the prize ball unit 700 discharges and supplies the game balls discharged and supplied from the discharge port 731a of the tank rail unit 730 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 based on a predetermined payout instruction. It is a thing. As shown in FIGS. 77 to 79, the prize ball device 740 includes a unit base 741 extending in the vertical direction attached to the prize ball device mounting portion 714 of the prize ball base 710. As shown in the figure, the unit base 741 in the prize ball device 740 opens at the upper end and extends to a position slightly lower than the center in the vertical direction with a width slightly wider than the outer shape of the game ball. The 741a, the distribution space 741b having a space of a predetermined size communicating with the lower end of the supply passage 741a, and the lower end of the rear view left side (open side) of the distribution space 741b are connected to each other and bent in a substantially square shape for rear view. It is provided with a prize ball passage 741c that opens on the left side surface, and a ball removal passage 741d that communicates with the lower end of the distribution space 741b on the right side (shaft support side) of the rear view and extends downward to open at the lower end. The supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the ball removal passage 741d of the unit base 741 are formed in a state of being open to the rear.

The prize ball device 740 of this example has a back cover 742 that is attached to the rear side of the unit base 741 and has a shorter vertical length than the unit base 741, and a plate-shaped motor support that is arranged under the back cover 742. The plate 743, the payout motor 744 arranged on the front side of the motor support plate 743 and fixed to the unit base 741 so that the rotary shaft 744a protrudes rearward from the motor support plate 743, and the rotary shaft 744a of the payout motor 744 are integrated. The first gear 745, which is rotatably fixed and arranged behind the motor support plate 743, meshes with the second gear 746, which meshes with the first gear 745 and is pivotally supported by the unit base 741, and meshes with the second gear 746. The third gear 747 that is pivotally supported by the unit base 741, the payout rotating body 748 that rotates integrally with the third gear 747 and is arranged in the distribution space 741b of the unit base 741, and the payout rotating body 748 are the third gears. It is provided with a rotation detection board 749 which is fixed to the opposite side of the 747 so as to be integrally rotatable and has a plurality of detection slits 749a (three in this example) at equal intervals in the circumferential direction.

Further, the prize ball device 740 includes a ball-out switch 750 attached to the unit base 741 to detect the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply passage 741a, and the number of game balls attached to the unit base 741 and circulating in the prize ball passage 741c. The counting sensor 751 for measuring the above, the rotation angle sensor 752 for detecting the detection slit 749a of the rotation detection board 749 that rotates integrally with the payout rotating body 748, and the rotation angle sensor 752 are held and attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742. The sensor board 753, the payout motor 744, the ball out switch 750, the counting sensor 751, and the prize ball relay board 754 that relays the connection between the rotation angle sensor 752 and the payout control board 4110 and is attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742. I have.

Further, the prize ball device 740 includes a board cover 755 that covers the prize ball relay board 754 from the rear side and is attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742, and the first gear 745, the second gear 746, and the third gear 747 (rotation detection board 747). ), And the gear cover 756 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 741 with the back cover 742 sandwiching the sensor board 753 from the rear side, and the supply passage ground capable of contacting the game ball circulating in the supply passage 741a of the unit base 741. The payout motor 744 is fixed to the unit base 741 by sandwiching the metal fitting 757 and the motor support plate 743, and the screw 758 for grounding the payout motor 744 and the back cover 742 are detachably supported with respect to the unit base 741. It is equipped with a detachable button 759.

In the prize ball device 740 of this example, the back cover 742 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 741, so that the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the ball removal passage 741d are opened rear ends. Is to be closed. Further, the unit base 741 has a shape in which the position below the upper end in the supply passage 741a once bulges rearward, so that the momentum of the game ball discharged and dropped from the tank rail unit 730 can be relaxed. You can do it. Further, the unit base 741 is partially notched on one side surface (left side when viewed from the rear) below the rearwardly bulging position in the supply passage 741a, and is outside the notched position of the supply passage 741a. The switch mounting portion 741e for mounting the ball break switch 750, the sensor mounting portion 741f for mounting the counting sensor 751 in the middle of the prize ball passage 741c, and the sensor mounting portion 741f below the prize ball passage 741c so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction. It is provided with a motor insertion hole 741 g, which is formed and can insert the payout motor 744.

By attaching the ball-cutting switch 750 to the switch mounting portion 741e of the unit base 741, the working piece of the ball-cutting switch 750 forms a part of the side wall of the supply passage 741a and exists in the supply passage 741a. When the operating piece is pressed by the game ball, the ball-out switch 750 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball in the supply passage 741a. In the state where the game ball in the supply passage 741a is not detected by the ball out switch 750 (the ball out state), the payout motor 744 is prevented from rotating, and the player or the hall indicates that the ball is out. It is designed to be notified to the side.

Further, the unit base 741 is provided between the bearing portion 741h for axially supporting the second gear 746 and the third gear 747 (delivery rotating body 748), the switch mounting portion 741e in the supply passage 741a, and the distribution space 741b. A ground fitting mounting portion 741i for mounting the supply passage ground fitting 757 and a button support hole 741j arranged on the upper part of the unit base 741 for supporting the attachment / detachment button 759 for attaching / detaching the back cover 742. I have. In this unit base 741, by attaching the supply passage ground fitting 757 to the ground fitting mounting portion 741i, the rear surface of the supply passage ground fitting 757 can come into contact with the game ball in the supply passage 741a. The front surface of the supply passage ground fitting 757 is in contact with the lower end rear surface of the U-shaped ground fitting 782, and the static electricity of the game ball circulating in the supply passage 741a is removed through the supply passage ground fitting 757. Can be done.

The back cover 742 of the prize ball device 740 has a vertically long plate shape as a whole and a shape in which the upper end bulges rearward. At the upper part of the back cover 742, there is a button insertion hole 742a through which the attachment / detachment button 759 is inserted, a relay board mounting portion 742b for mounting the prize ball relay board 754 and the board cover 755 on the substantially central rear surface in the vertical direction, and a relay board mounting. It is provided with a sensor board mounting portion 742c arranged below the portion 742b for mounting the sensor board 753, and a through hole 742d through which the payout rotating body 748 can pass. The relay board mounting portion 742b of the back cover 742 is formed so as to be located behind the ground fitting mounting portion 741i of the unit base 741.

Further, the motor support plate 743 of the prize ball device 740 is an aluminum plate in this example, and is in contact with the metal motor housing of the payout motor 744 to generate heat generated by the payout motor 744. It is possible to easily dissipate heat.

Further, as shown in FIG. 78, the payout rotating body 748 of the prize ball device 740 is provided with three recesses 748a having a size capable of accommodating one game ball at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. By rotating the 748, the game balls supplied from the supply passage 741a are housed one by one in the recess 748a and can be discharged to the prize ball passage 741c or the ball removal passage 741d side. Further, the three detection slits 749a of the rotation detection board 749 that rotates integrally with the payout rotating body 748 are formed at positions corresponding to the recesses 748a of the payout rotating body 748, respectively, and the detection slits 749a are formed by the rotation angle sensor 752. By detecting, the rotation position of the payout rotating body 748 can be detected.

The prize ball device 740 of this example is a payout motor when a payout command from the main control board 4100, a lending command from the CR unit 6, or the like is input to the payout control board 4110, or the ball ejection switch 860b is operated. The 744 rotates so that a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out to the player side (upper plate 301) or discharged to the game hall side (rear side of the pachinko machine 1). When the rotary shaft 744a of the payout motor 744 is rotationally driven, the first gear 745 fixed to the rotary shaft 744a is rotated, and at the same time, the second gear 746 that meshes with the first gear 745 is rotated, and further, the second gear 746 is rotated. The third gear 747 that meshes with is rotated. A payout rotating body 748 is fixed to the third gear 747 on the front side, and a rotation detection board 794 is fixed to the rear side so as to be integrally rotatable. Together with the third gear 747, the payout rotating body 748 and the rotation detection board 747 are fixed. It is designed to rotate.

In this prize ball device 740, as shown in FIG. 78, the payout rotating body 748 is rotatably supported in the substantially center of the distribution space 741b. Then, when the payout rotating body 748 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the rear by the payout motor 744, the game ball in the supply passage 741a is paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side, and the payout rotation The game balls paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side by the rotation of the body 748 are counted one by one by the counting sensor 751 and then delivered to the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. On the other hand, when the payout rotating body 748 is rotated in the rear view clockwise direction by the payout motor 744, the game ball in the supply passage 741a is paid out to the ball ejection passage 741d side, and the payout rotating body 748 The game balls discharged to the ball pulling passage 741d side are the ball pulling passage 778 of the full tank branch unit 770 described later, the main frame base ball pulling passage 622 of the main body frame base 600, and the board unit 800 from the lower end of the ball pulling passage 741d. The pachinko machine 1 can be discharged to the rear side and the outside through the opening 812 of the board unit base 810 and the discharge passage 842 of the power supply board box holder 840.

The unit base 741 in the prize ball device 740 of this example is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and even when assembled on the main body frame 3, the prize is awarded from the front side of the main body frame 3 through the transparent prize ball base 710. The inside of the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, the ball removal passage 741d, etc. of the ball device 740 can be visually recognized, and defects such as ball clogging can be easily found. ..

Next, the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 74, 75, and 79. The full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 is attached to the lower end of the prize ball base 710, and guides the game ball paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side of the prize ball unit 700 to the plate unit 300. When the game balls are full in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300, the game balls can be distributed so as to be paid out to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300.

The full tank branch unit 770 is fixed to the lower end back surface of the prize ball base 710 at the upper part of the rear end and the locking portion 770a which is locked to the mounting locking part 716 of the prize ball base 710 at the substantially central upper part in the front-rear direction. It is provided with a fixing portion 770b. The full tank branch unit 770 is in a state of being suspended from the mounting locking portion 716 by locking the locking portion 770a to the mounting locking portion 716 of the prize ball base 710 from the rear side, and the prize ball base. By fixing the fixing portion 770b to the 710 with a predetermined screw, the full tank branch unit 770 can be attached and fixed to the lower end of the prize ball base 710.

Further, as shown in the figure, the full tank branch unit 770 is formed in a box shape so that the whole becomes lower from the rear end to the front end, and opens upward at substantially the center in the left-right direction at the upper part of the rear end. The prize ball receiving port 771 that receives the game ball that has flowed down the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710, and the branch space 772 that is arranged under the prize ball receiving port 771 and spreads in the left-right direction (see FIG. 79). And the normal passage 773 (see FIG. 79) that guides the game ball from directly below the prize ball receiving port 771 in the branch space 772 to the front side, and the game ball that has passed through the normal passage 773 is discharged forward and in front of the front end. A normal ball outlet 774 opened at the right end of the view and a full tank passage 775 (see FIG. 79) that guides the game ball from a position away from directly below the prize ball receiving port 771 in the branch space 772 to the right side of the rear view toward the front side. ), And a full tank outlet 776 that discharges the game ball that has flowed through the full tank passage 775 forward and opens on the left side of the front view of the normal ball outlet 774.

Further, the full tank branch unit 770 has a ball ejection port 777 that opens upward to the left end of the front end of the upper part of the rear end and receives a game ball that has flowed down the ball ejection passage 741d of the prize ball device 740, and a ball. The ball ejection passage 778 (see FIG. 79) that guides the game ball received by the extraction port 777 to the front side and the game ball that has circulated through the ball extraction passage 778 are discharged forward and the normal ball outlet 774 and the normal ball outlet 774 at the left end of the front view. It is provided with a ball outlet 779 which is opened at a position behind the full ball outlet 776.

In the full tank branch unit 770 of this example, assuming that the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 776 are the first of the foul cover units 540 in the door frame 5, respectively. The game ball is designed to communicate with the ball inlet 542a and the second ball inlet 542c so as to face each other, and the game ball released from the normal ball outlet 774 passes through the first ball inlet 542a of the foul cover unit 540 and is connected to the dish unit 300. The game ball supplied to the upper plate 301 and released from the full tank outlet 776 is supplied to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 through the second ball inlet 542c of the foul cover unit 540. Further, the ball outlet 779 is formed so as to communicate with the upper right end of the rear view of the main body frame base ball extraction passage 622 in the main body frame base 600, and the game ball released from the ball extraction outlet 779 is formed in the main body frame base 600. It is designed to be handed over to the main body frame base ball pulling passage 622.

In this full tank branch unit 770, the game balls paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side of the prize ball device 740 can be received at the prize ball receiving port 771 via the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. The game ball that has entered the prize ball receiving port 771 hangs down the branch space 772 and flows down into the normal passage 773 arranged directly below the prize ball receiving port 771 in a normal state. Then, the game ball that has flowed down into the normal passage 773 enters the first ball inlet 542a of the foul cover unit 540 from the normal ball outlet 774, passes through the first ball passage 542b, and enters the plate unit 300 from the first ball outlet 544a. It will be supplied to the upper plate 301.

By the way, when the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 is full of game balls and the game balls are further paid out from the prize ball unit 700 (prize ball device 740), the first ball exit of the foul cover unit 540. The game ball that cannot come out from 544a to the upper plate 301 side stagnates in the first ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540, and eventually fills the upstream normal passage 773 through the normal ball outlet 774 in the full tank branch unit 770. become. In this state, the game ball that has entered the branch space 772 from the prize ball receiving port 771 cannot enter the normal passage 773, starts moving laterally in the branch space 772, and moves laterally. The game ball enters the full tank passage 775 and is under the plate unit 300 from the full tank outlet 776 via the second ball entrance 542c, the second ball passage 542d, and the second ball exit 544b of the foul cover unit 540. It is designed to be supplied to the plate 302.

The full-tank branching unit 770 of this example is entirely made of a transparent synthetic resin so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. As a result, foreign matter such as dust and dirt that has entered the full tank branch unit 770 and the occurrence of ball clogging can be easily found without disassembling the full tank branch unit 7700. ..

As described above, when the game ball is full in the upper plate 301, the full tank branch unit 770 of this example automatically performs the game ball paid out from the prize ball device 740 until the full tank is cleared. Since it can be supplied to the lower plate 302, the game ball is not supplied to the hitting ball launching device by operating the ball removal button on the upper plate when the upper plate is full like a conventional pachinko machine. It is possible to prevent the hitting of the game ball from being interrupted, eliminate the annoyance during the game, and suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

Further, as described above, the full tank branching unit 770 of this example branches the passage of the game ball to be paid out directly under the prize ball device 740, that is, at the rear of the pachinko machine 1 when the upper plate 301 is full. Since the game balls staying in the normal passage 773 of the full tank branch unit 770 are discharged to the upper plate 301, the game balls in the upper plate 301 and the game balls in the normal passage 773 are hit ball launching devices. It becomes a game ball that can be directly driven by the 650, and the stored amount of the game ball in the upper plate 301 is substantially the sum of the capacity of the upper plate 301 and the capacity of the normal passage 773. That is, even if the capacity of the upper plate 301 is made smaller than the capacity of the upper plate in the conventional pachinko machine, the capacity of the normal passage 773 is added, so that the same amount of game balls as the conventional one is stored in the upper plate 301. Can be done. Therefore, by making the upper plate 301 smaller, the game window 101 in the door frame 5 can be made relatively larger (wider), and the pachinko machine 1 having a wider game area 1100 can be made to play a game. The pachinko machine 1 has a high appeal to the player, and the wide game area 1100 makes it possible to entertain the player.

[1-3E. Ball exit opening / closing unit]
Next, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 80 to 82. FIG. 80 is a front perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame. Further, FIG. 81 is a rear perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame. Further, FIG. 82 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame and the foul cover unit in the door frame. The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is attached to a mounting portion 624 formed near the upper left end of the front view of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, and is attached to the main body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is opened, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 are closed, and the prize ball unit 700 is moved to the plate unit 300 of the door frame 5. It is possible to block the flow of the game ball.

The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 is attached to a mounting portion 624 formed near the upper left end of the front view of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 so as not to protrude from the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604. The opening / closing shutter 792 is held so as to be slidable in the vertical direction on the shutter base 791, the opening / closing crank 793 that slides the opening / closing shutter 792 in the vertical direction, and the opening / closing shutter 792 are raised via the opening / closing crank 793. It is equipped with an opening / closing spring 794 that urges the vehicle.

The shutter base 791 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 includes a pair of vertically extending slide grooves 791a for holding the opening / closing shutter 792 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction so as to project upward from the upper end of the shutter base 791. A rectangular opening 791b that penetrates in the front-rear direction between a pair of slide grooves 791a, and a crank that is arranged in front of the left end portion in a front view and rotatably supports an opening / closing crank 793 that extends in the front-rear direction. A support portion 791c and a spring locking portion 791d for locking one end (upper end) of the opening / closing spring 794 are provided. The crank support portion 791c of the shutter base 791 is arranged on the left side of the opening 791b in the front view, and the spring locking portion 791d is arranged in the vicinity of the upper portion on the left side from the center in the left-right direction in the front view.

Further, the opening / closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 is a pair of sliding protrusions (not shown) that project from the front surface of the flat shutter body 792a and the shutter body 792a and slide in the slide groove 791a of the shutter base 791. ), And a horizontally long rectangular drive hole 792b arranged at a position facing the opening 791b of the shutter base 791 between the pair of sliding protrusions and penetrating in the front-rear direction.

Further, the opening / closing crank 793 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 has a shaft portion 793a rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction by the crank support portion 791c of the shutter base 791, and the outer periphery on the right side of the front view of the shaft portion 793a. A drive rod 793b whose tip extends outward from the tip to the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction of the opening 791b, and a drive rod 793b that protrudes rearward from the tip and is slidably inserted into the drive hole 792b of the opening / closing shutter 792. Drive pin 793c, contact portion 793d extending downward from the lower outer periphery of the shaft portion 793a and having a spherical tip, and the other end (lower end) of the opening / closing spring 794 formed on the upper surface of the drive rod 793b. ) Is provided with a spring locking portion 793e.

In the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 of this example, the shutter base 791 and the opening / closing shutter 792 are formed of transparent synthetic resin, and even when the opening / closing shutter 792 is raised, the opening / closing shutter 792 is arranged on the rear side through the opening / closing shutter 792. The normal ball outlet 774, the full tank outlet 776, and the like in the full tank branch unit 770 can be visually recognized.

In the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 of this example, the opening / closing crank 793 rotates around an axis extending in the front-rear direction, so that the drive pin 793c of the opening / closing crank 793 rotates in the vertical direction in an arc shape, and at the same time, the drive pin 793c. The opening / closing shutter 792 slides in the vertical direction through the drive hole 792b into which the shutter is inserted. In the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the contact portion 793d of the opening / closing crank 793 comes into contact with the opening / closing operation piece 542g of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5. The contact portion 793d is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view against the urging force of the opening / closing spring 794, and the drive pin 793c is rotated in the front view clockwise direction together with the contact portion 793d. By moving, the open / close shutter 792 is lowered so that the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 can be opened.

When the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 from this state, the contact portion 793d of the opening / closing crank 793 and the opening / closing operating piece 542g of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 are released, and the opening / closing crank 793 is released. Is rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front by the urging force of the opening / closing spring 794, and at the same time, the opening / closing shutter 792 rises to close the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 767 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770. You can do it.

In this way, according to the opening and closing of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 automatically opens the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 767 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700. Since it can be opened and closed, even if the door frame 5 is opened with the game ball remaining in the full tank branch unit 770, the game ball is prevented from spilling from the normal ball outlet 774 or the full tank outlet 776. You can do it.

[1-3F. Board unit]
Next, the substrate unit 800 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 83 to 89. FIG. 83 is a front perspective view of the substrate unit in the main body frame, and FIG. 84 is a rear perspective view of the substrate unit in the main body frame. Further, FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the front by disassembling the substrate unit. Further, FIG. 86 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed after being disassembled. Further, FIG. 87 is a perspective view illustrating the operation of the vertical wall portion of the power supply board box in the board unit. FIG. 88 (A) is a cross-sectional view of the terminal board box in the board unit, and FIG. 88 (B) is an exploded perspective view of the terminal board box in the board unit as viewed from the front. Further, FIG. 89A is a front view of the firing power supply board box, and FIG. 89B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA shown in FIG.

The board unit 800 in the main body frame 3 includes a board unit base 810 attached to the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, a speaker box 820 attached to the left rear surface of the board unit base 810 in front view, and a board unit base. A power supply board box 830 mounted on the rear surface of the right end of the front view of the 810, a power supply board box holder 840 mounted on the rear surface of the board unit base 810 so as to surround the launch power board box 830 from the rear side, and a power supply board box holder 840. A power supply board box 850 mounted on the rear surface and having a rear end substantially flush with the rear end of the speaker box 820, and a payout control board box 860 mounted on the rear surfaces of the power supply board box 850 and the speaker box 820. The power supply board box holder 840 attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 820 so as to cover the left end of the payout control board box 860 in front view, the main relay terminal board 880 attached to the front surface of the board unit base 810, and the peripheral side. It is provided with a relay terminal board 882.

As shown in the figure, the substrate unit base 810 in the substrate unit 800 of this example has a form that extends long in the left-right direction, and a substantially central portion in the left-right direction is lowered by one step and gently inclined upward toward both left and right ends. A wall-shaped shielding wall portion 811 projecting from the front to the front, an opening 812 arranged on the upper side of the shielding wall portion 811 at a position one step lower in the center in the left-right direction and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a lower side of the shielding wall portion 811. A board mounting portion 813 formed on the front surface near the left end of the front view for mounting the main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882, and a rectangular shape horizontally long in the front-rear direction on the left side of the board mounting portion 813. A tubular duct portion 814 that penetrates, a plurality of vertically elongated slit-shaped through holes 815 that penetrate in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 fixed to the rear surface, and the left side of the rear view (right side of the front view). A box accommodating portion 816 that is open rearward and upward and can accommodate the front side of the firing power supply board box 830 is provided on the rear surface of the upper portion.

The substrate unit base 810 is formed so that the shielding wall portion 811 is formed along the lower side of the main body frame base ball pulling passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600. It is possible to prevent the game ball from falling downward from the base ball pulling passage 622, and it is possible to increase the strength of the substrate unit base 810. Further, the board unit base 810 sends the game balls flowing down the main body frame base ball pulling passage 622 to the power supply board box holder 840 arranged on the rear side of the board unit base 810 through the opening 812 penetrating in the front-rear direction. You can do it.

Further, in the board unit base 810, the board mounting portion 813 for mounting the main side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 is arranged at a position corresponding to the rectangular opening opening 614 in the main body frame base 600. When the main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 are attached to the board mounting portion 813, the main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 are on the front side from the opening 614 of the main body frame base 600. It is designed to face. Further, the substrate unit base 810 can satisfactorily transmit the sound from the speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 to the front side by the duct portion 814 and the plurality of through holes 815.

Further, the board unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the front box accommodating portion 843 of the power supply board box holder 840 in which the box accommodating portion 816 is arranged on the rear side, and the box accommodating portion 816 and the front box accommodating portion 843 are formed. As a result, it is possible to form a storage recess for accommodating the firing power supply board box 830.

The speaker box 820 in the board unit 800 literally includes a speaker 821 mounted facing forward. The speaker box 820 covers the rear side of the speaker 821 in a hermetically sealed manner, and at the same time, a horizontally long rectangular opening 822 is formed on the left side of the speaker 821 when viewed from the front. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the opening 822 communicates with the space behind the speaker 821 via a predetermined maze-shaped passage to invert the phase of the sound behind the speaker 821 and move forward. It is a bass reflex type speaker box capable of emitting deeper bass with respect to the diameter of the speaker 821. The duct portion 814 of the board unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the opening 822 of the speaker box 820, so that the sound radiated from the opening 822 can be satisfactorily transmitted forward. ing.

The firing power board box 830 in the board unit 800 is formed in a box shape with an open rear portion, and includes a firing power board 831 attached so as to close the rear end opening. The firing power supply board box 830 is adapted to accommodate various electronic components attached to the firing power supply board 831, and heat from the electronic components and the like is passed through the slits 830a formed on the upper surface and the lower surface. Can be released to the outside.

The firing power supply board box 830 is detached from above in a storage recess formed by the box housing portion 816 of the board unit base 810 and the front box housing portion 844 of the power supply board box holder 840 described later. It is designed to be accommodated as much as possible. As a result, in the state where the main body frame 3 is assembled, if a problem occurs in the firing power supply board box 830, the firing power supply board box 830 can be easily attached / detached from the front side of the main body frame 3 for replacement or repair. It is possible (see FIG. 63).

Further, the firing power supply board box 830 will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 89, the firing power supply board 831 has a DC / DC converter 831a and an electrolytic capacitor SC0 for charging and discharging the power from the DC / DC converter 831a. The combined current, which is the sum of the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge from the electrolytic capacitor SC0, is driven by passing a current through the firing solenoid 654 of the ball launching device 650. The firing power supply board box 830 is formed with slits 830a as heat dissipation holes on the upper and lower surfaces thereof in order to release the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 mounted on the firing power supply board 831 to the outside. ing.

Further, since the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply board 831 is an electronic component that is more easily damaged by heat than the DC / DC converter 831a, the side surface of the firing power supply board box 830 in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is arranged is provided with a heat dissipation hole. A slit 830a is formed. Further, in the firing power supply board box 830, a partition wall 830b that divides the internal space into two spaces, a space for accommodating the DC / DC converter 831a and a space for accommodating the electrolytic capacitor SC0, is an upper inner wall. Is integrally formed from the bottom surface to the edge of the end opening so as to connect the bottom surface and the inner wall of the bottom surface. As a result, when the firing power supply board 831 is attached to the end opening of the firing power supply board box 830 and the internal space of the firing power supply board box 830 is closed, the internal space of the firing power supply board box 830 accommodates the electrolytic capacitor SC0 by the partition wall 830b. Since two spaces are formed, the accommodating space 830c for accommodating the DC / DC converter 831a and the accommodating space 830d for accommodating the DC / DC converter 831a, the partition wall 830b and the accommodating space 830c for accommodating the electrolytic capacitor SC0. The storage space 830d for accommodating the DC / DC converter 831a and the heat insulating wall for blocking the inflow and outflow of heat.

The heat in the accommodation space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is housed, that is, the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is slits as heat dissipation holes formed in the upper surface, the side surface, and the lower surface that communicate the accommodation space 830c and the outside air, respectively. By being discharged to the outside via the 830a, it is possible to prevent the released heat from entering the accommodation space 830d in which the DC / DC converter 831a is accommodated. Therefore, the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 can be prevented from being transferred to the DC / DC converter 831a. Further, the heat in the accommodation space 830d in which the DC / DC converter 831a is accommodated, that is, the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a is the heat radiation holes formed on the upper surface and the lower surface that communicate the accommodation space 830d and the outside air, respectively. By being discharged to the outside through the slit 830a, the released heat can be prevented from entering the accommodation space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is accommodated. Therefore, the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a can be prevented from being transferred to the electrolytic capacitor SC0.

In the present embodiment, the DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for creating the merged current to be passed through the firing solenoid 654 of the ball launching device 650 are not installed on the power supply board 851, but are launched separately from the power supply board 851. By being provided on the power supply board 831, the size of the firing power supply board 831 can be made smaller than the size of the power supply board 851. Therefore, the miniaturization of the firing power supply board 831 makes it easier to handle, facilitates the replacement work of the firing power supply board 831, and contributes to shortening the time spent for the replacement work. In this replacement work, the firing power board 831 can be replaced as it is attached to the end opening of the firing power board box 830, that is, the entire firing power board box 830 can be replaced.

Further, even if the pachinko machine 1 is operated and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 reaches the end of its life, and the drive launch by the launch solenoid 654 suddenly becomes impossible to launch and the game has to be interrupted, the replacement work of the launch power supply board 831 is easy. By doing so, the interruption of the game can be resolved at an early stage. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the inability to fire due to the life of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 extremely easily, and it is possible to eliminate the interruption of the game due to the inability to fire at an early stage and restart the game, which reduces the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

The electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply board 831 deteriorates and reaches the end of its life due to repeated charging and discharging at a frequency of, for example, 100 times per minute each time drive firing is performed by the firing solenoid 654. On the other hand, although the power supply board 851 creates a DC power supply from the AC power supply of island facilities such as a game hall, it is not repeatedly charged and discharged at the same frequency as the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply board 831. Compared with the firing power supply board 831, its life is extremely long. In other words, the firing power supply board 831 reaches the end of its life due to deterioration due to charging and discharging of the electrolytic capacitor SC0, whereas the power supply board 851 reaches the end of its life due to aging. The DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for creating the merged current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 are not provided on the power supply board 851, but are provided on the firing power supply board 831 which is separate from the power supply board 851. Electronic components that accompany long-term changes can be concentrated on the power supply board 851. As a result, it is possible to prevent the electronic components having a long life from being replaced together with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 having a short life due to aging.

Further, the power supply board box holder 840 in the board unit 800 is opened upward on the left front side of the center on the left and right in front view, and receives the game ball discharged downward from the out ball discharging portion 1161 of the game board 4. The discharge ball receiving portion 841 and the discharge passage 842 that guides and discharges the game ball received by the discharge ball receiving portion 841 downward, and the front side (right side in front view) of the discharge passage 842 and the discharge ball receiving portion 841. The front box accommodating portion 843 which is opened forward and upward and can accommodate the rear side of the power supply board box 830, and the front end of the power supply board box 850 which is formed so that the entire rear surface of the power supply board box holder 840 is recessed toward the front side. It is provided with a rear box accommodating portion 844 capable of accommodating.

The power supply board box holder 840 is such that the open front end side of the discharge passage 842 is closed by the rear surface of the board unit base 810, and the opening 812 of the board unit base 810 is at a position desired to the discharge passage 842. The rear side of the board unit base 810 is formed, passes through the main body frame base ball pulling passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, passes through the opening 812 of the board unit base 810, and passes through the opening 812 of the board unit base 810. The game ball that has flowed down to the pachinko machine 1 and the game ball that has been discharged from the out-ball discharge unit 1161 of the game board 4 and received by the discharge ball receiving unit 841 will be passed through the discharge passage 842 to the lower rear side of the pachinko machine 1. It can be discharged to.

Further, the power supply board box holder 840 is formed at a position corresponding to the box accommodating portion 816 of the substrate unit base 810, and the box accommodating portion 816 and the front box accommodating portion 843 accommodate the firing power supply board box 830. It is possible to form a recess.

Further, the power supply board box 850 in the board unit 800 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with an open front, and includes a power supply board 851 attached so as to close the front end opening thereof. The power supply board box 850 accommodates various electronic components attached to the power supply board 851, and externally receives heat from the electronic components and the like through a plurality of slits 850a formed on the upper surface and the lower surface. It can be released to. As shown in FIG. 86, the power switch 852 attached to the power supply board 851 faces the rear surface of the power supply board box 850.

Further, the power supply board box 850 is a vertical wall in which the power supply terminal 853 (see FIGS. 84 and 86) attached to the lower side of the power supply switch 852 in the power supply board 851 projects rearward along the lower side of the opening facing the rear side. The wiring cord 854 can be inserted between the portion 850b, the protrusions 850c protruding rearward from both sides of the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, and the outer periphery of the power supply board box 850 arranged on the front side and the lower side of the standing wall portion 850b. It is provided with a wiring guide portion 850d that forms a gap. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the power supply terminal 853 mounted on the power supply board 851 has a locking claw that locks with the locking claw of the connector terminal 855, and the locking claw and the locking piece. By locking and, the connector terminal 855 does not come off from the power supply terminal 853.

As shown in FIG. 87, the power supply board box 850 has a vertical wall portion 850b slightly rearward of the rear end of the connector terminal 855 in a state where the connector terminal 855 of the wiring cord 854 is connected to the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply board 851. It is formed so as to protrude to. In the power supply board box 850 of this example, the wiring cord 854 is connected to the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply board 851 in a state where the wiring cord 854 wraps around from the front lower side of the power supply board box 850 to the rear side so as to be caught by the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b. The terminal 855 is connected.

By the way, if the connector terminal with the extended wiring cord is connected to the connection terminal attached to the board and the wiring cord is pulled toward the board, the connector terminal is connected by the tension applied from the wiring cord. Since it is pressed against the terminal side, there is a problem that it is difficult to remove the connector terminal from the connection terminal. However, according to the power supply board box 850 of this example, the tip side of the wiring cord 854 (the side opposite to the connector terminal 855 side connected to the power supply terminal 853) moves to the power supply board 851 side (front side with respect to the main body frame 3). Even if it is pulled, the wiring cord 854 is routed so as to wrap around (fold back) to the rear side of the connector terminal 855 by the standing wall portion 850b protruding rearward from the connector terminal 855. It is possible to prevent a force that pushes the terminal 855 toward the power supply terminal 853 from acting, and the connector terminal 855 connected to the power supply terminal 853 can be easily removed.

Further, since the power supply board box 850 is provided with protrusions 850c protruding rearward on both sides of the rear end of the vertical wall portion 850b, even if the wiring cord 854 slides along the rear end of the vertical wall portion 850b, the rear end The protrusions 850c provided on both ends can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward, and prevent the wiring cord 854 from coming off the standing wall portion 850b.

Further, by inserting the wiring cord 854 into the wiring guide portion 850d of the power supply board box 850, the wiring cord 854 folded back at the standing wall portion 850b can be brought closer to the standing wall portion 850b side, so that the wiring cord 854 can be moved from the standing wall portion 850b. The wiring cord 854 can be folded back at the standing wall portion 850b, and then the wiring cord 854 can be immediately moved to the standing wall portion 850b side at the wiring guide portion 850d, so that a series of operations can be continuously performed. It can be done, and the work process related to assembly can be simplified.

The power supply board box 850 and the power supply board box holder 840 are formed so that the dimensions in the front-rear direction when assembled with each other are substantially the same as the dimensions in the front-rear direction of the speaker box 820, and the board unit base 810. When attached to, the rear surface of the power supply board box 850 and the rear surface of the speaker box 820 are substantially identical to each other.

Further, the payout control board box 860 in the board unit 800 has a horizontally long thin box-shaped box base 861 with an open rear and a thin box-shaped cover fitted into the box base 861 from the rear side and the front is open. It includes a 862 and a payout control board 4110 (see FIG. 110) that is attached to the rear surface of the box base 861 and whose rear surface is covered by a cover 862. Further, the payout control board box 860 includes a plurality of separated cutting portions 863 formed on both the box base 861 and the cover 862 protruding outward from the left end of the rear view, and at one location of the plurality of separated cutting portions 863. The box base 861 and the cover 862 are caulked and fixed. As a result, in order to separate the box base 861 and the cover 862, the separation cutting portion 863 must be cut before the box base 861 and the cover 862 can be separated, and when the payout control board box 860 is opened, a trace thereof remains. .. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the payout control board box 860 has been opened or closed illegally. In this example, the payout control board box 860 can be opened and closed only once for inspection or the like.

In the payout control board box 860, the error release switch 860a, the ball ejection switch 860b, the inspection output terminal 860c, etc. attached to the payout control board 4110 face rearward through the cover 862 (see FIG. 62). ). Further, in the payout control board box 860, terminals for various connections for connecting to the main control board 4100 and the like face rearward through the cover 862.

Further, the terminal board box 870 in the board unit 800 is attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 820, and has a board mounting portion 871a formed on the upper rear surface on the left side of the rear view and a board cover mounting portion 871b formed on the rear surface of the right end of the rear view. On the board base 871 provided, the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 mounted on the board mounting portion 871a of the board base 871 from the rear side and the peripheral panel relay terminal 872a mounted on the rear surface, and the board cover mounting portion 871b of the board base 871. A connection terminal plate cover 873 which is attached from the rear side and has an opening 873b extending in the vertical direction on the rear wall portion 873a and a CR unit connection terminal 874a which faces rearward from the opening 873a of the connection terminal plate cover 873 are attached to the rear surface. It includes a CR unit connection terminal plate 874 supported in the connection terminal plate cover 873, and a substrate box cover 875 that covers the rear side of the substrate base 871 together with the connection terminal plate cover 873.

The peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 in the terminal board box 870 connects the pachinko machine 1 with a frequency indicator for displaying the operating state of the pachinko machine 1 provided on the island facility side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is for connecting the ball lending machine (also referred to as the CR unit 6) installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and the pachinko machine 1. The board base 871 and the connection terminal cover 873 and the board box cover 875 of the terminal board box 870 are each made of transparent synthetic resin, and the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 and the CR unit connection terminal from the outside to the inside are formed. The board 874 and the like can be visually recognized. In addition, on the rear surface of the board box cover 875, the content of the error code displayed on the frequency display, CR unit 6, etc. installed on the island equipment side when a problem such as ball clogging occurs in the pachinko machine 1. The displayed status display sticker 876 is attached.

As shown in FIG. 88, the substrate base 871 in the terminal substrate box 870 has a substrate mounting portion 871a formed in a thin box shape with an open rear end. The board base 871 is formed on a fixing piece (not shown) formed on the inner upper part of the board mounting portion 871a to fix the upper end of the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872, and is formed on the inner lower part of the board mounting portion 871a to relay the peripheral panel. A locking claw 871c that locks the lower end of the terminal plate 872 is provided, and the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 can be detachably held from the rear side by the fixing piece and the locking claw 871c. ing.

Further, in the board base 871, the board cover mounting portion 871b is formed in a thin box shape open to the rear side, and the size of the inner circumference thereof is set so that the outer circumference of the connection terminal board cover 873 can be inserted. At the same time, the inner peripheral wall of the locking claw 871c extends in the front-rear direction. The board base 871 comes into contact with a pair of fixing holes 871d penetrating the locking claw 871c on the right side in the rear view in the left-right direction and the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 extending rearward from the bottom wall of the board cover mounting portion 871b. It is provided with two ridges 871e extending in the vertical direction and a locking hole 871f arranged on the left outer side of the board cover mounting portion 871b in the rear view and penetrating in the front-rear direction. The protrusion 871e in the substrate base 871 has a state in which the amount of protrusion to the rear is slightly smaller than that of the locking claw 871c, and as shown in the figure, it is possible to reach both ends of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. It is arranged so that it is close to.

Further, the board base 871 is arranged on the rear surface on the right side of the rear view of the board cover mounting portion 871b so as to be separated from each other in the vertical direction, and a pair of bearing portions 871 g for rotatably supporting the board box cover 875 and the left end of the rear view. It is provided with a square tubular locking portion 871h arranged on the rear surface in the vicinity of the portion and extending in the front-rear direction.

The connection terminal plate cover 873 in the terminal board box 870 is an outer wall portion 873c that surrounds the outer periphery of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and can be inserted into the board cover mounting portion 871b surrounded by the locking claws 871c of the board base 871. A rear wall portion 873a that closes the rear end of the outer wall portion 873c, a rectangular opening 873b that penetrates the rear wall portion 873a and extends in the vertical direction, and a rear wall portion substantially along the inner circumference of the opening 873b. The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is held so that the inner wall portion 873d extending from 873a to the front (board base 871 side) and the front end of the inner wall portion 873d are in contact with the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and the upper and lower outer wall portions are held. It includes a pair of claw-shaped substrate holding portions 873e formed in 873c.

Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 is arranged at a position corresponding to a plurality of internal connection terminals 874b attached to the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and has a plurality of openings 873f penetrating the rear wall portion 873a, and abbreviated in the vertical direction. A box-shaped protective portion 873 g that covers the rear side of the opening 873f arranged in the center and the left side of the rear view is open, and a substrate base 871 that extends outward (to the right) from the right end of the rear view of the outer wall portion 873c. A pair of fixing pieces 873h that can be inserted into the fixing holes 871d of the above, and an elastic claw-shaped engagement that is formed at the left end of the outer wall portion 873c and can be locked into the locking holes 871f of the substrate base 871. It is provided with a claw piece 873i. Although not shown, an inner wall portion 873d extending forward is also formed above and below the inner circumference of the central opening 873f provided with the protective portion 873g.

The connection terminal plate cover 873 has a thin box shape with the front side open by the outer wall portion 873c and the rear wall portion 873a. Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 can restrict the movement of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 to the rear by the front end of the inner wall portion 873d by inserting the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 into the inside from the opened front side. At the same time, the pair of substrate holding portions 873e can restrict the movement of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 forward, so that the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 can be held detachably. It has become. Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 is formed by inserting the fixing piece 873h into the fixing hole 871d of the substrate base 871 and then locking the locking claw piece 873i into the locking hole 871f of the substrate base 871. It can be detachably attached to the board cover attachment portion 871b of the base 871.

The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in the terminal board box 870 is a CR unit connection terminal 874a for connecting the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 installed on the island equipment side of the game hall on the front surface side (rear surface side). In addition, a plurality of internal connection terminals 874b for connecting to the payout control board 4110, the ball rental unit 360, and the like are provided. In the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 of this example, as shown in the figure, the CR unit connection terminal 874a is a D-sub connector having a locking function, and the internal connection terminal 874b is a square two-piece connector. There is.

Further, the substrate box cover 875 of the terminal substrate box 870 is formed in a thin box shape having a size that substantially covers the entire rear surface of the substrate base 871 and is entirely open to the front side, and is arranged on the right side surface of the substrate base 871. A pair of shaft portions 875a rotatably supported by the bearing portion 871 g, a through-hole 875b corresponding to the opening 873b in the connection terminal plate cover 873 and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a through-hole 875b forward from both left and right ends. It is provided with an impact wall 875c extending to the surface and a locking piece 875d locked to the locking portion 871h of the substrate base 871.

The board box cover 875 can cover the rear surface of the board base 871 so as to be openable and closable together with the connection terminal board cover 873 by pivotally supporting the pair of shaft parts 875a to the bearing portion 871g of the board base 871. There is. Further, the substrate box cover 875 has a length such that the impact wall 875c on the side closer to the shaft portion 875a (the side supported by the shaft) extends to the rear surface of the substrate base 871, and the impact wall on the side far from the shaft portion 875a. The length of 875c is set to extend to the rear surface of the connection terminal plate cover 873. That is, in the terminal board box 870 of this example, when the board box cover 875 is closed, the front ends of the respective contact walls 875c are substantially in contact with the rear surface of the board base 871 and the connection terminal board cover 873. It has become like.

In the terminal board box 870 of this example, since the CR unit connection terminal 874a of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is a D-sub connector, as shown in FIG. 88, the CR unit is connected to the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. The main body of the connection terminal 874a is in a floating state, and the lead portion extending from the CR unit connection terminal 874a is also exposed to the outside on the rear surface side of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Further, the internal connection terminal 874b of the CR unit connection end plate 874 is a square two-piece connector, and is attached so that it can be fitted and connected from the rear as shown in the figure.

Then, as shown in FIG. 88, the terminal board box 870 of this example has the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board base 871 in the direction along the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal board 874 in the assembled state. The ridge 871e and the locking claw 871c of the above, and the outer wall portion 873c and the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the shaft portion 875a of the board box cover 875 in the direction along the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Since the side wall 875c exists respectively, a barrier is constructed by multiple layers, and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the board base 871 becomes a meandering crank shape. It has become. Therefore, for example, even if an unauthorized tool with excellent flexibility is inserted between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the board base 871 (boundary), the tool does not bend along the boundary and the CR unit connection terminal is used. Unauthorized tool intrusion from the direction along the surface of the plate 874 can be reliably prevented, and unauthorized activity against the CR unit connection terminal 874a provided on the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 can be reliably prevented. It has become.

Further, in this terminal board box 870, since the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 comes into contact with the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the CR unit attached as the CR unit connection terminal 874a Even if a D-sub connector in which a gap is formed with the connection terminal plate 874 is used, the outer periphery of the lead portion exposed by the inner wall portion 873d can be covered, and fraudulent acts can be prevented. It has become like.

Further, the terminal board box 870 is a pair of shaft portions 875a on the shaft portion 875a side of the through port 875b facing the CR unit connection terminal 874a on the substrate box cover 875 rotatably supported on the rear surface of the substrate base 871. An impact wall 875c having a length straddling between them is provided, and the strength and rigidity of the board box cover 875 can be increased by the impact wall 875c. Therefore, a driver or the like is inserted between the board box cover 875 and the board base 871. Even if an attempt is made to form a gap between the pair of shaft portions 875a, it is possible to prevent the substrate box cover 875 from being distorted and prevent the formation of a gap, which makes it difficult to cheat and deters. It can be expensive.

Further, in the terminal board box 870 of this example, the rear side of the internal connection terminal 874b near the center of the CR unit connection terminal board 874 is covered with the protection portion 873 g of the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board box cover 875. Therefore, with the connection terminal on the wiring cord side fitted and connected to the internal connection terminal 874b, which is a two-piece connector, insert a needle-shaped electrode through the gap between the connector body of the connection terminal and the wiring cord. Even so, the protective portion 873 g and the substrate box cover 875 can prevent the insertion of the electrodes, and can prevent fraudulent acts on the internal connection terminal 874b.

Further, the main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 of the board unit 800 are provided with a peripheral control unit 4140 provided on the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3, a payout control board 4110 of the board unit 800, and the like. This is for relaying the connection with the handle device 500 provided on the door frame 5, each decorative board, the operation unit 400, and the like. The main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 are provided with a plurality of connection terminals for connecting to the main body frame 3 side and the door frame 5 side, and are formed on the front surface of the substrate unit base 810. By attaching to the attachment portion 813, these connection terminals face the front side from the front surface of the main body frame base 600.

As shown in FIGS. 61 and 63, the front side of the main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 is covered with the relay terminal plate cover 692 attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600. At the same time, only the connection terminals for connecting to the door frame 5 side face the front side through the opening 692a of the relay terminal plate cover 692, and the wiring cord 196 is connected to those connection terminals. (See FIGS. 1 and 30).

Further, the main relay terminal plate 880 is a ball rental button 361, a return button 362, a rental balance display unit 363, and a rotation position detection sensor of the handle device 500 of the ball rental unit 360 in the dish unit 300 arranged on the door frame 5 side. The purpose is to relay the connection between the full tank detection sensor 550 of the 512, the touch sensor 516, the launch stop switch 518, and the foul cover unit 540, and the payout control board 4110 arranged on the main body frame 3 side. Further, the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 is attached to the decorative units 200, 240, 280 arranged on the door frame 5 side, the decorative substrates 430, 432 provided in the dish unit 300 and the operation unit 400, and the operation unit 400. This is for relaying the connection between the dial drive motor 414 and the sensors 432a, 432b, 432c provided and the peripheral control unit 4140 of the game board 4 arranged on the main body frame 3 side.

[1-3G. Back cover]
Subsequently, the back cover 900 in the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 92. 90 (A) is a front perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame, and FIG. 90 (B) is a rear perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame. Further, FIG. 91 is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a portion of the fastening mechanism on the back cover, and FIG. 92 is an exploded perspective view of the fastening mechanism on the back cover as viewed from the rear side by disassembling. The back cover 900 of this example is made of a transparent synthetic resin so that the inside of the main body frame 3 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

The back cover 900 in the main body frame 3 covers the rear side of the game board holding port 601 (the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3) for holding the game board 4 in the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable. .. The back cover 900 is provided on a plate-shaped main body 902 that closes the rear opening of the game board holding port 601, a side portion 904 that extends forward from the right side of the main body 902 in front view, and a front end of the side portion 904. A plurality of shaft support pins 906 arranged side by side in the vertical direction and projecting downward to be pivotally supported by the back cover shaft support 623 of the main body frame base 600, and a prize ball formed on the upper and lower left sides of the main body 902 in front view, respectively. An engaging piece 908 that engages with the back cover engaging groove 718 of the base 710 and the back cover engaging groove 780a of the prize ball passage lid 780, and a back cover 900 in the vicinity of the lower engaging piece 908. It is provided with a fastening mechanism 920 for fastening to 3 so that it cannot be opened and closed.

As shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, the fastening mechanism 920 in the back cover 900 has a circular insertion hole penetrating in the front-rear direction to the left side in the rear view of the lower locking piece 908 in the main body portion 902 of the back cover 900. A vertically long rectangular locking port 922 that is arranged at a predetermined distance on the left side of the insertion hole 921 and the insertion hole 921 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a locking port that is elastically locked to the locking port 922 from the rear side. A plate-shaped guide member 923 having a piece 923a on one end side and a horizontally long elongated hole 923b corresponding to an insertion hole 921 on the other end side, and a plate-shaped guide member 923 inserted into the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923 from the rear side to form a main body 902. The fastening member 924 having a male screw portion 924a screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b of the prize ball passage lid 780 via the insertion hole 921 and the guide member 923 are attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 so as to sandwich the guide member 923. It includes a holding member 925 and. The guide member 923 in the fastening mechanism 920 is made of a soft synthetic resin and is easily bent.

Further, in the fastening mechanism 920, the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is locked to the locking port 922 of the main body 902 in a loosely fitted state, and the guide member 923 is within a predetermined range. It is possible to play with. Further, in the fastening mechanism 920, the fastening member 924 is supported by the guide member 923 through the elongated hole 923b by the disk-shaped holding member 925 attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, and is supported along the elongated hole 923b. It can slide in the left-right direction and does not fall out of the elongated hole 923b. When the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is locked to the locking port 922 of the main body 902 from the rear side, the fastening mechanism 920 projects the fastening member 924 to the front side through the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923. The male screw portion 924a is in a state of being inserted into the insertion hole 921 of the main body portion 902.

In the back cover 900 of this example, the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 can be opened and closed by pivotally supporting the shaft support pin 906 to the back cover shaft support portion 623 of the main body frame base 600. By engaging the engaging piece 908 with the back cover engaging grooves 718 and 780a of the main body frame base 600 and the prize ball passage lid 780, the closed state can be obtained. When the back cover 900 is closed, the insertion hole 921 in the fastening mechanism 920 and the back cover fastening hole 780b of the prize ball passage lid 780 are substantially aligned with each other.

When the back cover 900 is closed, the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 inserted into the insertion hole 921 from the rear side to the front side is not naturally screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b, so that the back cover 900 is not screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b. Even when the cover 900 is closed, the tip of the male screw portion 924a is stopped at the rear end of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 protrudes rearward from the main body portion 902 of the back cover 900. By the way, in this example, since the fastening member 924 is supported in the elongated hole 923b of the locked guide member 923 of the main body portion 902 of the back cover 900, the fastening member 924 does not fall off from the back cover 900. The state of being located on the rear side of the main body 9002 is maintained.

Then, from this state, the tip of the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 is inserted into the back cover fastening hole 780b and the fastening member 924 is rotated, so that the male screw portion 924a is screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b (screw). The back cover 900 can be fastened and fixed. In the fastening mechanism 920 of this example, when the fastening member 924 is screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b, even if the guide member 923 that supports the fastening member 924 is slanted with respect to the main body portion 902, the fastening member 924 is inserted. Since it is supported by the elongated hole 923b, the fastening member 924 (male threaded portion 924a) can be positioned straight with respect to the axis of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 can be satisfactorily placed in the back cover fastening hole 780b. It can be screwed in.

Further, in this example, since the back cover 900 is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 3 side by the fastening mechanism 920 at one place, it can be easily fastened or fastened only by operating the fastening member 924 at one place. It can be released, and the time and effort required to open and close the back cover 900 can be simplified to improve maintainability.

Further, the back cover 900 has a connection notch 910 cut out in a rectangular shape upward at the lower right end of the front view of the main body 902 and a confirmation opening penetrating in a rectangular shape on the upper side of the connection notch 910 in the front view. A 912 and a confirmation notch 914 notched in a rectangular shape in the lower left corner of the main body 902 in front view are provided.

As shown in FIG. 5, the back cover 900 has a RAM clear switch 4100c, a collation terminal 4100i, etc. of the main control board box 1170 in the game board 4 through the connection notch 910 in a state of being closed with respect to the main body frame 3. It is designed to face the rear side. Further, in the back cover 900, the board management sticker 1178 (see FIG. 101) attached to the rear surface of the main control board box 1170 faces the rear side through the confirmation opening 912, and the back cover 900 is used for confirmation. The sealing portion 1176 of the main control board box 1170 faces through the cutout portion 914. As a result, it is possible to check the operation, appearance, management status, and the like of the main control board box 1170 and the main control board 4100 without opening the back cover 900 with respect to the main body frame 3.

Further, the back cover 900 is formed with a plurality of slits 916 that are elongated and penetrated through the main body portion 902 and the side portion 904, and the heat generated in the game board 4 or the like through these slits 916 is transferred to the main body frame 3 (pachinko machine 1). It can be discharged to the outside on the rear side. As shown in the figure, a plurality of through holes 918 are provided at positions slightly to the left of the center when viewed from the front, which are wide and elongated in the vertical direction and are arranged in rows at predetermined intervals in the horizontal direction. These through holes 918 keep the back cover 900 closed with respect to the main body frame 3 and accommodate and hold the game board 4 in the main body frame 3 on the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4. It is located behind the cooling fan for cooling the peripheral control unit 4140 and the liquid crystal control unit 4150 provided in the above, so that the heat from the peripheral control unit 4140 and the like can be satisfactorily exhausted. It has become. Incidentally, the width of the through hole 918 is set to be smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball, so that the game ball does not enter the pachinko machine 1 through the through hole 918.

[1-3H. Side security board]
Next, the side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67. As shown in the figure, the side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3 forms the left side surface of the main body frame 3 in the front view, and is attached to the main body frame base 600. The side security plate 950 includes a metal main body 952 that is extruded into a shallow U-shape in a plan view, and a mounting bracket 954 that is fixed vertically near the inner front end of the main body 952 and attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600. A positioning member 956 that is fixed inside the main body 952 and engages with the positioning recess 1119 of the game board 4 is provided.

The main body 952 of the side security plate 950 extends in the vertical direction at substantially the same length as the height of the main body frame base 600, and has a substantially constant depth in the front-rear direction, and a side plate piece 952a and a front view right from the front end of the side plate piece 952a. The front end piece 952b extending in the direction, the middle piece 952c which is arranged so as to form a predetermined amount of gap on the rear side of the front end piece 952b and has a smaller protrusion amount than the front end piece 952b, and the front end to the front of the side plate piece 952a. It is provided with a rear end piece 952d extending longer than the front end piece 952b in the right-viewing direction (see FIG. 106). The main body 952 is formed in a shallow U shape by a side plate piece 952a, a front end piece 952b, and a rear end piece 952d, and is formed between the middle piece 952c and the rear end piece 952d with a front component 1110 in the game board 4. The left side portion of the front view with the game panel 1150 is inserted (see FIG. 106).

In the side security plate 950 of this example, the mounting bracket 954 is attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600, and the rear end piece 952d of the main body 952 is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600. In this side security plate 950, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the front end piece 952b of the main body 952 is the shaft support side of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 in the reinforcement unit 150 of the door frame 5. It is designed to be inserted into the U-shape of the character-shaped projecting piece 166, and prevents a tool for cheating from being inserted between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the left side of the front view. (See FIG. 106). Further, the main body 952 of the side security plate 950 is made of an extruded metal (for example, aluminum alloy), and the front end piece 952b, the middle piece 952c, and the middle piece 952c arranged in the direction perpendicular to the surface of the side plate piece 952a, and the side plate piece 952a. Since the rear end piece 952d is provided, the strength and rigidity of the side security plate 950 are increased, and the strength of the main body frame 3 as a whole can be increased so that the game board 4 and the door frame 5 can be supported satisfactorily. It has become.

[1-3I. Locking device]
Subsequently, the lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 93 to 97. FIG. 93 (A) is a left side view of the lock device in the main body frame, and FIG. 93 (B) is a perspective view of the lock device in the main body frame as viewed from the front. Further, FIG. 94A is a rear perspective view of the locking device, and FIG. 94B is a sliding rod for a glass door and a sliding rod for a main body frame slidably provided inside the U-shaped substrate of the locking device. Is a rear perspective view showing, (C) is a front perspective view of (B). Further, FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the locking device disassembled and viewed later, and FIG. 96 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the sliding rod for the glass door and the sliding rod for the main body frame in the locking device. , FIG. 97 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the fraud prevention member in the locking device.

The lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 is attached from substantially the upper end to the lower end of the main body frame 3 along the outer side surface of the peripheral wall portion 605 of the main body frame base 600 on the open side, as shown in FIG. 68. In addition, a door hook hole 620 formed in the upper part of the front end frame portion 602 of the main body frame base 600 on the right side (open side) side of the front view, a lock locking hole 621 formed in the lower part, and a peripheral wall in the main body frame base 600. It is designed to be attached to a plurality of lock attachment portions 625 formed on the right side surface of the front view of the portion 605.

As shown in FIGS. 93 to 95, the locking device 1000 is for a U-shaped base 1001 as a lock base formed in a U-shaped cross section and a door frame slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001. The sliding rod 1040, the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001, and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are U-shaped so as not to be illegally slid. It includes fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 that are attached to the lower part of the substrate 1001.

The U-shaped base 1001 in the lock device 1000 is formed by bending a predetermined metal plate so as to have a U-shaped cross section, and inside the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame. And are slidably arranged. The U-shaped substrate 1001 is extremely thin as compared with the conventional locking device in which the width dimension is concentrated on the substrate formed into an L-shaped cross section. As a result, the left-right dimension of the lock device 1000 can be made as thin as possible, and the left-right dimension of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 can be relatively increased, so that the game area can be further increased. It is possible to provide a wide game board 4 of 1100.

The U-shaped base 1001 is attached with the open side having a U-shaped cross section facing the back surface of the main body frame base 600, and when the locking device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3, it is U-shaped. The open side of the base 1001 is closed to the main body frame base 600. As a result, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame arranged inside the U-shaped base 1001 are attached to the U-shaped base 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1050, and 1065, respectively. It is completely covered and has a fraud prevention structure that makes it difficult for fraudulent acts against the lock device 1000 from the outside.

Further, the U-shaped base 1001 in the locking device 1000 has a rectangular shape through which the hook portions 1054, 1065 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame can penetrate up and down on the closing side (front side) opposite to the opening side (rear side). The hook penetration opening 1002, the screw fixing portion 1003 projecting outward in the upper and middle of the side surface 1001b (see FIG. 95) in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the main body frame base 600 on the front side, and the screw fixing portion. The upper end and middle portion of the open side (front side) of the side surface 1001a (see FIG. 95) opposite to the side surface 1001b on which 1003 is projected, and the lower end portions of both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b on the open side project forward. It is provided with a locking projection 1004 and the like.

The screw fixing portion 1003 and the locking protrusion 1004 of the U-shaped base 1001 are for attaching the locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, and the locking protrusion 1004 is attached to the door hook hole 620 of the main body frame base 600. And when it is inserted into the lock locking hole 621 from the rear side and then moved upward, the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting portion 625 of the main body frame base 600 are aligned with each other, and the screw fixing portion 1003 is inserted. The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3) by screwing a screw (not shown) to the lock attachment portion 625 via the screw device 1000.

The lock device 1000 is attached by screws not only to the upper and middle screw fixing portions 1003, but also to the screw fixing portion 1003 formed on the lock attachment piece 1008, which will be described later, and near the upper side of the cylinder lock through hole 611. The lock attachment portion 625 is fastened to the main body frame base 600 with a screw (not shown), and the lower part of the lock device 1000 can also be attached.

Further, when the locking device 1000 is attached, the locking projections 1004 formed at the upper, middle, and lower parts of the U-shaped base 1001 on the open side (front side) are provided with the hook hole 620 for the door in the upper part and the lock locking hole. The lock device 1000 is mounted on the main body frame base 600 with an extremely simple structure because the structure is such that the screw fixing portion 1003 of the U-shaped base 1001 is fixed to the lock attachment portion 625 with a screw while being inserted into the 621 for positioning and locking. It can be firmly fixed to (main body frame 3).

In other words, even when the lock device 1000 is integrated on the U-shaped substrate 1001 having an extremely thin width dimension, the lock device 1000 is firmly attached to the main body frame 3 by locking and fixing the front side and the rear side of the lock device 1000. It can be fixed to. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking projection 1004 constituting the locking structure (which may be a fixed structure) on the front side is projected onto the side surface 1001a which does not come into contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped substrate 1001. Since the screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the fixing structure on the rear side projects from the side surface 1001b which is in close contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped substrate 1001 toward the peripheral wall portion 605, the locking structure on the front side is the peripheral wall portion 605. The lock device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so as not to cause rattling, as compared with the case where the side surface 1001b is formed in close contact with the main body frame 3.

Further, the U-shaped base 1001 is provided with insertion holes 1005 penetrating in the left-right direction at the upper, middle, and lower portions of both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b, and the U-shaped base 1001 is provided with a sliding rod 1040 for a door frame and By inserting the rivet 1006 into the insertion hole 1005 and caulking with the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame housed, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are inside the U-shaped base 1001. Can be slidably attached in the vertical direction.

That is, as shown in FIG. 94 (C), the rivet 1006 penetrates through the upper end of the rivet slot 1042 formed at the upper, middle, and lower parts of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and FIG. 94. As shown in (B), the rivet 1006 penetrates through the lower end of the rivet slot 1055, 1061 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame, respectively. The sliding rivet 1040 for the door frame can be moved upward, and the sliding rivet 1050 for the main body frame can be moved downward.

Further, the U-shaped base 1001 projects laterally from the front end of the fraud prevention notch 1007 formed on the closed side surface of the lower portion thereof and the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the main body frame base 600 on the open side. A lock mounting piece 1008 for mounting the cylinder lock 1010, an insertion vertical opening 1020, a spring locking piece 1021 and an escape horizontal hole 1022 are formed on the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605, respectively. The fraud prevention cutout portion 1007 of the U-shaped substrate 1001 will be described in detail later, but the stopper piece portion 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is adapted to advance and retreat. Further, the lock attachment piece 1008 of the U-shaped base 1001 is located on the side surface 1001b so as to be located below the lower end side of the game board holding port 601 in a state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the back surface of the main body frame base 600. A lock insertion hole 1009, which is projected from the front end toward the side and through which the cylinder lock 1010 penetrates, and a mounting hole 1013 formed in the lock mounting board 1011 of the cylinder lock 1010 are mounted at two locations above and below for mounting with screws 1012. A mounting hole 1014 drilled in the above and a screw fixing portion 1003 drilled to mount the lower portion of the locking device 1000 on the back surface of the main body frame 3 are formed.

Further, the U-shaped base 1001 has an insertion vertical opening 1020 in which the first engaging projecting piece 1017 and the second engaging projecting piece 1018 of the engaging cam 1016 fixed to the cylinder lock 1010 enter when the cylinder lock 1010 rotates. A spring locking piece 1021 for locking the spring 1035 for urging the second fraud prevention member 1032 upward, and an escape horizontal hole 1022 for forming an escape hole so as not to interfere with the movement of the connecting pin 1034. It has.

The cylinder lock 1010 in the lock device 1000 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 in the U-shaped substrate 1001. In this cylinder lock 1010, a lock mounting board 1011 for mounting on the lock mounting piece 1008 is fixed to the rear end of the cylindrical cylinder lock body, and a lock shaft 1015 of the cylinder lock body extends from the rear surface of the lock mounting board 1011. At the same time, the engagement cam 1016 is fixed to the rear end of the lock shaft 1015 by a screw 1019. The engaging cam 1016 is formed in a boomeran shape, and one end side is a first engaging projecting piece 1017 that engages with the descending engaging hole 1062 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame when rotating. It is a second engaging projecting piece 1018 that engages with the rising engaging hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 when the end side rotates.

In this cylinder lock 1010, the cylindrical cylinder lock main body portion is inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 formed in the lock attachment piece 1008 from the rear side, and then the attachment holes 1013 formed at two positions above and below the lock attachment substrate 1011. The cylinder lock 1010 can be fixed to the U-shaped base 1001 by screwing the screw 1012 into the mounting hole 1014 of the lock mounting piece 1008.

The fraud prevention member 1023, 1032 attached to the U-shaped base 1001 of the lock device 1000 illegally uses a piano wire, a wire, or the like to illegally use a sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame without rotating the cylinder lock 1010 with a formal key. This is to prevent the lowering of the. As shown in FIG. 95, the fraud prevention member 1023 and 1032 have a structure in which the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 are connected by a connecting pin 1034. The first fraud prevention member 1023 has a vertically long plate shape and is swingably supported by the U-shaped substrate 1001 around the swing shaft hole 1025 at the upper end. Specifically, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is the most together with the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 arranged inside the U-shaped base 1001 through the swing shaft hole 1025. It is attached by the lower insertion hole 1005 and the rivet 1006.

Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is vertically elongated at a position overlapping the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the U-shaped base 1001 on its plate-like surface, and the second engagement projecting piece 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 can be inserted. It is provided with a protruding piece insertion hole 1026. The door frame sliding rod 1040 provided inside the U-shaped base 1001 by the second engaging projecting piece 1018 of the engaging cam 1016 penetrating the projecting piece insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020. The ascending engaging hole 1045 and the second engaging projecting piece 1018 are engaged with each other. Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is obliquely inclined so as to be able to come into contact with the rear surface side of the first engaging projectile 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 is rotated on the outer side of the projecting piece insertion hole 1026 diagonally above the front surface. The inclined portion 1024 is provided, and the inclined portion 1024 comes into contact with the first engaging projecting piece 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 is rotated, so that the first fraud prevention member 1023 is centered on the swing shaft hole 1025. It swings (in the clockwise direction in FIG. 97 (B)).

Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 further includes a stopper piece portion 1027 protruding toward the U-shaped base 1001 side from the diagonally rearward and lower outer side of the projecting piece insertion hole 1026, and a position where the stopper piece portion 1027 protrudes. It is provided with a regulating projecting piece 1031 projecting downward, and a pin hole 1029 and a connecting hole 1030 penetrating in the left-right direction and arranged vertically on the front side of the regulating projecting piece 1031. The stopper piece portion 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is intruded into and engaged with the fraud prevention notch 1007 and the engagement notch 1066 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 when the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is locked. Therefore, the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame can be prevented from sliding illegally. Further, the regulation projecting piece 1031 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 comes into contact with the second fraud prevention member 1032 urged upward by the spring 1035, so that the second fraud prevention member 1032 moves upward (in the urging direction). It is possible to regulate the movement.

Further, in the pin hole 1029 of the first fraud prevention member 1023, the guide pin 1028 is inserted and fixed from the back surface side of the first fraud prevention member 1023, and the guide pin 1028 fixed to the pin hole 1029 is inserted and fixed. By engaging with the horizontally long opening formed at the lowermost end of the insertion vertical opening 1020 in the U-shaped base 1001, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is guided along the side surface 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001. Can be done. Further, the connecting hole 1030 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is for rotatably connecting the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 by the connecting pin 1034.

On the other hand, the second fraud prevention member 1032 connected to the first fraud prevention member 1023 is formed of an inverted "" -shaped plate material, and has a connecting hole 1033 at one upper end thereof and a spring locking hole 1036 at the other end. And are bored, respectively, and a contact portion 1037 is provided at the lower end portion. The second fraud prevention member 1032 can be rotatably connected to the first fraud prevention member 1023 by inserting the connecting pin 1034 after aligning the connecting hole 1033 with the connecting hole 1030 of the first fraud prevention member 1023. You can do it. Further, the second fraud prevention member 1032 locks the lower end (the other end) of the spring 1035 whose upper end (one end) is locked to the spring locking piece 1021 of the U-shaped base 1001 in the spring locking hole 1036. As a result, it is urged upward by the spring 1035. Further, in the second fraud prevention member 1032, the contact portion 1037 comes into contact with the closing plate 25 fixed to the inner lower portion of the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 3 is closed.

Next, the door frame sliding rod 1040 in the lock device 1000 is slidably supported inside the U-shaped substrate 1001 and is formed of a vertically long metal plate-shaped member. The door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided with door frame hook portions 1041 projecting forward at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides of the vertical side thereof. The door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 projects forward from the open side of the U-shaped base 1001 with the door frame sliding rod 1040 housed in the U-shaped base 1001. When the lock device 1000 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, the door protrudes forward from the door hook hole 620 (see FIGS. 63 and 68) formed in the main body frame base 600. It can be locked to a hook cover 165 (see FIG. 18) formed on the back surface of the frame 5. As shown in the figure, the door frame hook portion 1041 has a downward engaging claw shape, whereby the door frame sliding rod 1040 is raised to raise the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover. The locked state with the 165 can be released.

Further, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame is formed in the center of the upper, middle and lower side surfaces and has a vertically long rivet slot 1042 through which the rivet 1006 is inserted, and below the uppermost rivet slot 1042 and for the door frame. At the lowermost end of the sliding rivet 1040, a guide protrusion 1043 projecting in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the door frame sliding rivet 1040 is provided. The rivet slot 1042 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is designed so that the rivet 1006 to be inserted into the insertion hole 1005 of the U-shaped base 1001 is inserted, and the rivet 1006 is slid for the door frame. It is formed vertically so as not to interfere with the ascending operation of the rivet 1040. In the normal state, the rivet 1006 penetrating the upper end of the rivet slot 1042 is in contact with the upper end. Further, in the door frame sliding rod 1040, the guide protrusion 1043 is inserted into the projecting piece moving holes 1056, 1064 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050. It is possible to guide the mutual sliding operation of the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame.

Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is formed with a spring hook portion 1046 that locks one end of the spring 1048 at the upper end portion. The other end of the spring 1048 locked to the spring hook portion 1046 is locked to the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 in the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame, and the spring 1048 slides the door frame. The rod 1040 is urged downward and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is urged to each other in the upward direction. Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 includes a contact elastic piece 1047 formed in a convex shape in the middle in the vertical direction, and is punched out from one side surface of the door frame sliding rod 1040 by press molding. It is formed in a convex shape. The contact elastic piece 1047 comes into contact with the inner side surface of the U-shaped base 1001, and it is possible to prevent the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame from rattling inside the U-shaped base 1001. It has become like.

Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided with a vertically long play hole 1044 and a rising engagement hole 1045 on the side surface of the lower portion. The play hole 1044 is the tip of the first engaging projecting piece 1017 so as not to interfere with the rotating operation of the engaging cam 1016 when the first engaging projecting piece 1017 of the engaging cam 1016 is inserted and rotated. The part constitutes a movable space. Further, in the ascending engagement hole 1045, when the second engaging projecting piece 1018 of the engaging cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame is raised by the rotating operation of the engaging cam 1016. Is for engaging with. The door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided with an escape notch 1049 which is notched in the vertical direction larger than the fraud prevention notch 1007 at the rear of the lower part of the vertical side. In this escape cutout portion 1049, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is in the way so that the stopper piece portion 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is surely engaged with the fraud prevention cutout portion 1007 and the engagement cutout portion 1066. The relevant part is cut out so that it does not become.

On the other hand, the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame includes an upper hook member 1051 made of a metal plate, a lower hook member 1052 made of a metal plate, and a connecting wire rod 1053 connecting the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052. It has. That is, the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is not composed of one vertically elongated plate made of metal as in the conventional case, but the upper hook member 1051 having the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the lower hook member 1052 are made of metal. The plate material is formed by a press, and the metal upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 are connected by a thin metal connecting wire rod 1053. As a result, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 can be efficiently stored in the narrow space of the U-shaped substrate 1001.

The upper hook member 1051 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame includes a hook portion 1054 formed at the upper end portion toward the rear and a rivet elongated hole 1055 penetrating the plate surface portion adjacent to the hook portion 1054 in the left-right direction. , A projecting piece moving hole 1056 penetrating below the rivet slot 1055 in the left-right direction, a spring hook portion 1057 formed at the lower end of the vertical side in front of the projecting piece moving hole 1056, and a lower side of the spring hook portion 1057. It is provided with a connecting hole 1058 formed in the above hook member 1051 and a contact portion 1059 formed on the upper side and the lower side of the upper hook member 1051. The hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 penetrates the hook penetration opening 1002 above the U-shaped base 1001 and engages with the closing plate 24 provided on the inner upper portion of the outer frame 2 on the open side. The locking claws are formed upward.

Further, the rivet slot 1055 of the upper hook member 1051 is arranged at a position corresponding to the rivet slot 1042 formed in the upper part of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and is arranged in the rivet slot 1055. In the normal state in which the rivet 1006 penetrates, the rivet 1006 penetrates the lowermost end portion of the elongated hole 1055 for rivets, and the upper hook member 1051 can move downward. A guide protrusion 1043 above the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame is inserted into the projecting piece moving hole 1056 of the upper hook member 1051, and the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are inserted. It is possible to guide the mutual movement with.

Further, the other end of the spring 1048 is locked to the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051. Further, the connecting hole 1058 of the upper hook member 1051 is inserted by bending the upper end of the connecting wire rod 1053. Further, the contact portion 1059 of the upper hook member 1051 comes into contact with the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 when it is housed in the U-shaped base 1001, and in the sliding operation of the upper hook member 1051. There is no rattling and it can slide smoothly.

On the other hand, the lower hook member 1052 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is for a rivet that penetrates in the left-right direction near the upper end of the plate surface portion of the lower hook member 1052 and the hook portion 1065 that protrudes rearward from the lower end portion. An elongated hole 1061, a descending engaging hole 1062 arranged below the elongated rivet hole 1061, a play hole 1063 extending downward from the lower rear side of the descending engaging hole 1062, and a play hole 1063 below the play hole 1063. A projecting piece moving hole 1064 formed near the lower end, a connecting hole 1060 formed in the front end side of the upper end of the vertical side of the lower hook member 1052, and a engagement formed in the lower part of the vertical side behind the lower hook member 1052. The joint notch portion 1066 and the contact portion 1067 formed on the upper side and the lower side of the lower hook member 1052 are provided.

The hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 penetrates the lower hook penetration opening 1002 of the U-shaped substrate 1001 and engages with the closing plate 25 formed in the lower part of the outer frame 2 on the open side. The locking claws are formed upward. Further, the rivet slot 1061 of the lower hook member 1052 is formed at a position corresponding to the rivet slot 1042 formed in the lower part of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and the rivet slot 1061 is formed in the rivet slot 1061. In the normal state in which the 1006 is penetrated, the rivet 1006 is in a state of penetrating the lowermost end portion of the rivet slot 1061. As a result, the lower hook member 1052 can move downward.

Further, when the first engaging projecting piece 1017 of the engaging cam 1016 is inserted and rotated in the lower hook member 1052, the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is lowered by the rotating operation. It is for engaging in such a manner. Further, the play hole 1063 of the lower hook member 1052 is a second engaging projecting piece 1018 so as not to interfere with the rotating operation when the second engaging projecting piece 1018 of the engaging cam 1016 is inserted and rotated. The tip of the can form a movable space. Further, a guide protrusion 1043 below the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame is inserted into the projecting piece moving hole 1064 of the lower hook member 1052, and the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod for the main body frame are slid. It is possible to guide the mutual movement with the door 1050.

Further, a bent lower end of the connecting wire rod 1053 is inserted into the connecting hole 1060 of the lower hook member 1052. Further, the contact portion 1067 of the lower hook member 1052 comes into contact with the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 when it is housed in the U-shaped base 1001, and is lower than the U-shaped base 1001. When the hook member 1052 slides, it can be slid smoothly without rattling.

Next, the assembly of the lock device 1000 of the present embodiment will be described. In order to assemble this locking device 1000, the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are connected by the connecting wire rod 1053, and in that state, the guide protrusion of the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame is connected. The 1043 is inserted into the projecting piece moving holes 1056, 1064 of the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and the mutual rivet elongated holes 1042 and the rivet elongated holes 1055, 1061 are aligned and overlapped, and the overlap is performed. In this state, the hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 and the hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 are passed through the hook penetration opening 1002 of the U-shaped base 1001 while sliding the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod for the main body frame. After inserting the 杆 1050 into the U-shaped space of the U-shaped base 1001, the rivet 1006 is inserted through the insertion hole 1005.

When inserting the rivet 1006, the rivet 1006 is inserted so as to penetrate the rivet slot 1055, 1061 and 1042. When inserting the lowermost rivet 1006, it is necessary to insert the rivet 1006 into the swing shaft hole 1025 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and simultaneously attach the first fraud prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001. Further, before attaching the first fraud prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 are connected by the connecting pin 1034, and the guide pin 1028 is inserted into the pin hole. After fixing to 1029 with a screw (not shown), it is necessary to further insert the guide pin 1028 into the lowermost opening of the insertion vertical opening 1020.

Further, with the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame stored and fixed in the U-shaped base 1001 by the rivet 1006, the spring 1048 is hung between the spring hook portions 1046 and 1057, and the door is opened. The frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are urged in opposite directions, and the spring 1035 is hung on the spring locking piece 1021 and the spring locking hole 1036 to prevent the second fraud. It is assumed that the member 1032 is in contact with the regulation projecting piece 1031. After that, the cylindrical main body portion of the cylinder lock 1010 is inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 of the lock mounting piece 1008, and the cylinder lock 1010 is fixed to the mounting hole 1014 with a screw 1012. At this time, the tip of the first engaging protrusion 1017 of the engaging cam 1016 is slightly inserted outside the inclined portion 1024 and into the insertion vertical opening 1020, and the second engaging protrusion of the engaging cam 1016 is inserted. The cylinder lock 1010 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 so that the tip of the piece 1018 is slightly inserted into the projecting piece insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the first fraud prevention member 1023.

In order to attach the assembled lock device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600 in this way, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the door hook hole 620 formed in the main body frame base 600. While inserting, the locking protrusion 1004 protruding into a hook shape is inserted into the door hook hole 620 and the lock locking hole 621 of the main body frame base 600 and moved upward, and in that state, the screw fixing portion 1003 protruding in the horizontal direction is inserted. The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600 by matching the lock attachment portion 625 and screwing a screw (not shown) into the matched hole. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking projection 1004 constituting the locking structure of the front portion is formed so as to project from the side surface 1001a which does not contact the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped substrate 1001, while the rear portion is fixed. Since the screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the structure is formed so as to project horizontally from the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped substrate 1001, the locking structure of the front portion is in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605. Compared with the case where the side surface 1001b is formed, the locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame base 600 so as not to cause rattling.

Next, the operation of the lock device 1000 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 96 and 97. As shown in FIG. 96, when the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3) is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 96 (A). The closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are engaged with each other, and the hook portions 1041 for the door frame and the door frame 5 of the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame are engaged. The hook cover 165 is locked. In this state, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the first engaging projection piece 1017 of the engaging cam 1016 rotates in the direction of entering the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. 96 (B). The tip of the first engaging projection piece 1017 engages with the descending engaging hole 1062 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame, pushes the lower hook member 1052 downward against the urging force of the spring 1048, and connects to the lower hook member 1052. The connecting wire rod 1053 and the upper hook member 1051 are also pushed down and lowered. As a result, the locked state between the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is released, and the main body frame 3 is removed by pulling the main body frame 3 toward the front side. It can be opened to the frame 2.

When the main body frame 3 is closed, the hook portions 1054 and 1065 are in a raised state due to the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same raised position as shown in FIG. 96 (A)), but the hook portion 1054 Since the upper side of 1065 is inclined downward toward the outside, by forcibly pressing the main body frame 3 against the outer frame 2, the upper side inclined portion of the hook portions 1050 and 1065 is formed on the closing plates 24 and 25. Since it comes into contact with the lower end, the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame descends downward, and the upward claws of the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 are locked again and slide for the main body frame. The 杆 1050 rises and returns to the locked state.

On the other hand, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the second engaging projecting piece 1018 of the engaging cam 1016 rotates in the direction of entering the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. (Ii) The tip of the engaging projecting piece 1018 engages with the ascending engaging hole 1045 of the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame, and pushes up and ascending the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame against the urging force of the spring 1048. Therefore, the hook cover 165 of the door frame 5 and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 are released from the locked state, so that the door frame 5 can be pulled by pulling the door frame 5 toward the front side. It can be opened to the main body frame 3.

When the door frame 5 is closed, the door frame hook portion 1041 is in a lowered state due to the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same lowered position as shown in FIG. 96A), but the door frame. Since the lower side of the hook portion 1041 for door frame is inclined upward toward the outside, by forcibly pressing the door frame 5 against the main body frame 3, the lower side inclined portion of the hook portion 1041 for the door frame is inclined to the hook cover 165. The sliding rod 1040 for the door frame rises upward in contact with the upper end portion of the door frame, and the downward claw portion of the hook portion 1041 for the door frame and the hook cover 165 are locked again to slide the door frame. The door 1040 descends and returns to the locked state. The door frame sliding rod 1040 in the present embodiment is formed to have substantially the same length as the total length of the U-shaped base 1001, and the U-shaped base 1001 is substantially the same as the vertical side surface of the main body frame 3. The door frame hook portion 1041 which is attached over the entire length and is a locking portion with the door frame 5 is formed at three positions of the upper end portion, the central portion, and the lower end portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. Therefore, it is possible to securely lock the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 in the entire length in the vertical direction, and forcibly open the space between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 and insert an illegal tool such as a piano wire between them. It is not possible to perform an act.

As described above, the lock device 1000 of the door frame 5 of the present embodiment unlocks the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 by rotating the key inserted in the cylinder lock 1010 in one direction, and moves in the other direction. By rotating, the lock of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 can be released. Further, the lock device 1000 of this example performs a fraudulent act such as hooking a piano wire or the like on the hook portions 1054, 1065 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame and lowering the hook portion 1054, 1065 without inserting the key into the cylinder lock 1010. Can not be done. The first structure for preventing such fraud is a lock mechanism composed of a first fraud prevention member 1023 and a second fraud prevention member 1032, and the second fraud prevention structure is a U-shaped substrate 1001. The structure is such that the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are housed in the closed space.

First, the operation of the lock mechanism, which is the first fraud prevention structure, will be described with reference to FIG. 97. First, when the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are closed, as shown in FIG. 97A, the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 come into contact with each other. It is in a state of being. In this state, the first fraud prevention member 1023 rotates counterclockwise due to the urging force of the spring 1035, the stopper piece 1027 enters the fraud prevention notch 1007, and the stopper piece 1027 is the fraud prevention notch. It is in a state of being engaged with the engaging notch 1066 formed in the lower hook member 1052 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame at the position corresponding to 1007. As a result, even if a piano wire or the like is hooked on the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame and an attempt is made to pull it down, the stopper piece portion 1027 and the engaging notch portion 1066 are engaged with each other. It is impossible to illegally pull it down (unlock), and it is not possible to perform an illegal act of opening the main body frame 3.

On the other hand, when the key is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 to normally unlock the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 97 (B), the first engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 1016 is performed by rotating the key. The piece 1017 is rotated so as to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 rotates, the inclined portion 1024 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the side surface of the first engagement protrusion 1017 come into contact with each other, so that the first fraud prevention member 1023 has a swing shaft hole. The rotation starts in the clockwise rotation direction shown around 1025, and the stopper piece portion 1027 also moves so as to retract from the fraud prevention notch portion 1007. As a result, the engagement between the stopper piece portion 1027 and the engagement notch portion 1066 is released. At this time, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in a position where the spring 1035 is extended and the contact portion 1037 is retracted. In this state, when the engaging cam 1016 is further rotated to rotate the first engaging projecting piece 1017, the tip of the first engaging projecting piece 1017 engages with the descending engaging hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052. Since the entire sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is lowered, the locked state between the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 is released, and the main body frame 3 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. You can do it.

When the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in contact with the regulation projecting piece 1031, so that the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1023 are in contact with each other. The positional relationship with 1032 is substantially the same as the state shown in FIG. 97 (A). When the main body frame 3 is closed in this state, the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 come into contact with each other from the front, and finally the state shown in FIG. 97 (A) is obtained. As a result, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 do not get in the way when the main body frame 3 is closed. Further, in the present embodiment, it is the main body that prevents the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 from illegally performing only the lowering operation of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame. If the frame sliding rod 1050 is opened illegally, the door frame sliding rod 1040 can be easily opened manually after the release, and it is practically difficult to perform fraudulent acts of raising the sliding rod with a piano wire or the like. For this reason, it is devised to prevent unauthorized operation of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame.

Further, even with the lock mechanism having the first fraud prevention structure described above, it is impossible to disable the function of the lock mechanism by swinging the first fraud prevention member 1023 with a piano wire or the like. Absent. Therefore, assuming that the lock function of the lock mechanism is disabled by an illegal act, in the present embodiment, when the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600), it is inside. The sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame provided in the above are completely covered by being housed in the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1050, and 1065, respectively. Since it is in a state, even if a piano wire or the like is inserted to pull down the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame provided inside the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001, both side surfaces 1001a, 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 This prevents fraudulent equipment from entering the closed space, making it impossible to easily commit fraudulent activities.

As described above, the lock device 1000 of the present embodiment has the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame inside the U-shaped base 1001 whose width dimension is extremely thin as compared with the lock device in which the width dimension is concentrated on the conventional L-shaped base. The sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is slidably provided, and the mounting position of the cylinder lock 1010 for operating the lock device 1000 on the U-shaped base 1001 is set to a position lower than the lower end side of the game board 4. Therefore, even if the size of the game board 4 in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction is made extremely large and the space surrounded by the side surfaces 1001a-1001b of the main body frame 3 is made large, the lock device 1000 is firmly attached to the back side of the main body frame 3. Can be attached to.

Further, since the U-shaped open side of the U-shaped base 1001 is attached so as to face the back surface of the main body frame 3, when the locking device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600), it is inside. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 arranged in the above are completely covered with the U-shaped base 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1050, and 1065, respectively. , A piano wire or the like is inserted to pull down the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame provided inside, and other fraudulent acts cannot be easily performed.

Further, when the lock device 1000 is attached, the locking projections 1004 formed at the upper, middle and lower parts of the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are inserted into the door hook hole 620 and the lock locking hole 621. It is extremely simple because it has a structure in which the screw fixing portions 1003 formed at the upper, middle and lower parts of the closed side (rear portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are fixed to the lock attachment portion 625 with screws. The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600) with such a structure.

In the lock device 1000 of this example, the screw fixing portion 1003 formed on the lock mounting piece 1008 and the vicinity of the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 611 of the main body frame 3 as a structure for screwing the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001. The structure is shown in which the formed lock mounting portion 625 is screwed together. Instead, the screw 1012 for mounting the cylinder lock 1010 to the lock mounting piece 1008 is used, and the tip of the screw 1012 is locked. A lock mounting hole that penetrates the piece 1008 and is screwed may be formed above and below the cylinder lock through hole 611. Further, even if the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001 is not screwed, the lock device 1000 can be attached to the main body frame 3 (main body frame) simply by fixing the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock attachment portion 625 at the rear portion of the lock device 1000. It can be sufficiently firmly fixed to the back surface of the base 600).

Further, in the lock device 1000 of this example, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are completely covered with the U-shaped base 1001 having the left and right side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. For example, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are slidably attached to the side surface 1001a on the opposite side not in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 with a rivet or the like, and the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 is omitted. An L-shaped substrate (lock substrate) is used, and the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are stored in the closed space formed by the side surface 1001a and the side surface 1001b of the L-shaped substrate (lock substrate). The structure may be the same as that of the lock device 1000 described above.

[1-4. Basic configuration of the game board]
Next, the basic configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 98 to 105. FIG. 98 is a front view showing a game board attached to the main body frame with the door frame of the pachinko machine removed. Further, FIG. 99 is a front view of the game board, FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled and viewed from the rear. It is a figure. Further, FIG. 102 is an enlarged front view showing a function display unit in the game board in a state of being attached to the pachinko machine. Further, FIG. 103 is an exploded perspective view of a game board using a game panel of an embodiment different from the example of FIG. 100 and the like by disassembling and viewed from the front, and FIG. 104 is a game in which FIG. 103 is viewed from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view of a board. Further, FIG. 105 is a cross-sectional view of the game panel of the game board of FIG. 103 cut in the vertical direction.

As shown in the figure, the game board 4 of the present embodiment has a front configuration in which the outer periphery of the game area 1100 into which the game ball is driven is divided by the player operating the handle device 500, and the outer shape is substantially rectangular in the front surface. A member 1110, a plate-shaped game panel 1150 arranged behind the front component 1110 and partitioning the rear end of the game area 1100, a board holder 1160 arranged at the lower rear side of the game panel 1150, and a board holder 1160. A predetermined main control board box 1170 that houses the main control board 4100 that is attached to the rear surface and controls the game content performed by driving the game ball into the game area 1100, and a predetermined control signal from the main control board 4100. It is provided with a function display unit 1180 that can display the game status and is visibly attached to the player side at a predetermined position of the front component 1110. The game board 4 includes a front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150 and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150, although not shown in FIGS. 98 to 105 will be omitted and details will be described later. Further provided (see FIGS. 108 and 109).

The game board 4 of the present embodiment has a basic configuration formed by a front component 1110, a game panel 1150, a board holder 1160, a main control board box 1170, and a function display unit 1180, and is attached to the game panel 1150. The front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, and the main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 1170 form a detailed configuration that characterizes the pachinko machine 1 (game board 4). Here, the basic configuration of the game board 4 will be described, and the detailed configuration will be described later.

[1-4A. Front component]
Subsequently, the front component 1110 in the game board 4 will be described. The front component 1110 in the game board 4 of this example has a substantially rectangular shape that can be inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, and the inner shape penetrates in the front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. The outer circumference of the game area 1100 is divided by the inner circumference of the inner shape. The front component 1111 includes an outer rail 1111 extending in an arc shape from the lower end to the left from the center in the left-right direction in a front view, passing through the upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and extending diagonally to the upper right. The inner rail 1112, which is arranged inside the outer rail 1111 along the outer rail 1111 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction of the front view to the diagonally upper left side of the front view, and the inner rail 1112 so as to be smoothly continuous from the lower end of the inner rail 1112. The inner peripheral rail 1113 extending in an arc shape to a position below the end (upper end) of the outer rail 1111 along the circumferential direction counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the end (upper end) and outer rail 1111 of the inner peripheral rail 1113. At the boundary between the abutting portion 1114 where the game ball that has rolled along the outer rail 1111 and the end (upper end) of the inner rail 1111 can come into contact with the game ball, and the inner rail 1113 and the inner peripheral rail 1113, the game area 1100 From the upper end of the inner rail 1112 so as to close between the out port guide surface 1115 arranged at the lowermost end and lowered toward the rear and the outer rail 1111 which is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1112. It is possible to rotate only between the closed position extending upward and the open position where it rotates clockwise in the front view and opens between the outer rail 1111 and returns to the closed position side. A backflow prevention member 1116, which is urged by a spring (not shown), is provided.

Assuming that the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3 of the front component 1110, as shown in FIG. 98 and the like, the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 fires the ball of the main body frame 3. It is located on the extension of the launch rail 660 in the device 650. A space extending in the left-right direction and downward is formed between the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and the upper end of the launch rail 660, and the game ball launched along the launch rail 660 of the ball launcher 650 is formed. The space is jumped over, and the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 is driven into the space between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. The game ball driven between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 rolls upward along the outer rail 1111 according to the momentum, and the backflow prevention member 1116 pivotally supported at the upper end of the inner rail 1112. By rotating to the open position side against the urging force, it is possible to enter the game area 1100.

Further, when the game ball is strongly hit by the hit ball launching device 650, the game ball that has rolled along the outer rail 1111 in the game area 1100 comes into contact with the abutment portion 1114 provided at the end of the outer rail 1111. When the game ball comes into contact with the abutting portion 1114, the rolling direction of the game ball can be forcibly changed, and the game ball continuously rolls from the outer rail 1111 to the inner rail 1113. It is designed to prevent it from moving. Even if the game ball that has entered (dried) into the game area 1100 tries to return between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, the backflow prevention member 1116 returns to the closed position by the urging force before that. As a result, the backflow prevention member 1116 prevents the backflow of the game ball.

Further, if the game ball driven into the game area 1100 is not accepted by the start ports 2101, 1022 and the winning ports 2103, 2104, 2201 of the table unit 2000, which will be described later, it flows down to the lower end of the game area 1100. Then, the out port guiding surface 1115 at the boundary between the inner rail 1112 and the inner peripheral rail 1113 guides the game panel 1150 to the out port 1151 and discharges the game board 4 downward from the out port 1151. ing.

On the other hand, if the game ball launched from the ball striking device 650 cannot enter the game area 1100 beyond the backflow prevention member 1116 at the tip of the inner rail 1112, the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 are combined. Rolling downward in the opposite direction, the foul space 626 formed between the upper end of the launch rail 660 and the lower end of the outer rail 1111 is formed from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. When it falls, it is received by the foul ball entrance 542e of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 located at the lower part of the foul space 626, and is discharged to the lower plate 302 in the plate unit 300.

A metal plate is attached to the surface of the outer rail 1111 of the front component 1110 to improve the wear resistance due to the rolling of the game ball, and the game ball rolls smoothly. ing. Further, the abutting portion 1114 has an elastic body such as rubber or synthetic resin arranged on the surface thereof, and even if the game ball rolls vigorously along the outer rail 1111 and collides with the abutment portion 1114, the impact is alleviated. At the same time, the game ball can be repelled inward.

Further, the front component 1110 has a wall-shaped security protrusion 1117 protruding from the lower outer side of the outer rail 1111 toward the front, and a substantially center in the vertical direction from the lower side of the out port guide surface 1115 along the inner peripheral rail 1113. It is provided with a groove-shaped rail security groove 1118 that is recessed by a predetermined amount from the front end of the extension. The security protrusion 1117 in the front component 1110 overlaps the security rear end projecting piece 183 of the security cover 180 in the door frame 5 in the vertical direction when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. As a result, even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is intruded between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the shaft support side (left side when viewed from the front), the illegal tool can reach the game area 1100. Can not be done.

Further, in the front component 1110 of this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the security rear projection piece 182 of the security cover 180 in the door frame 5 is inserted into the rail security groove 1118. The rear projection piece 182 is inserted between the inner rail 1112 and the outer rail 1111 so as to be substantially in contact with the outer surface (opposite side of the game area 1100) of the inner rail 1112. Even with the inner rail 1112, the rail security groove 1118, and the security rear projection piece 182, an illegal tool such as a piano wire that has entered between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 reaches the game area 1100. Can be prevented.

Further, the front component 1110 is vertically separated from the left end of the front view and is vertically separated from the pair of positioning recesses 1119 which are recessed from the front to the rear and opened to the left end. A pair of game board stoppers 1120 arranged in a row, and a fixed recess 1121 arranged on the left side of the outer rail 1111 on the left side of the front view and opened downward, and the upper side formed in an arc shape and recessed from the front side, and the front view. A notch 1122 for a ball passage, which is notched in a rectangular shape extending upward from the lower end in the left-right direction, is provided near the left end of the lower end. The positioning recess 1119 of the front component 1110 is fitted with the positioning member 956 attached to the inside of the side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3, so that the left end of the game board 4 inserted into the game board holding port 601 is viewed from the front. However, it is possible to regulate the movement in the front-back direction. Further, the game board stopper 1120 can be detachably locked to the game board locking portion 608 of the main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3, and the game board stopper 1120 can be locked to the game board. By locking the locking portion 608, it is possible to restrict the right end of the game board 4 inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3 from moving in the front-rear direction. ..

Further, in the fixing recess 1121 of the front component 1110, with the game board 4 inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, the game board fixing tool 690 axially supported on the front surface of the main body frame 3 is viewed from the front. When rotated in the clockwise direction, the fixing piece 690a of the game board fixture 690 is inserted, and the game board fixture 690 restricts the lower end of the game board 4 from moving forward. It has become like. Further, in the ball passage notch 1122 of the front component member 1110, a similar ball passage notch 1152 is formed at the same position of the game panel 1150, and the game board 4 is used as the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3. In the state of being inserted into, the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 is inserted into the notch portion 1122, 1152 for the ball passage.

Further, the front component 1110 has a horizontally long through hole 1123 penetrating in the front-rear direction near the right end in the front view at the lower end portion, and a thickness in the front-rear direction at a position on the lower side of the through hole 1123 from the center in the left-right direction to the left side in the front view. It is provided with a fastening portion 1124 formed thinly and a certificate stamp attaching portion 1125 arranged on the left side of the through hole 1123 in the front view and for attaching a certificate stamp for confirming certification. Although detailed illustration of the fastening portion 1124 in the front component 1110 is omitted, when the game board is attached to the conventional main body frame, a predetermined fastening band is formed in the fastening hole formed in the conventional main body frame. By wrapping them around each other and fastening them together, it is possible to make it difficult to remove the game board 4, and it is possible to prevent unauthorized removal of the game board 4.

Further, in the front component 1110, the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180, which will be described later, is arranged on the outside of the rail security groove 1118 along the inner peripheral rail 1113 and at the lower right of the front view. Further, the front component 1110 includes a plurality of mounting bosses 1126 projecting rearward from the left and right ends of the lower portion of the rear surface, and a plurality of positioning projections 1127 projecting rearward from the rear surface of the inner rail 1112. The mounting boss 1126 penetrates the game panel 1150 and engages with the fixed boss 1162 of the board holder 1160, and a predetermined screw is screwed into the mounting boss 1126 from the rear side of the board holder 1160 through the fixed boss 1162. By wearing it, the game panel 1150 can be sandwiched between the front component 1110 and the board holder 1160. Further, the positioning protrusion 1127 is fitted into the inner rail fixing hole 1155 formed in the game panel 1150 so that the inner rail 1112 can be fixed at a predetermined position of the game panel 1150.

[1-4B. Game panel]
Subsequently, the game panel 1150 in the game board 4 will be described. The game panel 1150 of this example is formed of a wood board material such as veneer plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm), and has an outer shape substantially the same as the outer shape of the front component 1110. The game panel 1150 has an out port 1151 that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out-port guidance surface 1115 in the front component 1110 at the lower part in the substantially center in the left-right direction in the front view, and is horizontally elongated in the front-rear direction on the left side in the front view at the lower end. The notch 1152 for the ball passage having the same shape as the notch 1122 for the ball passage of the front component 1110 and the rear protruding portion of the function display unit 1180 which penetrates in the front-rear direction through the lower right corner of the front view. It includes an insertion hole 1153 into which 1182 is inserted.

Further, in the game panel 1150, a plurality of boss insertion holes 1154 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the mounting bosses 1126 of the front component member 1110 and positioning protrusions 1127 of the front component member 1110 are inserted and fixed in the vicinity of the lower left and right ends. A plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1155 and a groove-shaped out ball discharge groove 1156 having a predetermined amount recessed from the rear surface to the front on the rear surface side of the out port 1151 and the lower end side being opened downward (see FIG. 101). And 1157, which is formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 of the front component member 1110 and is notched so as to penetrate from the right end of the front view in the front-rear direction. Further, the game panel 1150 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes for mounting and fixing to the rear surface of the front component 1110 at appropriate positions.

The game panel 1150 in the game board 4 of this example can partition the rear end of the game area 1100 whose outer periphery is divided by the front component 1110. Although not shown, the game panel 1150 and the game area 1100 on the front surface can be divided. Within the corresponding range, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and the front unit 2000 is attached. Further, a back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150. Further, the game panel 1150 is formed so that the out port 1151 is located at the lowermost end of the game area 1100, and when assembled on the game board 4, it is formed at the lowermost end of the game area 1100 in the front component 1110. The game ball guided backward by the out-port guide surface 1115 enters the out-port 1151 and is discharged to the rear side of the game board 4.

[1-4C. Board holder]
Next, the board holder 1160 in the game board 4 will be described. The substrate holder 1160 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the upper side and the front side open. The substrate holder 1160 has an out-ball discharge portion 1161 formed so as to penetrate in the vertical direction at the front end of the bottom wall portion at substantially the center in the left-right direction of the front view, and the upper surface of the bottom wall portion is an out-ball. The game balls are formed so as to be lowered toward the discharge portion 1161, and the game balls discharged from the out port 1151 of the game panel 1150, the front unit and the back unit, and supplied (discharged) to the upper surface of the bottom of the board holder 1160. It is designed to be discharged downward from the out ball discharge unit 1161. The out-ball ejection unit 1161 is located directly above the ejection ball receiving portion 841 of the board unit 800 in the main body frame 3 when the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3. All the game balls discharged from the pachinko machine 1 are discharged downward to the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 through the discharge passage 842 of the board unit 800.

Further, the substrate holder 1160 includes a plurality of fixed bosses 1162 protruding forward from the front ends at both the upper and lower ends of the side wall portion. The tips of the plurality of fixed bosses 1162 are inserted into the boss insertion holes 1154 from the rear side of the game panel 11520, and then are fitted to the rear ends of the mounting bosses 1126 of the front component 1110. In the state of being fitted with the boss 1126, the board holder 1160 is screwed to the mounting boss 1126 from the rear side of the board holder 1160 through the inside of the fixed boss 1162 to attach the board holder 1160 to the front component 1110. In addition to being able to be assembled, the game panel 1150 can be sandwiched between the front component 1110 and the board holder 1160.

Further, as shown in FIG. 101, the substrate holder 1160 has a fixing portion 1163 and a fixing portion into which the fixing piece 1174 of the main control board box 1170 can be fitted from the side to the left end portion of the rear surface of the rear wall portion when viewed from the rear. The elastic fixing piece 1175 of the main control board box 1170, which is arranged so as to face the 1163, is provided with a locking portion 1164 which can be locked from the rear. The fixing portion 1163 and the locking portion 1164 of the board holder 1160 allow the main control board box 1170 to be detachably supported on the rear surface of the board holder 1160.

[1-4D. Main control board box]
Subsequently, the main control board box 1170 in the game board 4 will be described. The main control board box 1170 has a thin horizontally long box-shaped board base 1171 with an open rear side and a thin horizontally long box-shaped board base 1171 that covers the rear surface of the board base 1171 and has an open front side, and is fitted into the inside of the board base 1171 from the rear side. A matching board cover 1172 and a main control board 4100 in which electronic components, terminals, and the like are mounted on the rear side of the front end of the board cover 1172 are provided. Further, the main control board box 1170 extends outward from the left end portion of the substrate base 1171 when viewed from the rear, and from the fixing piece 1174 which fits with the fixing portion 1163 of the substrate holder 1160 and the right end of the rear view of the substrate cover 1172. It includes an elastic fixing piece that protrudes rearward and is elastically locked to the locking portion 1164 of the substrate holder 1160.

Further, as shown in FIG. 101, the main control board box 1170 is arranged at the right end of the rear view, two at the top and two at the bottom with the elastic fixing piece 1175 sandwiched between them, and seals the opening and closing of the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172. A possible sealing portion 1176, a sealing seal (not shown) that is affixed across the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172 at the lower ends of the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172, and a transparent seal that covers the surface of the sealing seal. It includes a protective cover 1177 and a board management seal 1178 attached to the rear surface of the board cover 1172. The sealing portion 1176 of the main control board box 1170 has the same configuration as the separation and cutting portion 863 of the payout control board box 860 in the board unit 800, and is fixed by caulking in any one of the four sealing portions 1176. Has been done. In this main control board box 1170, in order to separate the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172, it is necessary to cut the sealing portion 1176 fixed by caulking so that a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1170 remains. It has become. As a result, it is possible to clearly visually determine from the outside whether or not the main control board box 1170 has been opened illegally.

Since four sealing portions 1176 of the main control board box 1170 are provided in this example, the main control board box 1170 can be opened and closed up to three times. Further, the main control board box 1170 of this example has a sealing seal affixed across the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172, and the sealing seal is cut when the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172 are separated. It needs to be peeled off, and even with this sealed seal, traces of opening and closing remain. Therefore, the main control board box 1170 is illegally opened and closed, and the internal main control board 4100 is illegally modified or replaced with an illegal main control board (or a ROM that stores a game content program or the like). However, it can be visually confirmed from the outside, and it is possible to prevent such fraudulent acts from being carried out.

Further, in the main control board box 1170, an opening penetrating the board cover 1172 in the front-rear direction is formed at an appropriate position, and the RAM clear switch 4100c, the collation terminal 4100i, and the periphery attached to the main control board 4100 through the opening. Various connection terminals and the like for connecting to the control board 4010, the payout control board 4110, and the like face to the rear side. By connecting a predetermined measuring device to the collation terminal 4100i facing from the rear surface of the main control board box 1170, the main control board 4100 can be checked from the outside without opening the main control board box 1170. Even if the sealing part 1176 and the sealing seal are cleverly crafted, it is possible to confirm the presence or absence of unauthorized modification to the main control board 4100 other than visually, and the pachinko machine 1 has high security performance. Can be done.

[1-4E. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1180 in the game board 4 will be described. The function display unit 1180 is mounted and arranged at a predetermined position of the front constituent member 1110, and the display unit 1181 and the front constituent member 1110 which are arranged so as to be visible from the player side on the front surface of the front constituent member 1110. It is provided with a rear protruding portion 1182 that protrudes rearward from the rear surface.

As shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 102, the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 of this example is for displaying a game state changed by a game ball driven into the game area 1100 at the left end portion of the front view. A game status indicator 1183 composed of one LED and two LEDs arranged in the vertical direction on the right side of the game status indicator 1183. (1) The result of the first special lottery (first hit lottery), which is arranged on the right side of the special symbol memory display 1184 and the first special symbol memory display 1184 and is drawn by accepting the game ball to the first starting port 2101. The first special symbol display 1185 consisting of one 7-segment LED for displaying as the first special symbol and the game ball received to the second starting port 2102 located diagonally above the right of the first special symbol display 1185. The second special symbol display 1186 and the second special symbol display 1186 consisting of one 7-segment LED for displaying the result of the second special lottery (second winning lottery) drawn by It is composed of two LEDs arranged in the vertical direction on the right side, and is equipped with a second special symbol storage display 1187 for displaying the number of holdings related to the acceptance of game balls to the second starting port 2102.

Further, the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 is arranged in an arc shape substantially along the inner peripheral rail 1113 from directly above the second special symbol display 1186, and holds the number of reservations related to the passage of the gate portion 2350 by the game ball. The normal symbol memory display 1188 consisting of four LEDs for display and the normal symbol lottery result arranged under the normal symbol storage display and drawn by passing the game ball through the gate 2350 are displayed as normal symbols. The normal symbol display 1189, which consists of one LED, and the normal symbol storage display 1188 are arranged side by side on the upper right side, and are large when the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery is a "big hit". It is provided with a round display 1190 composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening / closing pattern of the winning opening 2103.

The game status display 1183 in the function display unit 1180 of this example is a color LED capable of changing the emission color of red, green, and orange, and the emission color of the emission and the lighting / blinking of the emission color. Depending on the combination, various gaming states (for example, normal gaming state, probability fluctuation state, time shortening state, probability variation time saving state, big hit gaming state, small hit gaming state, etc.) can be displayed.

Further, when the first special symbol storage display 1184 in the function display unit 1180 cannot display the first special symbol in a variable manner on the first special symbol display 1185, the game ball is accepted into the first starting port 2101. In this case, the number of holds (stored number) of the first special symbol whose start of variable display is held (stored) is displayed. The first special symbol storage display 1184 has a first special symbol storage lamp 1184a composed of a predetermined LED and a first special symbol storage lamp 1184b, and the first special symbol storage lamps 1184a and 1184b are lit. -The number of holds can be displayed by the blinking pattern. Specifically, for example, when the number of holds is one, the first special symbol storage lamp 1184a is turned on and the first special symbol storage lamp 1184b is turned off, and when the number of holds is two, the first special symbol storage lamps 1184a and 1184b are turned on. 1184a blinks and the first special symbol memory lamp 1184b lights up when the number of holds is three, and the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b both light up when the number of holds is four. It is supposed to blink. In this example, up to four are reserved.

Further, when the second special symbol storage display 1187 in the function display unit 1180 cannot display the second special symbol in a variable manner on the second special symbol display 1186, the game ball is accepted into the second starting port 2102. In this case, the number of holds (stored number) of the second special symbol whose start of variable display is held (stored) is displayed. The second special symbol storage display 1187 has a second special symbol storage lamp 1187a composed of a predetermined LED and a second special symbol storage lamp 1187b, and the second special symbol storage lamps 1187a and 1187b are lit. -The number of holds can be displayed by the blinking pattern. Specifically, for example, when the number of holds is one, the second special symbol storage lamp 1187a is turned on and the second special symbol storage lamp 1187b is turned off, and when the number of holds is two, the second special symbol storage lamps 1187a and 1187b are turned off. When the number of holds is three, the second special symbol memory lamp 1187a blinks and the second special symbol memory lamp 1187b lights up, and when the number of holds is four, the second special symbol memory lamps 1187a and 1187b are both lit. It is supposed to blink. In this example, up to four are reserved.

Further, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 in the function display unit 1180 are drawn by the first special lottery by accepting the game balls to the first starting port 2101 and the second starting port 2102. And the result of the second special lottery, the 7-segment LED stops after fluctuating for a predetermined time according to the result of the special lottery, and the light emission pattern (special symbol) of the stopped 7-segment LED , The result of the first special lottery and the result of the second special lottery can be recognized by the player.

Further, the ordinary symbol display 1189 in the function display unit 1180 is a color LED capable of changing the emission color of red, green, and orange, and is a combination of the emission color to emit light and lighting / blinking. As a result, it is possible to display the result of a normal lottery that is drawn when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2350. As with the special symbol, the display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 1189 is also stopped and displayed in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the normal lottery result after the display is changed for a predetermined time.

Further, the normal symbol storage display 1188 in the function display unit 1180 suspends the start of the variable display when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2350 when the normal symbol cannot be variablely displayed on the normal symbol display 1189. It displays the number of held (stored) ordinary symbols (stored). This ordinary symbol storage display 1188 includes four ordinary symbol storage lamps 1188a to 1188d arranged side by side from the bottom, each of which is a predetermined LED, and the ordinary symbol storage lamp 1188a is arranged from the bottom according to the number of holdings. By turning on ~ 1188d in sequence, the number of reserved symbols can be displayed. In this example, up to four variable displays of normal symbols are reserved (stored).

Further, the round indicator 1190 in the function display unit 1180 includes round indicator lamps 1190a and 1190b composed of predetermined LEDs, so that the number of rounds in the "big hit" game can be displayed depending on the lighting mode of each lamp. It has become.

However, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the prize balls that can be paid out in the big hit game state (big hit game processing) until at least a predetermined period elapses after the predetermined cancellation condition is satisfied. It is necessary to keep the degree of expectation about the amount (for example, how many rounds of the jackpot game processing is executed) secret so that the player does not know. This is because, during the predetermined period in this concealed state, a certain amount or more of prize balls are paid out in the big hit game processing (for example, a plurality of types of big hit game processing in which the amount of prize balls that can be paid out is different). The degree of expectation that the jackpot game state in which the largest amount of prize balls can be paid out) will change the resistance that the player can feel when rotating the dial operation unit 401 as a gripping transformation means. This is because the player is able to convey the information to the vagueness through the experience of the player.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 in which the number of round games that can be executed in the jackpot game processing is different each time and the prize balls that can be paid out in the jackpot game processing are different from each other, the payout is made in the jackpot game processing. When the degree of expectation about the amount of prize balls that can be played is kept secret so that the player does not know, it is possible to provide a large number of indicator lamps so that the number of rounds cannot be grasped from the lighting pattern of the indicator lamps. preferable. When the number of indicator lamps is increased, a large number of variations can be given as a lighting pattern that cannot be recognized as character information. Although the indicator lamps are lit in a form indicating the number of rounds, the rounds are immediately made from the lighting pattern of the indicator lamps. This is because it becomes difficult to grasp the number.

Further, in recent years, although the number of round games executed in the jackpot game processing is the same, the prize balls that can be paid out in the jackpot game processing are mutually different by changing the opening pattern of the jackpot 2103 each time. Some gaming machines are made different. As a gaming machine of this type, "the first big hit game state in which a round game is performed over 15 rounds with the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 2103 per round being 30 seconds, and the maximum of the big winning opening 2103 per round. A gaming machine with a second jackpot game state in which a round game with an opening time of 0.5 seconds is performed for 15 rounds in the same way as the first jackpot game state "," Maximum opening of the grand prize opening 2103 per round After performing only two rounds of the first big hit game state in which the round game with a time of 30 seconds is performed over 15 rounds and the round game in which the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 2103 per round is 30 seconds, one round By executing 13 rounds of round games with the maximum opening time of the jackpot 2103 per hit being 0.5 seconds, the amount of prize balls that can be paid out is less than that of the first jackpot game state, but the number of round games executed is An example is a gaming machine in which a second gaming state, which is the same as the first jackpot gaming state and has 15 rounds, is prepared. As described above, a gaming machine in which the number of executions of the round game executed in the jackpot game state is the same but the amount of prize balls that can be paid out in the jackpot game state is different is provided with the round display 1190. It is not necessary, and even if it is provided, it is preferable not to display the number of round games performed in the jackpot game state. As a result, the degree of expectation regarding the amount of prize balls to be paid out in the jackpot game state can be kept secret so that the player does not know.

As shown in FIG. 102, the function display unit 1180 of this example can be visually recognized from the player side through the game window 101 of the door frame 5 with the game board 4 attached to the pachinko machine 1. There is. In addition, the game status display 1183, the first special symbol storage display 1184, the first special symbol display 1185, the second special symbol display 1186, the second special symbol storage display 1187, and the normal symbol storage of the function display unit 1180. The display 1188, the normal symbol display 1189, and the round display 1190 are mounted on the front surface of the functional display board 1191 (see FIG. 110). Further, a connection terminal for connecting the function display board 1191 and the main control board 4100 is attached to the rear end of the rear protrusion 1182 of the function display unit 1180.

In this example, since the function display unit 1180 is provided in the front component 1110 of the game board 4, the function is compared with the case where the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 attached to the game panel 1150 are provided. The display unit 1180 can be diverted as the basic configuration of the game board 4, the configuration related to the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified to prevent the cost from increasing, and the model of the pachinko machine 1 (table unit 2000 or Even if the detailed configuration of the game board 4 embodied by the back unit 3000 and capable of characterizing the model of the pachinko machine 1) is different, the position of the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 does not change, so that the player or the game The position of the display unit 1181 can be recognized by the clerk in the hall without any confusion.

[1-4F. Second Embodiment of the game panel]
Subsequently, a game panel 1200 having a form different from that of the game panel 1150 in the game board 4 described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 103 to 105. The front component 1110, the board holder 1160, and the main control board box 1170 in FIGS. 103 to 105 have the same configuration as those described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted here. The game panel 1200 of the present embodiment is thinner than the above-mentioned game panel 1150 and has a plate shape capable of partitioning the rear end of the game area 1100 whose outer periphery is partitioned by the front component 1110. Also includes a panel plate 1210 having a small outer shape, and a frame-shaped panel holder 1220 that holds the panel plate 1210 detachably from the front side and is attached to the rear surface of the front component 1110.

The panel plate 1210 has a polygonal shape whose outer shape is slightly larger than that of the game area 1100, and is made of a synthetic resin plate such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, a polyarylate resin, or a methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. It is formed. The thickness of this panel plate 1210 is thinner than that of the panel holder 1220 (game panel 1150), and it is the minimum necessary that can be sufficiently held even if an obstacle nail (not shown) is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is said to have a thickness (8 to 10 mm). In this example, the panel plate 1210 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel plate 1210 includes a plurality of fitting holes 1211 arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery and formed of round holes penetrating in the front-rear direction, and elongated holes 1212 arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the lower left portion and penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in the vertical direction. It has. These fitting holes 1211 and elongated holes 1212 are arranged outside the game area 1100 and are positioned with the panel holder 1220. Further, the panel plate 1210 is provided with stepped engaging step portions 1213 having a recessed front side at both ends of the upper side and both ends of the lower side. The engaging step portion 1213 is formed so as to be cut out to approximately half the thickness of the panel plate 1210, and is arranged outside the game area 1100 like the fitting hole 1211 and the elongated hole 1212. This is for engaging and fixing the panel plate 1210 to the panel holder 1220.

Further, the panel plate 1210 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1214 at predetermined positions. The inner rail 1112 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing the positioning protrusion 1127 protruding from the rear side of the inner rail 1112 to the inner rail fixing hole 1214.

On the other hand, the panel holder 1220 in the game panel 1200 has a size including the panel plate 1210 and has a substantially square outer shape, and has a thickness substantially the same as the thickness of the game panel 1150 made of the above-mentioned wooden board (in this example, about about the same thickness). It is made of a synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin) having a thickness of 20 mm). The panel holder 1220 has a holding step portion 1221 that holds the panel plate 1210 detachably and is recessed from the front side to the rear side, and front and rear having a size substantially equal to that of the game area 1100 inside the holding step portion 1221. It is mainly provided with a through-hole 1222 that penetrates in the direction.

The depth from the front surface of the holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220 is substantially the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1210, and the front surface of the panel plate 1210 held in the holding step portion 1221 is the front surface of the panel holder 1220. It is designed to be almost on the same side as. Further, the holding step portion 1221 has a size such that a predetermined amount of clearance is formed on the front inner peripheral surface thereof with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1210. Due to this clearance, even if the panel plate 1210 expands and contracts relatively due to changes in temperature and aging, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed. An elastic member such as rubber may be packed in the clearance.

Further, the panel holder 1220 is arranged at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 1211 and the elongated hole 1212 formed in the panel plate 1210 held by the holding step portion 1221, and is arranged from the front surface of the holding step portion 1221 toward the front. It is provided with a plurality of protruding pins 1223 that extend and can be fitted and inserted into the fitting holes 1211 and the elongated holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 1223 into the fitting holes 1211 and the elongated holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210, the panel holder 1220 and the panel plate 1210 can be positioned with each other.

Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with an engaging claw 1224 and an engaging piece 1225 that engage with the engaging step portion 1213 at a position corresponding to the engaging step portion 1213 of the panel plate 1210. More specifically, the engaging claw 1224 is arranged in the upper holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220, corresponds to the upper engaging step portion 1213 in the panel plate 1210, and is forward from the front surface of the holding step portion 1221. It protrudes toward it and is elastically engaged with the engaging step portion 1213. The engaging claw 1224 is sized so that its tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1220. On the other hand, the engaging piece 1225 is arranged in the lower holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220, corresponds to the lower engaging step portion 1213 in the panel plate 1210, and is connected to the front surface of the holding step portion 1221. In a state where the engaging step portion 1213 of the plate 1210 is formed with a predetermined gap having a size capable of being inserted, a predetermined amount extends toward the upper side (center side) along the front surface of the panel holder 1220. By engaging the engaging step portion 1213 of the panel plate 1210 with the engaging claw 1224 and the engaging piece 1225, the panel plate 1210 is detachably held with respect to the panel holder 1220.

Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a boss insertion hole 1226 that penetrates in the front-rear direction through which the mounting boss 1126 provided in the front component member 1110 can be inserted, and the mounting boss of the front component member 1110 is provided in the boss insertion hole 1226. By inserting the 1126, the panel holder 1220 and the front component 1110 are positioned with each other.

As shown in FIG. 104, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a mounting support portion 1227 on the rear surface side, which is recessed by a predetermined amount on the front side so as to leave a lower side and an outer peripheral edge slightly below the center in the vertical direction. ing. Due to this mounting support portion 1227, the rear surface of the panel holder 1220 is recessed above the predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, with the outer peripheral portion on the rear surface side protruding rearward, and the amount of the depression (the amount of the depression). The depth) is set to a depth (in this example, about 2.5 mm) that can accommodate the flange-shaped fixing portion 3001a (see FIG. 109) of the back box 3001 in the back unit 3000 that is mounted and fixed to the mounting support portion 1227. It is said that it is preferably between 1 and 3 mm). By mounting and fixing a predetermined member to the mounting support portion 1227, it is possible to prevent the fixing portion 3001a from protruding to the rear side of the panel holder 1220, and the panel holder 1220, that is, the game board 4 can be attached to the main body frame 3. It can be securely installed and installed in the game board holding port 601 of the (pachinko machine 1).

Further, as shown in the figure, a plurality of mounting holes 1228 arranged in the mounting support portion 1227 on the rear surface side and above the accommodating recess 630h and capable of screwing a predetermined screw are arranged in the panel holder 1220 in a predetermined arrangement. ing. Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of positioning holes 1229 arranged so as to correspond to the mounting holes 1228. The positioning hole 1229 is a positioning protrusion formed on a member to be mounted and fixed using the mounting hole 1228 (for example, a positioning protrusion protruding forward from a flange-shaped fixing portion 3001a on the front surface of the back box 3001 (not shown). Is omitted)) is inserted. In this example, the positioning hole 1229 is a stop hole having a substantially rectangular shape (square hole shape) in the rear view.

It should be noted that, with respect to the mounting hole 1228, a mounting hole having an appropriate diameter is adjusted according to the size and weight of a predetermined member to be mounted and fixed by mixing a large diameter hole and a small diameter hole. 1228 may be used.

Further, the panel holder 1220 is formed with a plurality of lightening portions 1230 that open to the rear surface side at least in a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, so that the lightening portion 1230 reduces the weight of the panel holder 1220. It has become. As shown in FIG. 103, these lightening portions 1230 are not formed in the front side of the accommodating recess 630h, that is, in the predetermined range from the lower end of the front surface side of the panel holder 1220 to the predetermined height, and are within the predetermined range. Since the front surface of the panel holder 1220 is a substantially flat surface, the rear surface of the front component 1110 arranged on the front surface is a substantially flat surface, and the game ball launched from the ball striking device 650. However, it is guided smoothly. Further, in this panel holder 1220, as shown in the figure, the lightening portion 1230 is formed so that the mounting holes 1228 and the like are formed in a boss shape, and at the same time, they are supported and the strength of the panel holder 1220 is maintained. In order to do so, a box-shaped rib is formed.

The panel holder 1220 is formed with an obstacle nail planting device (not shown) and a positioning unit 1231 corresponding to positioning means such as an assembly jig, and holds the game panel 1150 in the obstacle nail planting device. It is possible to set it in the state that it is. Further, in the lower part of the panel holder 1220, there is an out port 1232 that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out-port guidance surface 1115 of the front component 1110, and a lower end that penetrates horizontally in the front-rear direction to the left side of the front view and downwards. A ball passage notch 1233 having the same shape as the ball passage notch 1122 of the front component 1110 and a rear protrusion 1182 of the function display unit 1180 penetrating in the front-rear direction are inserted into the lower right corner of the front view. It includes an insertion hole 1234 and.

Further, the panel holder 1220 has a front configuration including a groove-shaped out ball discharge groove 1235 (see FIG. 104) in which a predetermined amount is recessed from the rear surface to the front on the rear surface side of the out port 1232 and the lower end side is opened downward. It is provided with a notch 1236 formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 of the member 1110 and notched so as to penetrate from the right end in the front view in the front-rear direction. Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes for mounting and fixing to the rear surface of the front component 1110 at appropriate positions.

When the game board 4 is inserted and held in the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, the out ball discharge groove 1235 in the panel holder 1220 is inserted into the main body frame 3 (the upper surface of the game board mounting portion 606 in the main body frame base 600). It is designed to fit with the provided positioning protrusion 607, and when the out ball discharge groove 1235 fits with the positioning protrusion 607, the game board 4 moves relative to the main body frame 3 in the left-right direction. It is becoming regulated.

In the game panel 1200 of the present embodiment, the panel plate 1210 is fitted and inserted into the holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220 from the front, and the engaging claw 1224 and the engaging piece 1225 are engaged with the engaging step portion 1213. By combining them, the panel plate 1210 can be held by the panel holder 1220, and the front side of the panel plate 1210 and the panel holder 1220 are substantially flush with each other. It is possible to set the panel plate 1210 in the conventional obstacle nail planting device while holding it in the panel holder 1220 without modifying the installation device, and suppress the increase in the cost for planting the obstacle nail. You can do it.

Further, in the game panel 1200 of this example, although not shown, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement within a range corresponding to the game area 1100 on the front surface of the panel plate 1210. At the same time, the table unit 2000 can be attached. Further, a back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1220. As a result, in the thin panel plate 1210, only the front unit is supported, so that it is possible to prevent the panel plate 1210 from being distorted by the load of the front unit.

Further, since the game panel 1200 has a divided structure of the panel plate 1210 and the panel holder 1220, even if the panel plate 1210 is used as a transparent plate, it is possible to suppress an increase in the weight of the entire game panel 1200, and the transparent panel. The pachinko machine 1 in which the rear side of the game area 1100 can be seen by the player through the plate 1210 can be embodied, and the pachinko machine 1 can be strongly attracted by the player.

Further, since the game panel 1200 is divided into the panel plate 1210 and the panel holder 1220, the panel plate 1210 whose position of the obstacle nail, the winning opening, etc. changes depending on the model of the pachinko machine 1 is used as a replacement part. , The panel holder 1220 can be used as a common part, and the pachinko machine 1 provided with the game board 4 compatible with various models can be obtained by simply exchanging only the panel plate 1210.

Further, since the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 1228 in a predetermined arrangement in advance, mounting and fixing positions of various predetermined members such as the back unit 3000 which is mounted and fixed on the rear surface side of the panel holder 1220 depending on the model. By designing the fixing parts of various members to correspond to the positions of the mounting holes 1228, the panel holder 1220 can be used as a common part of the pachinko machine 1 regardless of the model, even if the positions are different. It has become.

[1-5. Security structure of pachinko machines]
Subsequently, the security structure of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 106 and 107. FIG. 106 is a partial cross-sectional view showing a security structure on the shaft support side of the pachinko machine. Further, FIG. 107 is a perspective view seen from the rear side in a state where the game board is housed.

First, as shown in FIG. 106, the security structure on the shaft support side of the pachinko machine 1 of this example is the side surface of the main body frame base 600 formed of the synthetic resin in the main body frame 3 on the shaft support side (left side in front view). It is composed of a metal side security plate 950 attached to the door frame 5 and a metal reinforcing unit 150 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base main body 110 formed of synthetic resin in the door frame 5.

As described above, the side surface security plate 950 of the main body frame 3 is formed of an extruded mold material made of metal (for example, aluminum alloy), and the vertical dimension is substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the main body frame base 600. In addition, the dimension in the front-rear direction is larger than the dimension in the front-rear direction in which the front component 1110 and the game panel 1150 in the game board 4 are combined. The side surface security plate 950 has a plate-shaped side surface piece 952a extending in the vertical direction and extending in the front-rear direction to form a side surface of the main body frame 3, and a front end extending substantially perpendicular to the inside (open side) from the front end of the side surface piece 952a. A middle piece 952c extending from the side piece 952a along the front end piece 952b and extending inward in a substantially perpendicular direction from the rear end of the side piece 952a so as to form a predetermined amount of gap between the piece 952b and the front end piece 952b. It is provided with a rear end piece 952d. As a result, the front end of the side security plate 950 has a substantially U-shaped cross section that is opened inward (open side) by the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c.

Further, the side security plate 950 (main body 952) has the strength and rigidity of the side security plate 950 due to the front end piece 952b, the middle piece 952c, and the rear end piece 952d arranged in the direction perpendicular to the surface of the side plate piece 952a. It has been increased so that the strength of the main body frame 3 as a whole can be increased so that the game board 4 and the door frame 5 can be supported satisfactorily.

On the other hand, as described above, the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5 is formed by forming a plurality of long metal plates into a frame shape so as to surround the outer periphery of the game window 101 in the door frame 5 by spot welding, rivets, or the like. The outer side of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 on the shaft support side is provided with a shaft support side U-shaped projecting piece 166 having a substantially U-shaped cross section opened to the outside (shaft support side). In the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the reinforcing unit 150, the strength of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is further increased by the shaft support side U-shaped projecting piece 166, and the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is hard to bend. ..

By the way, in this example, since the door frame 5 is attached and supported only at two points above and below the upper shaft branch portion 156 and the lower shaft branch portion 158 with respect to the main body frame 3, the door frame 5 on the shaft support side When an illegal tool such as a screwdriver or a crowbar is inserted between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 3, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is deformed and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 becomes large, and the gap is increased through the gap. There is a risk of cheating. On the other hand, in the security structure of this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, between the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c formed inside the front end of the side security plate 950. The rear piece of the shaft support side U-shaped projecting piece 166 formed in a substantially U shape of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame 5 is inserted (invaded), and the front end piece 952b is used as the shaft support. It is in a state of being sandwiched between the side U-shaped projecting pieces 166. As a result, even if the door frame 5 is forcibly opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the shaft support side U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the door frame 5 comes into contact with the rear surface side of the front end piece 952b of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 Since it is possible to prevent the U-shaped projecting piece 166 on the shaft support side from moving away from the main body frame 3, it is possible to prevent the closed door frame 5 from being scooped out, and the main body frame can be prevented from being opened. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as opening the door frame 5 against 3.

Further, since the side security plate 950 formed of metal in the main body frame 3 and the reinforcing unit 150 formed of metal in the door frame 5 are fitted to each other, between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5. The strength and rigidity of the door frame are increased, and the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be made less likely to be distorted by an illegal tool, and the crime prevention performance can be improved.

Further, since the rear end of the side piece 952a on the side security plate 950 extends rearward from the game panel 1150 on the game board 4, the main body frame base 600 on the rear side of the rear end of the side piece 952a is assumed. Even if is destroyed, an illegal tool such as a piano wire cannot be inserted into the game area 1100 on the front side of the game board 4 (game panel 1150) from the rear end of the side piece 952a, and the illegal act is performed. Can be reliably prevented. As shown in FIG. 106, since the side frame plate 12 of the outer frame 2 is in contact with the side frame plate 12 so as to cover the outside of the side security plate 950, the pachinko machine 1 has a robust side surface, and the pachinko machine 1 has a robust side surface. It is possible to fully counter the vandalism of. Further, in general, in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, the side surface of the pachinko machine 1 is inserted and fixed in the frame of the island facility for installing the pachinko machine 1, so that the player side. From the (front side), it is almost impossible for an unauthorized tool to enter the rear side of the side piece 952a rather than the rear end, and the security performance of the pachinko machine 1 is further enhanced.

Subsequently, as a security structure from the rear side in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, as shown in FIG. 107, the prize ball base 710, the tank rail 731, and the prize ball device 740 in the main body frame 3 accommodating the game board 4 Since the unit base 741, the full tank branch unit 770, and the back cover 900 are made of transparent synthetic resin, the rear side and the side surface side of the game board 4 housed in the main body frame 3 can be used as the game board 4. It can be visually recognized from the rear side of the main body frame 3 without removing it from the main body frame 3 or opening the back cover 900. As a result, even if an illegal device is attached to the rear side of the game board 4, it can be easily found and it is possible to prevent the illegal act from being performed. In addition, since it is possible to easily find an illegal device or the like attached to the game board 4 from the outside, it is possible to hesitate to attach the illegal device, and it is possible to enhance the deterrent against fraudulent acts. ing.

Further, since the rear side and the side surface side of the game board 4 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the main body frame 3 through the transparent prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, etc., the main body frame can be used for maintenance or model change. When the game board 4 is attached / detached to / from 3, even if tools such as a screwdriver or pliers, a waste cloth for cleaning, dust, dust, etc. remain between the main body frame 3 and the game board 4, they are removed from the outside. It can be easily found from the above, it is possible to prevent some troubles from occurring due to them, and it is possible to improve the maintainability of the pachinko machine 1.

[2. Detailed configuration of the game board]
Next, the detailed configuration of the game board 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 and 109. FIG. 108 is a detailed front view of the game board. Further, FIG. 109 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 108 as viewed from the front by disassembling.

The game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has an outer rail 1111 and an inner rail 1112, and the outer circumference of the game area 1100 in which the game ball as a game medium is driven by the player operating the handle device 500. The frame-shaped front component 1110 that forms a section and the front component 1110 are arranged at positions that can be visually recognized from the game window 101 of the door frame 5 to the player side when attached to the pachinko machine 1 at the lower right corner of the front view. A plurality of openings 1158 (FIG. 109) which are attached to the rear side of the function display unit 1180 and the front component 1110 so as to close the game area 1100 and penetrate in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the game area 1100 in a predetermined shape. It includes a plate-shaped gaming panel 1150 having (see), a front unit 2000 attached to the opening 1158 of the gaming panel 1150 from the front side, and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the gaming panel 1150.

Further, the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of this example is arranged between the game panel 1150 and the back unit 3000, and the game panel 1150 is provided for a plurality of light emitting decorative holes formed so as to penetrate the game panel 1150. A liquid crystal display device capable of displaying a predetermined effect image that is detachably attached to the rear side of the panel lens member 2500 inserted from the rear side and the back unit 3000 and is visible from the player side according to the game state. A board holder 1160 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the game panel 1150 so as to cover the lower part of the back unit from the rear side, and a main control board box 1170 attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1160 are provided.

[2-1. Table unit]
The front unit 2000 in the game board 4 is arranged above the out port 1151 at the lower center in the left-right direction in the game area 1100 and is supported on the front surface of the game panel 1150, and the game area on the left side of the attacker unit 2100. A side winning opening member 2200 arranged along the outer circumference of the 1100 and supported on the front surface of the game panel 1150, and a frame-shaped center accessory 2300 arranged in a substantially central portion of the game area 1100 and supported by the game panel 1150. It has.

The table unit 2000 is inserted from the front side into the opening 1158 formed at a position corresponding to the game area 1100 in the game panel 1150, and is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150. The portion protruding forward from the game panel 1150 is located within the game area 1100. As a result, the front unit 2000 comes into contact with the game ball driven into the game area 1100 at an appropriate position, and with the obstacle nails planted on the front surface of the game panel 1150, with respect to the movement of the game ball. It is possible to give a change. Further, the table unit 2000 can decorate the inside of the game area 1100.

[2-1A. Attacker unit]
The attacker unit 2100 in the front unit 2000 of the game board 4 of this example has a plurality of entrances (winning openings) in which a game ball driven into the game area 1100 can be accepted. , The first start port 2101 arranged substantially in the center in the left-right direction, the second start port 2102 arranged below the first start port 2101, and the first start arranged below the second start port 2102. It includes a rectangular large winning opening 2103 that extends significantly in the left-right direction from the opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102, and a general winning opening 2104 that is arranged slightly above the left and right sides of the large winning opening 2103. The game balls received in the first starting port 2101, the second starting port 2102, the large winning opening 2103, and the general winning opening 2104 are guided from the front side to the rear side of the game panel 1150.

The upper side of the first starting port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 is open so that a game ball can always be received (winning). On the other hand, the second starting port 2102 arranged below the first starting port 2101 is a pair of movable pieces 2106 that can be expanded between the first starting port 2101 and the first starting port 2101 by a starting port solenoid 2105 (see FIG. 110). Is arranged, and in a state where the pair of movable pieces 2106 stands up substantially vertically, the first starting port 2101 and the pair of movable pieces 2106 make the game ball unacceptable to the second starting port 2102. Therefore, in a state where the pair of movable pieces 2106 are expanded in the left-right direction, the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2102. That is, the pair of movable pieces 2106 makes the second starting port 2102 a variable winning opening. The pair of movable pieces 2106 are opened and closed by driving the start port solenoid 2105 based on the detection of the passage of the game ball by the gate sensor 2352 of the gate portion 2352 in the center accessory 2300 described later.

Further, the large winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 can be opened and closed by a horizontally long rectangular opening and closing member 2107 that can close the opening. The lower side of the opening / closing member 2107 is rotatably supported by the shaft, and in a substantially vertical state, the large winning opening 2103 can be closed to make the game ball unacceptable, and the upper side moves to the front side. When it is rotated to, the large winning opening 2103 is opened so that the game ball can be accepted. The opening / closing member 2107 is in a state in which the large winning opening 2103 is closed in a normal gaming state, and is drawn by receiving a game ball into the first starting opening 2101 or the second starting opening 2102 (starting prize). It opens and closes by driving the attacker solenoid 2108 (see FIG. 110) according to the result of the special lottery (when the result of the special lottery is "big hit" or "small hit").

Further, as shown in the figure, the general winning opening 2104 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened upward so that the game ball can always be accepted (winning).

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the attacker unit 2100 detects the second starting port sensor 2109 that detects the game ball received by the second starting port 2102 and the game ball received by the large winning opening 2103. A count sensor 2110 is further provided, and the game ball detected by the second start port sensor 2109 and the count sensor 2110 is discharged onto the bottom wall portion of the substrate holder 1160. The first starting port sensor 3022 for detecting the game ball received in the first starting port 2101 and the general winning opening sensor 3020 for detecting the game ball received in the general winning opening 2104 are attached to the back unit 3000 described later. It is equipped.

[2-1B. Side winning opening member]
The side winning opening member 2200 of the front unit 2000 in the game board 4 is formed in the opening 1158 formed on the left side of the opening 1158 in which the attacker unit 2100 is inserted and fixed at the lower part of the game panel 1150 on the left side from the center in the left-right direction. On the other hand, after being inserted from the front side, it is fixed to the front surface of the game panel 1150, and is back to each other along the outer periphery of the game area 1100 so as to be aligned with the general winning opening 2104 on the left side of the front view of the attacker unit 2100. It is equipped with two general winning openings 2201 that are oriented toward it. These two general winning openings 2201 are opened upward so that game balls can always be accepted (winning), and the game balls accepted into the general winning opening 2201 are guided from the front side to the rear side of the game panel 1150. After that, it is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3020 provided in the back unit 3000, which will be described later.

Further, the side winning opening member 2200 is arranged at a position where the left end portion is substantially in contact with the outer periphery of the game area 1100 at the upper left end portion thereof, and is inclined so as to be lowered toward the right end portion. The shelf 2202 and the first shelf 2202 are arranged on opposite sides and lower sides of the two general winning openings 2201 and are located on the left-right center side of the game area 1100 (the second starting opening 2102 of the attacker unit 2100 and a large prize). It is provided with a second shelf portion 2203 that lowers toward the mouth 2103 side), and the game ball that has flowed down along the outer periphery of the game area 1100 by the first shelf portion 2202 is moved toward the center side of the game area 1100. Can be done.

The two general winning openings 2201 are arranged on the right side of the right end of the first shelf 2202, and even if the game ball is moved to the center side of the game area 1101 by the first shelf 2202. There is a possibility of winning a prize in the general winning opening 2201. Further, a third shelf portion 2204 inclined so as to be lowered toward the center side of the game area 1100 is also provided on the upper side between the two general winning openings 2201.

The side winning opening member 2200 is formed so as to have translucency as a whole, and although detailed illustration is omitted, a side winning opening decorative substrate is provided on the rear side of the second shelf portion 2203. At the same time, the side lamp decorative substrate 3014 in the back unit 3000, which will be described later, is arranged behind the side winning opening member 2200, and the side winning opening decorative substrate and the side lamp decorative substrate 3014 provide the side winning opening member 2200. Is luminescent and can be decorated.

[2-1C. Center role]
Further, the center accessory 2300 of the front unit 2000 in the game board 4 is inserted from the front side into an opening 1158 formed large so as to penetrate substantially the center of the game panel 1150, and then the game panel 1150. It is fixed to the front surface, and as shown in the figure, it is formed in a frame shape so as to occupy most of the game area 1100, and the outer peripheral surface on the right side of the front view is outside the game ball with the outer circumference of the game area 1100. It is formed in an arc shape so that a gap slightly larger than the diameter is formed, and the outer peripheral surface on the left side is on a substantially straight line hanging so as to form a region having a predetermined width from the outer circumference of the game area 1100. Is formed in.

The center accessory 2300 is an upper shelf portion 2301 that is inclined to the left from a position slightly to the right of the center in the left-right direction on the upper outer peripheral surface of the front wall portion located in front of the game panel 1150 so as to be lowered toward the left. When a game ball driven into the upper part of the game area 1100 flows down to the upper shelf part 2301, it flows down through the left side of the center accessory 2300 and to the right side of the upper shelf part 2301. The game ball that has flowed down (entered) passes through the right side of the center accessory 2300 and flows down to the lower part of the game area 1100 at once. In other words, if the game ball is driven so that the game ball enters to the right side of the upper shelf 2301 in the center accessory 2300, the chance of enjoying the flow of the game ball is reduced, so that the driving strength of the game ball is reduced. The ball can be adjusted as appropriate, and it is possible to maintain a feeling of tension and suppress the game from becoming a vague game.

Further, the center accessory 2300 has entered the warp entrance 2302 and the warp entrance 2302 in which the game ball flowing down the game area 1100 can enter the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front wall portion located on the front side of the game panel 1150. A warp outlet (not shown) that discharges the game ball into the frame, and a center accessory that rolls the game ball released from the warp outlet in the left-right direction and then releases it into the game area 1100 above the attacker unit 2100. It mainly includes a stage 2310 formed on the upper surface of the lower side in the frame of the 2300.

Although detailed illustration of the stage 2310 in the center accessory 2300 is omitted, the first stage to which the game balls released from the warp outlet are supplied and the game balls arranged in front of the first stage are arranged from the first stage. It is provided with a second stage, which is supplied and capable of releasing a game ball into the game area 1100. The stage 2310 is formed in a curved surface shape so that the substantially center in the left-right direction is lowered. In addition, a chance entrance 2313 through which a game ball can enter is formed on the rear side of the first stage substantially in the center in the left-right direction, and the game ball that has entered the chance entrance 2313 is a chance at the lowermost front of the center accessory 2300. It is designed to be discharged into the game area 1100 from the exit 2314. As shown in the figure, the chance exit 2314 is arranged directly above the first starting port 2101 in the attacker unit 2100, and the game ball released from the chance exit 2314 is received by the first starting port 2101 with a high probability. It is designed to (win a prize).

The stage 2310 in the center accessory 2300 of this example is formed of a transparent member, and through this stage 2310, the decorative body arranged below the stage 2310 in the back unit 3000 can be visually recognized from the player side. You can do it.

Further, the center accessory 2300 is transparent so as to extend to the left so as to be substantially in contact with the inner rail 1112 on the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front wall portion located on the front side of the game panel 1150, above the warp entrance 2302. It further includes an arch portion 2315. The arch portion 2315 extends in a thin plate shape from a substantially front end of the front wall portion, and forms a space through which a game ball can pass between the arch portion 2315 and the front surface of the game panel 1150. As a result, the game ball driven into the upper part of the game area 1100 and guided to the left side of the center accessory 2300 by the upper shelf portion 2301 flows down to the downstream side through the rear side of the arch portion 2315.

Further, the center accessory 2300 is provided with a gate portion 2350 that detects the passage of the game ball near the arch portion 2315 on the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front wall portion located on the front side of the game panel 1150. The gate portion 2350 detects a gate entrance on the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front wall portion, which is arranged above the arch portion 2315 and allows a game ball flowing down the game area 1100 to enter, and a game ball that has entered the gate entrance. The gate sensor 2352 and the gate outlet for discharging the game ball detected by the gate sensor 2352 from the outer peripheral surface of the front wall portion to the game area 1100 are provided. In this example, although detailed illustration is omitted, the gate exit of the gate portion 2350 is formed at the same height as the arch portion 2315, and the game ball detected by the gate sensor 2352 is the arch portion. It looks as if you have dived in 2315.

[2-2. Panel lens member]
The panel lens member 2500 of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of this example has a circular or × shape at a position outside the opening 1158 in which the center accessory 2300 is inserted in the game area 1100 of the game panel 1150 in the front-rear direction. A plurality of light emitting decoration holes formed so as to penetrate into the light emitting decoration are made to emit light. The panel lens member 2500 includes a transparent upper panel lens 2510 corresponding to a plurality of light emitting decorative holes formed on the upper left side on the outer periphery of the center accessory 2300, and a plurality of panels arranged on the rear side of the upper panel lens 2510 on the surface. It is arranged behind the upper panel lens substrate on which the LED is mounted, the transparent lower panel lens 2520 corresponding to a plurality of light emitting decorative holes formed on the lower left side on the outer periphery of the center accessory 2300, and the lower panel lens 2520. It includes a lower panel lens substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the surface.

The upper panel lens 2510 and the lower panel lens 2520 in the panel lens member 2500 project forward from the plate-shaped lens base portion and have a plurality of rod-shaped insertion guide guides having substantially the same shape as the shape of the light emitting decorative hole to be inserted. It has a part. When the insertion light guide unit 2502 is inserted into the light emitting decorative hole of the game panel 1150 from the rear side, the tip thereof is formed so as to substantially coincide with the front surface of the game panel 1150, and flows down the front surface of the game panel 1150. It is designed so as not to affect the game ball as much as possible.

The panel lens member 2500 of this example emits light from the LEDs of the upper panel lens substrate and the lower panel lens substrate as appropriate, so that even if an opaque gaming panel 1150 such as veneer plywood is used, the area where the gaming ball flows down is illuminated and decorated. This makes it possible to show the player the decoration of the game panel 1150, which has never been seen before, and to make the pachinko machine 1 stand out and differentiate it from other pachinko machines.

[2-3. Back unit]
The back unit 3000 in the game board 4 of the present embodiment is mounted and fixed to the rear surface of the game panel 1150, and as shown in the figure, supports the liquid crystal display device 1900 at a position separated from the game panel 1150 to the rear side by a predetermined distance. In the back box 3001, the upper unit 3002 arranged in the back box 3001 above the liquid crystal display device 1900, the character unit 3400 arranged in the back box 3001 on the right side of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and in the back box 3001. It mainly includes a gear decoration unit 3500 arranged on the left side of the liquid crystal display device 1900.

Further, the back unit 3000 is arranged at a position corresponding to the side winning opening member 2200 in the front unit 2000 mounted on the front surface of the game panel 1150 near the lower left front end of the back box 3001, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the surface. A game ball attached to the side lamp decorative substrate 3014 and the lower front end of the back box 3001 and received in the general winning opening 2201 of the side winning opening member 2200, and a game received in the general winning opening 2104 on the left side of the attacker unit 2100. The left guiding member 3016 that guides the ball downward and the game ball that is arranged on the right side of the left guiding member 3016 and is received by the first starting port 2101 and the general winning opening 2104 on the right side of the attacker unit 2100 are guided downward. It mainly includes a right guide member 3018.

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the back unit 3000 includes a horizontally long rectangular lamp drive board box arranged in the lower rear side of the back box 3001 and accommodating the lamp drive board 4160 (see FIG. 110), and a back box. A panel relay terminal plate 4161 (see FIG. 110) fixed to the rear side of the 3001 and arranged on the left side when viewed from the rear of the lamp drive board box, and a horizontally long rectangular upper resistor arranged on the rear upper part of the back box 3001. It further includes a substrate and a lock member that is attached to the rear side of the back box 3001 and holds the liquid crystal display device 1900 detachably.

In this example, the back unit 3000 can be visually recognized from the player side through the frame of the center accessory 2300 in the front unit 2000, and the units 3100, 3400, which are shaped into a predetermined shape, The concept of the pachinko machine 1 can be characterized by 3500 and the like. Further, in the back unit 3000, each unit 3100, 3400, and 3500 can be moved independently or in cooperation with each other according to the game state, and the movement causes the player to change the game state. It is possible to suggest the arrival of opportunities and the like, and it is possible to entertain the player.

[2-3A. Back box]
The back box 3001 in the back unit 3000 is formed in a box shape with the front side open, and is provided with a plurality of flange-shaped fixing portions 3001a protruding outward at the front end, and the game panel 1150 is provided via the fixing portions 3001a. It is designed to be fixed to the rear side. Further, the back box 3001 has a rectangular opening formed substantially in the center of the rear wall, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 supported on the rear side through the opening can be visually recognized from the player side. Further, the back box 3001 is formed with mounting portions for mounting and fixing the units 3100, 3400, 3500, the boards 3014, and the like at appropriate positions.

Although not shown, the back box 3001 is a liquid crystal that inserts and locks a fixed piece 1902 that protrudes outward from both the left and right sides of the liquid crystal display device 1900 (the right side in the rear view) on the right side of the opening in the rear view. Along with having a support portion, a lock member is attached to the left side when viewed from the rear of the opening, and the lock member supports the other fixed piece 1902 of the liquid crystal display device 1900 (left side when viewed from the rear) to display the liquid crystal. The device 1900 is detachably attached to the rear side of the back box 3001.

[2-3B. Guidance member]
The left guiding member 3016 in the back unit 3000 guides the game ball received into the general winning opening 2201 of the side winning opening member 2200 and the general winning opening 2104 on the left side of the attacker unit 2100 downward through different flow paths. Each flow path is provided with a general winning opening sensor 3020 for detecting the passage of a game ball. On the other hand, the right guiding member 3018 guides and discharges the game balls received into the first starting port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 and the general winning opening 2104 on the right side through different flow paths to the vicinity of the lower end. The flow path corresponding to the first starting port 2101 is provided with the first starting port sensor 3022, and the flow path corresponding to the general winning opening 2104 on the right side is provided with the general winning opening sensor 3020. Further, the right guide member 3018 is provided with a magnetic detection sensor 3024 capable of detecting magnetism.

The game balls guided downward by the left guide member 3016 and the right guide member 3018 are discharged onto the bottom wall portion of the board holder 1160, and are discharged downward from the out ball discharge portion 1161 of the board holder 1160 to the lower side of the game board 4. It has become so.

[2-3C. Upper unit]
The upper unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 is formed horizontally as a whole, and is attached and fixed to the upper side of the opening facing the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the back box 3001. The upper unit 3100 is arranged in the front at substantially the center in the left-right direction and is arranged in a circular shape in front view, and is arranged behind the rotating decoration unit 3200 to raise and lower the rotating decoration unit 3200. Mainly provided with 3250, a swinging decorative unit 3300 arranged substantially in the center in the left-right direction on the rear side of the elevating mechanism 3250, and movable ceiling units 3350 arranged on both left and right sides of the swinging decorative unit 3300. ing.

The rotary decorative body unit 3200 of the upper unit 3100 is moved in the vertical direction between the ascending position located at the upper part of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the descending position located at substantially the center of the liquid crystal display device 1900 by the elevating mechanism 3250. You can do it. In the rotating decoration unit 3200, the rotating decoration formed in the shape of a shuriken arranged on the front surface is rotated, and the rotation radius of the rotating decoration is increased by the centrifugal force. It has become like.

In this rotating decoration unit 3200, not only the rotating decoration rotates at the end, but also the rotating decoration unit protrudes outward in the radial direction, so that the turning radius of the entire rotating decoration body is expanded and the appearance is greatly changed. It is possible to give a strong impact to the player, entertain the player and suppress the decline in the interest in the game, and strongly attract the interest of the player. This makes it easier to select the pachinko machine 1 as a pachinko machine that plays a game with a great difference from other pachinko machines.

Further, the swinging decoration unit 3300 of the upper unit 3100 is provided with swinging decorations arranged on the left and right sides on the rear side so as to be adjacent to the rotating decoration unit 3200 located at the raised position, depending on the gaming state. The left and right swinging ornaments can be swung in the left-right direction all at once. Further, the movable ceiling unit 3350 of the upper unit 3100 is provided with plate-shaped ceiling decorations extending in the horizontal direction at both left and right ends of the upper unit 3100. The ceiling decoration is rotatably formed around an axis extending in the left-right direction around the front end side, so that the rear end side of the ceiling decoration rotates in the descending direction according to the game state. It has become.

[2-3D. Character unit]
As shown in the figure, the character unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 includes a character body that is modeled and three-dimensionally shaped as a ninja, and the character body moves from the rightmost position to the center side according to the game state. It is possible to move to the left and right direction. Further, when the character body of the character unit 3400 moves in the left-right direction, the character body rotates by a predetermined angle around an axis extending in the up-down direction with the movement.

Further, the character body of the character unit 3400 can reciprocate around an axis whose head extends in the left-right direction, and reciprocates around an axis whose right arm extends in the vertical direction. Can be done. As a result, by reciprocating the head, the character can behave as if it were nodding. In addition, by reciprocating the right arm in the horizontal direction, the character can behave as if he were throwing a shuriken.

[2-3E. Gear decoration unit]
The gear decoration unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 is provided with a plurality of gear-shaped gear decorations that are rotatable around an axis extending in the left-right direction and are arranged in the vertical direction, and each gear decoration is provided according to the gaming state. The body is designed to rotate all at once.

[2-4. Liquid crystal display device]
The liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4 of this example is detachably attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001 in the back unit 3000 so that a predetermined effect image can be displayed according to the game state. It has become. The liquid crystal display device 1900 includes fixed pieces 1902 protruding outward from both the left and right sides, and can be attached to the back box 3001 via the fixed pieces 1902.

Although detailed illustration of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is omitted, a peripheral control board box containing a peripheral control unit 4140, a liquid crystal control unit 4150, etc., and an inverter board 1411 for supplying power to the liquid crystal display device 1900 are provided on the rear side thereof. It is equipped with an inverter board box that houses the above.

[3. Various boards]
Subsequently, a control board that performs various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 110. FIG. 110 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of a pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a group of the main board 4000 and a group of the peripheral control boards 4010, and various controls are shared by these two groups. The group of the main board 4000 includes a main control board 4100 that controls the game operation (progress of the game) and a payout control board 4110 that controls the payout of the game ball and the like. Further, the group of the peripheral control board 4010 is the peripheral control unit 4140 that controls various effects during the game based on the command from the main control board 4100, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 based on the command from the peripheral control board 4140. It includes a liquid crystal control unit 4150 that controls the display of the effect image.

[3-1. Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 110, the main control board 4100 that controls the progress of the game is a main control MPU 4100a that is a microprocessor having a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. The main control I / O port 4100b as an input / output device (I / O device), the main control input circuit 4100f into which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and the main control solenoid for driving various solenoids. It includes a drive circuit 4100g and a RAM clear switch 4100c for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM 4100e (hereinafter, also referred to as "main control built-in RAM 4100e") built in the main control MPU 4100a. .. In addition to the built-in ROM 4100d (hereinafter, also referred to as "main control built-in ROM 4100d") and the main control built-in RAM 4100e, the main control MPU 4100a has a watchdog timer that monitors its operation (system) and prevents fraud. Functions etc. are also built-in.

The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 has a first start port sensor 3022 that detects a game ball received by the first start port 2101 and a second start port sensor that detects a game ball received by the second start port 2102. Detection signals from 2109 and some general winning opening sensors 3020 are input via the main control I / O port 4100b, respectively, or attached to the gate sensor 2352, general winning opening sensor 3020, count sensor 2110 and back unit 3000. The detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 3024 is input via the panel relay terminal plate 4161 attached to the game board 4 and the main control I / O port 4100b.

The main control MPU 4100a outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port 4100b to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100g based on these detection signals, whereby the start port solenoid 2105 and the attacker via the panel relay terminal plate 4161. A drive signal is output to the solenoid 2108, and the first special symbol display 1185, the second special symbol display 1186, and the first via the main control I / O port 4100b, the panel relay terminal board 4161, and the function display board 1191. A drive signal is output to the special symbol storage display 1184, the second special symbol storage display 1187, the normal symbol display 1189, the normal symbol storage display 1188, the game status display 1183, and the round display 1190.

In the present embodiment, the first start port sensor 3022, the second start port sensor 2109, the gate sensor 2352, and the count sensor 2110 use a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch. A contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch is used for the general winning opening sensor 3020. This is because the game ball frequently enters the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 and frequently passes through the gate portion 2350, so that the first start port sensor 3022, the second start port sensor 2109, and The detection of the game ball by the gate sensor 2352 also frequently occurs. Therefore, a proximity switch having a long life is used for the first start port sensor 3022, the second start port sensor 2109, and the gate sensor 2352. Further, when a big hit game process that is advantageous for the player occurs, the big winning opening 2103 is opened and the game ball frequently enters, so that the count sensor 2110 frequently detects the game ball. Therefore, the count sensor 2110 also uses a proximity switch having a long life. On the other hand, the general winning opening sensors 3020 do not frequently detect the general winning openings 2104 and 2201 in which the game balls do not enter frequently. Therefore, the general winning opening sensor 3020 uses a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch.

Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 4110, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110. Or Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands related to the control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 4140 of the peripheral control board 4010 described later via the main control I / O port 4100b. (The boards of the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control unit 4140 are electrically connected by a harness (not shown). The main control MPU 4100a will be described in detail later, but when it receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110, it formats these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 4140.

Although detailed description will be described later, various voltages are supplied to the main control board 4100 from the power supply board 851. The power supply board 851 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 4100 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply referred to as "capacitor") as a backup power source for supplying power to the main control board 4100 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. Described.) BC0 (see FIG. 111) is provided. The capacitor BC0 allows the main control MPU 4100a to store various information in the main control built-in RAM 4100e in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. When the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on, the various stored information is completely erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM 4100e. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100c is also output to the payout control board 4110.

Further, the main control board 4100 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 851, and when those voltages are equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is output as a power failure warning. This power failure warning signal is input to the main control MPU 4100a via the main control I / O port 4100b, and is also transmitted to the payout control board 4110 and the like via a harness (not shown).

[3-2. Payout control board]
As shown in FIG. 110, the payout control board 4110 that controls the payout of the game ball, etc., performs the payout control unit 4111 that performs various controls related to the payout, the launch control by the launch solenoid 654, and the ball feed by the ball feed solenoid 585. The launch control unit 4120 that controls, the error LED display 4130 that displays the status of the pachinko machine 1, the error release switch 860a for canceling the error displayed on the error LED display 4130, and the prize ball tank 720. , The tank rail 731, and a ball pulling switch 860b for discharging the game ball in the prize ball device 740 to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 and starting the ball pulling operation.

[3-2A. Payout control unit]
As shown in FIG. 110, the payout control unit 4111 that performs various controls related to payout on the payout control board 4110 is a microprocessor having a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. The payout control MPU4111a, the payout control I / O port 4111b as an I / O device, and the external watchdog timer 4111c for monitoring whether or not the payout control MPU4111a is operating normally (hereinafter, "external WDT4111c"). The payout motor drive circuit 4111d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740, and the payout control input circuit 4111e for inputting detection signals from various detection switches related to payout. , Is equipped. In addition to the built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in ROM") and RAM (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in RAM"), the payout control MPU4111a is used to prevent fraud. It also has built-in functions.

The payout control MPU4111a of the payout control unit 4111 receives various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 4100 and various commands related to payout in a serial manner via the payout control I / O port 4111b, or the main control board. In addition to the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100c from the 4100 being input via the payout control I / O port 4111b, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 550 is input, or the ball out switch 750. , The detection signals from the counting sensor 751 and the rotation angle sensor 752 are input via the prize ball relay board 754.

A ball-out switch 750 that detects the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply passage 741a formed in the unit base 741 of the prize ball device 740, and a game ball flowing down in the prize ball passage 741c formed in the unit base 741 are detected. The detection signal from the counting sensor 751 is first input to the payout control input circuit 4111e via the prize ball relay board 754 of the prize ball device 740, and is input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b. .. The detection signal from the rotation angle sensor 752 for detecting the detection slit 749a formed in the rotation detection board 749 of the prize ball device 740 first passes through the sensor board 753 of the prize ball device 740 and the prize ball relay board 754. It is input to the payout control input circuit 4111e and is input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b.

Further, the detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 and the main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 are first output control input circuits. It is input to the 4111e and is input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b.

Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 550 that detects whether or not the game ball in which the accommodation space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is stored is full is first the handle device relay board 192 and the main relay terminal. It is input to the payout control input circuit 4111e via the plate 880, and is input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b.

The payout control MPU4111a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 744 to the payout motor 744 via the payout control I / O port 4111b and the prize ball relay board 754, and outputs the status of the pachinko machine 1 to the error LED. A signal for displaying on the display 4130 is output to the error LED display 4130 via the payout control I / O port 4111b, and a command for indicating the status of the pachinko machine 1 is issued to the payout control I / O port 4111b. It is serially transmitted to the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4100, or the number of game balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 784 via the payout control I / O port 4111b. The external terminal plate 784 is electrically connected to a hall computer installed in the amusement park (hall). This hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

The error LED display 4130 is a segment display, and displays alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like to display the status of the pachinko machine 1. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display 4130 are as follows. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it means that it is "connection abnormality" (specifically, with the main control board 4100). Notifies that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 4110 and the board, and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is out). Based on the detection signal from the switch 750, it notifies that there is no game ball in the supply passage 741a formed in the unit base 741 of the prize ball device 740), and when the number "2" is displayed, "ball is seen". (Specifically, the payout rotating body 748 at the entrance of the distribution space 741b communicating with the supply passage 741a formed in the unit base 741 of the prize ball device 740 based on the detection signal from the rotation angle sensor 752. And the game ball are engaged near the entrance to notify that the payout rotating body 748 is difficult to rotate), and when the number "3" is displayed, it means that it is a "counting switch error" (specifically). Notifies that the counting sensor 751 has a problem based on the detection signal from the counting sensor 751), and when the number "5" is displayed, it means that it is a "retry error" (specifically, Notifies that the number of retries of the payout operation has reached the preset upper limit value), and when the number "6" is displayed, it means that the tank is "full" (specifically, from the full tank detection sensor 550). Based on the detection signal of, the accommodation space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is notified that the stored game ball is full), and when the number "7" is displayed, it means that "CR is not connected" (CR is not connected). Notifies that the electrical connection is disconnected in any of the payout control board 4110 to the CR unit 6), and when the number "9" is displayed, it means that it is "in stock" (specifically). Has notified that the number of game balls that have not yet been paid out has reached a predetermined number).

The ball lending request signal for the game ball from the ball lending switch 365a and the prepaid card return request signal from the return switch 365b first pass through the frequency display board 365, the main relay terminal board 880, and the CR unit connection terminal board 874. Is input to the CR unit 6. The CR unit 6 serially transmits a signal specifying the number of balls of the game ball to be rented according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 4110 via the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and this signal is used for the payout control I / O. It is received at port 4111b and input to the payout control MPU4111a. Further, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining amount of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of rented game balls, and displays a signal for displaying the remaining amount on the remaining degree display 365c, which is a CR unit connection terminal. It is output to the board 874, the main relay terminal board 880, and the frequency display board 365, and this signal is input to the residual frequency display 365c.

[3-2B. Launch control unit]
As shown in FIG. 110, the launch control unit 4120 that performs launch control by the launch solenoid 654 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 585 is a launch control input circuit in which detection signals from various detection switches related to launch are input. 4120a, an oscillation circuit 4120b that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, a launch timing circuit 4120c that outputs a launch reference pulse for launching a game ball toward the game region 1100 based on this clock signal, and this launch reference. It includes a firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 654 based on the pulse, and a ball feeding solenoid drive circuit 4120e that outputs a driving signal to the ball feeding solenoid 585 based on the firing reference pulse. The firing timing circuit 4120c generates a firing reference pulse so that 100 game balls are launched toward the game region 1100 per minute based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit 4120b, and outputs the firing reference pulse to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d. At the same time, a ball feed reference pulse obtained by multiplying the launch reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120e.

From the touch sensor 516 that detects whether or not the palm or finger is touching the front 506 of the rotating handle body, and the launch stop switch 518 that detects whether or not the launch of the game ball is forcibly stopped by the player's will. The detection signal is first input to the launch control input circuit 4120a via the handle device relay board 192 and the main relay terminal plate 880, and is input to the launch timing circuit 4120c. Further, when the CR unit 6 and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 are electrically connected, they are input to the firing control input circuit 4120a as a CR connection signal and input to the firing timing circuit 4120c. The signal from the rotation position detection sensor 512 that electrically adjusts the strength of launching the game ball toward the game area 1100 according to the rotation position of the rotation handle main body front 506 is first the handle device relay board 192 and then the main relay terminal. It is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d via the plate 880.

Based on the signal from the rotation position detection sensor 512, the launch solenoid drive circuit 4120d launches a drive current for launching the game ball toward the game area 1100 with a launch strength commensurate with the rotation position of the rotation handle body front 506. When the reference pulse is input, it is output to the firing solenoid 654. On the other hand, the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120e applies a constant current to the ball feed solenoid 585 via the main relay terminal plate 880 and the handle device relay board 192 when the ball feed reference pulse is input. By outputting, the ball feed member 584 of the ball feed unit 580 receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300, and the constant current is triggered by the completion of the input of the ball feed reference pulse. By stopping the output of the ball feed member 584, the game ball received by the ball feed member 584 is sent to the hit ball launcher 650 side. In this way, the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit 4120d to the launch solenoid 654 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120e to the ball feed solenoid 585 is constant. It is controlled.

The power supply board 851 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 4110 includes a capacitor BC1 (see FIG. 111) as a backup power source for supplying power to the payout control board 4110 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. .. With the capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU4111a can store various information in the payout control built-in RAM in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. When the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on, the various stored information is completely erased (cleared) from the payout control built-in RAM.

[3-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 110, the peripheral control board 4010 includes a peripheral control unit 4140 that performs effect control based on a command from the main control board 4100, and a liquid crystal display device 1900 based on control data from the peripheral control unit 4140. It includes a liquid crystal control unit 4150 that controls drawing.

[3-3A. Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 110, the peripheral control unit 4140 that performs the effect control on the peripheral control board 4010 includes a peripheral control MPU 4140a as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM 4140b that stores various processing programs and various commands, and a high-quality sound effect. The sound source IC 4140c is provided with a sound source IC 4140c, and a sound ROM 4140d in which sound information such as sound effects referred to by the sound source IC 4140c, music such as music, and a stimulus (impact) sound described later is stored.

The peripheral control MPU4140a has a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc. built-in, and when various commands are received from the main control board 4100, each decorative board of the game board 4 is based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal to the provided color LED or the like is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board to the lamp drive board 4170, or the game board. The game board side motor drive data for outputting drive signals to electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids that operate various movable bodies provided in 4 is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the motor drive board to the motor drive board 4165. Door-side motor drive data for transmitting to, or outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 5, and a color provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 5. Door-side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to LEDs, etc., and door-side motor drive light emission data composed of frame decoration drive amplifier board serial I / O port to peripheral panel Control data (display command) indicating a screen to be transmitted to the door frame base board 194 or displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 via the relay terminal board 872 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 is serial I / O for the liquid crystal control unit. In addition to transmitting data from the port to the liquid crystal control unit 4150, a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM 4140d is output to the sound source IC 4140c.

The detection signals from the various in-situ detection sensors for detecting the in-situs of the various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 are input to the peripheral control MPU 4140a via the motor drive board 4165. The detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b for detecting the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 provided on the door frame 5 and the pressure detection sensor 432c for detecting the operation of the press operation unit 405 are the door frame base substrate. It is input to the peripheral control MPU 4140a via 194, the peripheral relay terminal plate 882, and the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a, a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally is input from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, and the operation of the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is monitored based on this operation signal. doing.

The sound source IC4140c extracts music such as sound effects, music and / or stimulus sounds described later as sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on the control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU4140a, and the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 Then, control is performed so that sound effects, music, / and stimulating sounds, etc., according to various effects flow from the speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3 via the peripheral relay terminal plate 882, and the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872, Control is performed so that sound effects, music, / and stimulus sounds, etc., according to various effects flow from the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided on the door frame 5 via the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 and the door frame base board 194. Is going.

In addition to the watchdog timer built into the peripheral control MPU 4140a (hereinafter, referred to as “WDT with built-in peripheral control”), the peripheral control unit 4140 includes an external watchdog timer (hereinafter, “external peripheral control”) (not shown). It is also described as "WDT"), and the peripheral control MPU4140a diagnoses whether or not its own system is out of control by using the peripheral control built-in WDT and the peripheral control external WDT in combination.

The display command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is performed by the serial input / output port, and in the present embodiment, the bit rate (the size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km (k). ) BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as "bps") is set. On the other hand, a plurality of serial inputs different from the initial data, the door frame side lighting / blinking command, the game board side lighting / blinking command, the movable body drive command, and the display command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the lamp drive board 4160 or the motor drive board 4165. It is performed by the output port, and in this embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

The lamp drive board 4160 sends a lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the received door frame side lighting / blinking command to each decorative board 214,216, 254 provided on the door frame 5 via the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882. A lighting signal or a blinking signal is output to LEDs such as 256, 286, 320, 322, 430, 432, etc., or a lighting signal or a blinking signal is output to the game board 4 based on the received game board side lighting / blinking command. Output to LED. In addition, a plurality of lamp effect patterns are prepared for such a lamp effect including the lamp on the frame side, and a plurality of these lamp effect patterns are prepared based on a command indicating a winning or fluctuating pattern received from the main control board 4100. A specific lamp effect pattern among the lamp effect patterns is selectively executed over a predetermined time. As the plurality of lamp effect patterns, for example, the plurality of display effect patterns prepared to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 are prepared so as to have a paired relationship with each other, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 is used. When a specific display effect pattern appears, it is desirable that the specific lamp effect pattern associated with the display effect pattern is selectively executed so as to match the display effect of the liquid crystal display device 1900. Further, the motor drive board 4165 is provided on the dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 5 and the game board 4 via the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 to send a drive signal based on the received drive command of the movable body. Output to motors and solenoids (not shown) of each unit 3100, 3400, 3500.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a, a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally is input from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, or in the operation unit 400 provided in the dish unit 300 in the door frame 5. The detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b that detect the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressure detection sensor 432c that detects the operation of the pressure operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400 are driven by the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 and the lamp. It may be input via the board 4160.

The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on the sound command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and via the lamp drive board 4160 and the peripheral relay terminal plate 882, the side speaker 130 and the upper speaker 222 of the door frame 5 , 262, or from the speaker 821 of the main body frame 3 via the lamp drive board 4160, control is performed so that sound effects, music, and / and stimulus (impact) sounds, etc., according to various effects flow. In this example, as described above, the side speakers arranged on the left and right sides of the lower side of the game window 101, the upper speakers 222 and 262 arranged on the upper side of the game window 101, and the lower part of the main body frame 3 are provided. By sending an acoustic signal as sound information (for example, a 2ch stereo signal, a 4ch stereo signal, a 2.1ch surround signal to which a lower speaker 391 described later is added, a 4.1ch surround signal, etc.) is sent to the bass speaker 821. , It has become possible to present more realistic sound effects (sound effects) than before.

[3-4. LCD control unit]
Next, as shown in FIG. 110, the liquid crystal control unit 4150 that controls the drawing of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the peripheral control board 4010 stores the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a as a microprocessor, various processing programs, various commands, and various data. The liquid crystal control ROM 4150b, the VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Processor) 4150c for displaying and controlling the liquid crystal display device 1900 described above, the character ROM 4150d for storing various data of the screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the character ROM 4150d. It includes a character RAM 4150e to which various stored data are transferred and copied.

This liquid crystal control MPU4150a has a built-in parallel I / O port, serial I / O port, etc., and controls VDP4160c based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 4140 to draw the liquid crystal display device 1900. It is in control. When the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is operating normally, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 4140. Further, the liquid crystal control MPU4150a receives an execution signal described later from the VDP4150c, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

The liquid crystal control ROM 4150b includes various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900, control data (display command) from the peripheral control board 4010, corresponding schedule data, and control data (display command). A plurality of corresponding non-resident area transfer schedule data and the like are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in chronological order, and defines the order of the screens to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging the non-resident area transfer data that defines the order of various data stored in the character ROM 4150d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150e in chronological order. As the non-resident area transfer data, the order in which the screen data drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the progress of the schedule data is transferred in advance from the character ROM 4150d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150e is defined.

The liquid crystal control MPU4150a extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control board 4010 from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and outputs it to the VDP4150c, and then outputs the screen data following the first screen data. It is extracted from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and output to the VDP 4150c. As described above, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data one by one from the head screen data from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and outputs the screen data to the VDP 4150c.

When the screen data output from the liquid crystal control MPU4150a is input, the VDP4150c extracts sprite data from the character RAM 4150e based on the input screen data and generates drawing data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. The generated drawing data is output to the liquid crystal display device 1900. When the VDP4150c does not accept the screen data from the liquid crystal control MPU4150a, the VDP4150c outputs an executing signal to that effect to the liquid crystal control MPU4150a. The VDP4150c employs a line buffer method. This "line buffer method" means that the drawing data for one line that draws the left-right direction of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is held in the line buffer, and the drawing data for one line held in the line buffer is stored in the liquid crystal display device 1900. This is the output method.

An extremely large amount of sprite data is stored in the character ROM 4150d, and its capacity is large. When the capacity of the character ROM 4150d increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 increases, the access speed of the character ROM 4150d cannot be ignored, which affects the speed of drawing on the liquid crystal display device 1900. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sprite data stored in the character ROM 4150d is transferred and copied to the character RAM 4150e having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the character RAM 4150e. The sprite data is basic data that is data before the sprite is expanded in the bitmap format, and is stored in the character ROM 4150d in a compressed state.

Here, the "sprite" will be described. The "sprite" is an image displayed as a unit on the liquid crystal display device 1900. For example, when displaying various people on the liquid crystal display device 1900, the data for drawing each person is called a "sprite". As a result, when displaying a plurality of people on the liquid crystal display device 1900, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to people, houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 by setting the positions arranged on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites overlap each other (hereinafter, referred to as "the order of superimposing the sprites").

The sprite is composed of a plurality of rectangular areas having 64 pixels in each of the vertical and horizontal directions. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "character". In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, it can be expressed using a total of 6 characters arranged in, for example, 2 horizontal × 3 vertical. be able to. In the case of a larger sprite such as a background, it can be expressed by using a larger number of characters. In this way, the number and arrangement of characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The liquid crystal display device 1900 repeats a main scan for setting a display state for each pixel in one direction along the pixels and a main scan in a direction intersecting the one direction, sequentially from left to right when viewed from the front. It is driven by a sub-scan to be performed. When the drawing data for one line output from the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is input to the liquid crystal display device 1900, one line of drawing data is sequentially displayed from left to right when viewed from the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 as main scanning. Output to each pixel. Then, when the output for one line is completed, the liquid crystal display device 1900 shifts to the line immediately below as a sub-scan, and similarly, when the drawing data for the next line is input, it is based on the drawing data for the next line. As the main scan, the data is sequentially output to one line of pixels from left to right when viewed from the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900.

Further, the liquid crystal display device 1900 has a built-in backlight (cold cathode tube) that is lit by an inverter board 4162 (see FIG. 110).

[3-5. Power system]
Next, the electric power supplied to the pachinko machine 1 will be described. First, the power supply board 851 will be described, and then the power supply supplied to each control board and the like will be described. FIG. 111 is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko machine, and FIG. 112 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 111. Although not shown, the grounds of various boards and the grounds of various terminal boards are electrically connected to the grounds of the power supply board 851.

[3-5A. Power supply board]
The power supply board 851 is electrically connected to the power supply cord, and the plug of the power supply cord is plugged into the power outlet of the island equipment. When the power switch 852 is operated, the electric power supplied from the island equipment is supplied to the power supply board 851, and the pachinko machine 1 can be turned on.

As shown in FIG. 111, the power supply board 851 has a full-wave rectifier circuit 851a, a power factor improvement circuit 851b, a smoothing circuit 851c, a + 5.2V creation circuit 851d, a + 5.25V creation circuit 851e, a + 12V creation circuit 851f, and a + 24V creation. The circuit 851g is provided. The full-wave rectifier circuit 851a full-wave rectifies the AC 24 volt (AC24V) supplied from the island facility and supplies it to the power factor improving circuit 851b. The power factor improving circuit 851b improves the power factor of the full-wave rectified electric power to create DC + 37V (DC + 37V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 37V”) and supplies it to the smoothing circuit 851c. This smoothing circuit 851c removes the input + 37V ripple and smoothes + 37V to make the + 5.2V creation circuit 851d, the + 5.25V creation circuit 851e, the + 12V creation circuit 851f, the + 24V creation circuit 851g, and the payout control board. It is supplied to 4110 and the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872, respectively. The + 5.2V creation circuit 851d creates a direct current +5.2V (DC +5.2V, hereinafter referred to as “+5.2V”) from + 37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 851c.

The +5.25V creation circuit 851e creates DC +5.25V (DC +5.25V, hereinafter referred to as “+5.25V”) from + 37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 851c. The + 12V creation circuit 851f creates DC + 12V (DC + 12V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 12V”) from + 37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 851c. The + 24V creation circuit 851g creates DC + 24V (DC + 24V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 24V”) from + 37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 851c. The voltage created by the + 5.2V creation circuit 851d, the + 12V creation circuit 851f, and the + 24V creation circuit 851g is supplied to the payout control board 4110, and is supplied by the + 5.25V creation circuit 851e, the + 12V creation circuit 851f, and the + 24V creation circuit 851g. The generated voltage is supplied to the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872. The AC24V supplied from the island equipment is supplied to the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 via the power supply board 851 in addition to the full-wave rectifier circuit 851a.

Further, the power supply board 851 includes capacitors BC0 and BC1. The capacitor BC0 is a backup power source for the RAM (main control built-in RAM 4100e) built in the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, and the capacitor BC1 is built in the payout control MPU 4111a of the payout control unit 4111 in the payout control board 4110. It is a backup power supply for RAM (RAM with built-in payout control).

The + 5.2V created by the + 5.2V creation circuit 851d is supplied to the payout control board 4110 and is also supplied to the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110, as will be described later. The + 5.2V supplied to the payout control board 4110 is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 4111a and is also applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM via the diode PD0. The + 5.2V supplied to the main control board 4100 is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and is also applied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM 4100e via the diode MD0.

The negative terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 851 (hereinafter, referred to as “-terminal of capacitor BC1”) is grounded to the ground, while the positive terminal thereof (hereinafter, referred to as “+ terminal of capacitor BC1”). ) Is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control board 4110, and is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 of the payout control board 4110. That is, the electric power from the + 5.2V creation circuit 851d flows toward the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU4111a, and is forwarded by the diode PD0. The current is flowing toward.

In this way, the capacitor BC1 is +5 by the electrical connection method in which + 5.2V created by the + 5.2V creation circuit 851d returns from the payout control board 4110 and the power supply board 851 again. 2V is applied so that it can be charged. As a result, when the power from the + 5.2V creation circuit 851d is no longer supplied to the payout control board 4110, the electric charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is supplied to the payout control board 4110 as the payout VBB. Therefore, the current is blocked by the diode PD0 and does not flow to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU4111a, and the payout control MPU4111a does not operate. It is supposed to be done.

The negative terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 851 (hereinafter, referred to as “-terminal of capacitor BC0”) is grounded to the ground, while the positive terminal thereof (hereinafter, referred to as “+ terminal of capacitor BC0”). ) Is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM 4100e of the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110, and is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 of the main control board 4100. That is, the electric power from the + 5.2V creation circuit 851d flows toward the power supply terminal of the main control MPU4100a, and is forwarded by the diode MD0. The current is flowing toward. In this way, the capacitor BC0 is electrically such that + 5.2V created by the + 5.2V creation circuit 851d returns from the payout control board 4110, the main control board 4100, and the payout control board 4110 again to the power supply board 851. Depending on the connection method, + 5.2V is applied so that it can be charged. As a result, when the power from the + 5.2V creation circuit 851d is no longer supplied to the main control board 4100, the electric charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 4100 as the main VBB. Therefore, although the current is blocked by the diode MD0 and does not flow to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU4100a and the main control MPU4100a does not operate, the stored contents are retained by applying the main VBB to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM 4100e. It has become so.

[3-5B. Voltage supplied to each control board, etc.]
Next, the outline of the voltage supplied to each control board and the like will be described, and then the voltage supplied mainly to the payout control board 4110, the main control board 4100, and the emission power supply board 831 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 111, the three types of voltages of + 5.2V, + 12V, and + 24V created by the power supply board 851 are supplied to the payout control board 4110 and the main control board via the payout control board 4110. It is also supplied to the 4100. Further, four types of voltages of +5.25V, + 12V, + 24V, and + 37V created by the power supply board 851 are supplied to the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872, and the peripheral control board is supplied via the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872. While being supplied to the 4010, three types of voltages, +5.25V, + 12V, and + 24V, among the four types of voltages, are supplied to the peripheral relay terminal board 882. As shown in FIG. 112 (a), the four types of voltages of +5.25V, + 12V, + 24V, and + 37V supplied to the peripheral control board 4010 are + 5.25V, + 12V, and + 12V among the four types of voltages. Three types of voltages of + 24V are supplied to the lamp drive circuit 4160a of the lamp drive board 4160, and various signals such as a lighting signal, a blinking signal, and a gradation lighting signal are output from the lamp drive circuit 4160a to various decorative boards of the game board 4. The four types of voltages are supplied to the drive source drive circuit 4165a of the motor drive board 4165, and a drive signal is output from the drive source drive circuit 4165a to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid of the game board 4. Further, of the four types of voltages, two types of voltages, + 24V and + 37V, are supplied to the liquid crystal display device 1900. The liquid crystal display device 1900 includes a liquid crystal module 1900a whose drawing is controlled and a backlight power supply which is a power source for the backlight of the liquid crystal module 1900a. + 24V is supplied to the liquid crystal module 1900a and + 37V is a backlight. It is supplied to the power supply. On the other hand, three types of voltages, +5.25V, + 12V, and + 24V, which are supplied to the peripheral relay terminal plate 882, are supplied to the door frame base substrate 194 as shown in FIG. 112B. Of the three types of voltages, + 12V is supplied to the + 9V creation circuit 194a to create DC + 9V (DC + 9V, hereinafter referred to as "+ 9V"). The door frame base substrate 194 supplies four types of voltages, including + 9V created by the + 9V creation circuit 194a, to various decorative substrates of the door frame 5 in addition to the three types of voltages.

[3-5C. Voltage supplied to the payout control board]
As shown in FIG. 111, the payout control board 4110 includes a payout control filter circuit 4110a and a power failure monitoring circuit 4110b in addition to the payout control MPU4111a and the like. The payout control filter circuit 4110a is supplied with + 5.2 V from the power supply board 851, and noise is removed from this + 5.2 V. This +5.2V is supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 851 via the diode PD0, and is also supplied to, for example, the payout control MPU4111a of the payout control unit 4111. The power failure monitoring circuit 4110b is supplied with + 12V and + 24V from the power supply board 851, and monitors signs of a power failure or momentary power failure of these + 12V and + 24V. When the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b detects a sign of a power failure or momentary power failure of + 12V and + 24V, it outputs a power failure warning signal to the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 as a power failure warning. This power failure warning signal is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4010 via the main control board 4100, and as shown in FIGS. 112 (a) and 112 (b), the liquid crystal display device 1900 is transmitted via the peripheral control board 4010. While being transmitted to the backlight power supply 1900b of the above, it is also transmitted to the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872, the peripheral side relay terminal board 882, and the door frame base board 194, and is transmitted to the door frame base board 194, and various decorative boards of the door frame 5. And so on.

In addition to the + 12V and + 24V being supplied to the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b, the + 12V is also supplied to, for example, the payout control input circuit 4111e of the payout control unit 4111, and the + 24V is, for example, the payout of the payout control unit 4111. It is also supplied to the motor drive circuit 4111d and the like. Further, the +37 from the power supply board 851 is supplied to the firing power supply board 831 as it is via the payout control board 4110 without being used in the payout control board 4110. The firing power supply board 831 creates a predetermined voltage described later from the supplied + 37V and supplies it to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d of the firing control unit 4120.

[3-5D. Voltage supplied to the main control board]
As shown in FIG. 111, the main control board 4100 includes a main control filter circuit 4100h in addition to the main control MPU 4100a and the like. The main control filter circuit 4100h is supplied with + 5.2 V from the payout control board 4110, and noise is removed from this + 5.2 V. This +5.2V is supplied to the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 851 via the diode MD0, and is also supplied to, for example, the main control MPU4100a. The + 12V from the payout control board 4110 is supplied to, for example, the main control input circuit 4100f, and the + 24V from the payout control board 4110 is supplied to, for example, the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100g.

[3-5E. Voltage supplied to the firing power supply board]
As shown in FIG. 111, the emission power supply board 831 includes a DC / DC converter 831a and an electrolytic capacitor SC0 (capacitance: 4700 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment). The DC / DC converter 831a steps down + 37V from the payout control board 4110 to create a direct current + 35V (DC + 35V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 35V”), and drives the firing solenoid of the firing control unit 4120 on the payout control board 4110. It is supplied to the circuit 4120d.

The negative terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 (hereinafter referred to as "-terminal of electrolytic capacitor SC0") is grounded to the ground, while its positive terminal (hereinafter referred to as "+ terminal of electrolytic capacitor SC0"). Is electrically connected to the + 35V output terminal of the DC / DC converter 831a. That is, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is charged by applying + 35V output from the DC / DC converter 831a. In the present embodiment, the combined current obtained by merging the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor SC0 flows through the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d of the payout control board 4110. It has become. The detailed description will be described later.

[3-6. How to drive the firing solenoid]
Next, a method of driving the firing solenoid 654 will be described. First, the drive system of the firing solenoid 654 will be described, and then the input / output current, the output voltage, the logic of the signal, the waveform, and the like at a predetermined point of the drive circuit will be described. FIG. 113 is a block diagram showing a drive circuit of a firing solenoid, FIG. 114 is a circuit diagram showing a shunt regulator circuit, an amplifier circuit, and an operational amplifier circuit group, and FIG. 115 is a diagram showing characteristics of a DC / DC converter. , FIG. 116 is a timing chart of a predetermined point in the drive circuit of the firing solenoid of FIG. 113.

[3-6A. Launch solenoid drive system]
As shown in FIG. 113, the drive system of the launch solenoid 654 mainly includes a launch control input circuit 4120a, an oscillation circuit 4120b, a launch timing circuit 4120c, a launch solenoid drive circuit 4120d, and a sphere of the launch control unit 4120 on the payout control board 4110. It is composed of a feed solenoid drive circuit 4120e, a DC / DC converter 831a of a firing power supply board 831, an electrolytic capacitor SC0, a power factor improving circuit 851b of the power supply board 851, and a smoothing circuit 851c.

In the launch control input circuit 4120a, when the CR unit 6 is electrically connected to the payout control board 4110 via the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the CR unit 6 receives power (AC24V) from the pachinko machine 1. When a signal to that effect is input and output as a CR connection signal to the firing timing circuit 4120c, and a detection signal from the touch sensor 516 that detects whether or not the palm or finger is touching the rotary handle main body front 506 is input. , Is output to the firing timing circuit 4120c as a touch detection signal, and when the detection signal from the firing stop switch 518 that detects whether or not the launch of the game ball is forcibly stopped by the player's will is input, the firing is stopped. It is output to the firing timing circuit 4120c as a detection signal.

The launch timing circuit 4120c permits or prohibits the launch of the game ball by the launch solenoid 654 based on the CR connection signal, the touch detection signal, and the launch stop detection signal from the launch control input circuit 4120a. Specifically, in the launch timing circuit 4120c, the CR unit 6 is not electrically connected to the payout control board 4110 via the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, so that the CR connection signal is not input. The second case, the case, the touch detection signal tells the 506 in front of the rotating handle body that the palm or finger is not touching, and the launch stop detection signal tells that the launch of the game ball is forcibly stopped. Of the third case, the launch of the game ball by the launch solenoid 654 is prohibited when any one of them is applicable, while the launch of the game ball by the launch solenoid 654 is permitted when all of the cases are not applicable.

A clock signal from the oscillation circuit 4120b is input to the launch timing circuit 4120c, and when the launch of the game ball by the launch solenoid 654 is permitted, 100 game balls per minute are in the game area based on this clock signal. A firing reference pulse is generated so as to be launched toward 1100 and output to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d, and a ball feeding reference pulse obtained by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number (5 times in this embodiment) is generated. Output to the feed solenoid drive circuit 4120e. The firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d drives the firing solenoid 654 of the ball launching device 650 by a combined current obtained by merging the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0. On the other hand, the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120e drives the ball feed solenoid 585 by + 24 V from the power supply board 851.

The firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d is mainly composed of a shunt regulator circuit 4121a, an amplifier circuit 4121b, a voltage comparison circuit 4121c, and a switching circuit 4121d. The shunt regulator circuit 4121a is supplied with + 5.2V created by the + 5.2V creation circuit 851d of the power supply board 851, and is stabilized DC + 2.5V (DC + 2.5V, hereinafter, "" from this + 5.2V. It is described as "+ 2.5V") and supplied to the amplifier circuit 4121b.

As shown in FIG. 114 (a), the shunt regulator circuit 4121a mainly includes a shunt-type regulated power supply circuit PIC0. The shunt-type regulated power supply circuit PIC0 has reduced temperature drift due to the ambient temperature, and can create and supply a stabilized power supply that is maintained at a constant voltage with respect to the load. The REF terminal, which is the reference voltage input terminal of the shunt-type regulated power supply circuit PIC0, and the K terminal, which is the cathode terminal, are electrically connected to + 5.2V via the resistor PR2, and are connected to the REF terminal by this resistor PR2. The input current is limited. The K terminal outputs + 2.5V to the amplifier circuit 4121b. This + 2.5V is smoothed by removing ripples (AC components folded by the voltage) by the capacitor PC0 grounded to the ground (the capacitor PC0 also plays a role as a low-pass filter). The A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the shunt-type regulated power supply circuit PIC0, is grounded to ground (GND).

Returning to FIG. 113, the amplifier circuit 4121b doubles the +2.5 from the shunt regulator circuit 4121a to create a direct current + 5.0V (DC + 5.0V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 5.0V”). It is supplied to the rotation position detection sensor 512 in the handle device 500 via the main relay terminal plate 880 and the handle device relay board 192.

As shown in FIG. 114 (a), the amplifier circuit 4121b mainly comprises the operational amplifier PIC1. The operational amplifier PIC1 is configured as a non-inverting amplifier circuit, and + 2.5V from the shunt type stabilized power supply circuit PIC0 of the shunt regulator circuit 4121a is applied to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC1, and the operational amplifier PIC1 The other end of the resistor PR4 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR3 whose one end is grounded to the ground, and the other end of the resistor PR4 whose one end is electrically connected to the output terminal of the operational amplifier PIC1. Is electrically connected to. The resistance values of the resistors PR3 and PR4 are set so that the amplification factor (flat loop gain) of the operational amplifier PIC1 is doubled. The output terminal of the operational amplifier PIC1 is + 5.0V, which is obtained by doubling the + 2.5V applied to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC1, as described above, the main relay terminal board 880, and the handle. It is supplied to the rotation position detection sensor 512 in the handle device 500 via the device relay board 192. This + 5.0V is smoothed by removing ripples (AC components folded by the voltage) by the capacitor PC2 grounded to the ground (the capacitor PC2 also plays a role as a low-pass filter). The + 24V input to the power supply terminal of the operational amplifier PIC1 is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor PC1 grounded and grounded.

Returning to FIG. 113, the rotation position detection sensor 512 is a three-terminal variable resistor, one fixed terminal at both ends is supplied with + 5.0 V from the amplifier circuit 4121b described above, and the other fixed terminals at both ends are handles. It is electrically connected to the resistor PR0 of the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d in the payout control board 4110 via the device relay board 192 and the main relay terminal board 880. The other end of the resistor PR0 is grounded to ground. From the variable terminals, which are terminals different from the fixed terminals at both ends of the rotation position detection sensor 512, the divided voltage of the voltage applied to both ends can be taken out according to the variable resistance value. The voltage taken out from the variable terminal of the rotation position detection sensor 512 is passed through the handle device relay board 192 and the main relay terminal board 880, and the resistors PR5 and PR6 described later in the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d of the payout control board 4110 (FIG. The voltage is divided by 114 (b)), and the voltage taken over by the divided resistor PR6 is applied to the voltage comparison circuit 4121c as the emission intensity target voltage.

As described above, the voltage taken out from the variable terminal of the rotation position detection sensor 512 of the handle device 500 is passed through the handle device relay board 192 and the main relay terminal plate 880, as shown in FIG. 114 (b). Ripple (AC component folded by voltage) is removed and smoothed by the grounded and grounded capacitor PC3 (the capacitor PC3 also serves as a low-pass filter), and the firing solenoid of the payout control board 4110. It is applied to a group of operational amplifier circuits configured as a voltage follower of the drive circuit 4120d. As shown in FIG. 114 (b), this operational amplifier circuit group mainly includes an operational amplifier PIC2 in the first stage and an operational amplifier PIC3 in the latter stage. The voltage from the handle device 500 is a voltage on the order of bolts and is applied to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the first stage operational amplifier PIC2. The inverting input terminal (− terminal) of the first-stage operational amplifier PIC2 is electrically connected to the output terminal of the first-stage operational amplifier PIC2. The output terminal of the operational amplifier PIC2 in the first stage doubling the voltage applied to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC2, that is, outputs the voltage as it is on the order of bolts. Although the first-stage operational amplifier PIC2 simply outputs the input voltage, which is a voltage on the order of bolts, the first-stage input side circuit for applying the voltage from the handle device 500 and the voltage are output to the subsequent-stage operational amplifier PIC3. The circuit is separated from the first stage output side circuit for this purpose. As a result, the voltage can be transmitted as a signal from the first-stage input side circuit to the first-stage output side circuit, and the influence of the first-stage output side circuit can be eliminated from the first-stage input side circuit. The + 24V input to the power supply terminal of the operational amplifier PIC2 is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor PC4 grounded to the ground.

The output terminal of the operational amplifier PIC2 in the first stage is electrically connected to one end of the resistor PR5 in addition to its own inverting input terminal (-terminal), and the other end of the resistor PR5 is the non-inverting input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC3 in the subsequent stage. It is electrically connected to the + terminal). The non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC3 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR6 whose one end is grounded to the ground in addition to the other end of the resistor PR5. As a result, the voltage from the output end of the first stage operational amplifier PIC2 is the voltage of the bolt order because the input voltage, which is the voltage of the bolt order, is simply output as it is, and is divided by the resistors PR5 and PR6. The voltage that is compressed and the voltage divided by the divided resistor PR6 is applied to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC3 in the subsequent stage as a voltage on the order of millivolts. The inverting input terminal (− terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC3 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the output terminal of the operational amplifier PIC3 in the subsequent stage. The output terminal of the operational amplifier PIC3 in the subsequent stage is the voltage applied to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC2, that is, the voltage on the order of millivolts is output to the voltage comparison circuit 4121c as the emission intensity target voltage. To do. The operational amplifier PIC3 in the subsequent stage simply outputs the input voltage, which is the voltage handled by the millivolt-order resistors PR6 divided by the resistors PR5 and PR6, but the millivolt-order resistors divided by the resistors PR5 and PR6. The circuit separation between the post-stage input side circuit for applying the voltage handled by the PR6 and the post-stage output side circuit for outputting the voltage to the voltage comparison circuit 4121c is realized. As a result, the voltage can be transmitted as a signal from the rear-stage input side circuit to the rear-stage output side circuit, and the influence of the rear-stage output side circuit can be eliminated from the rear-stage input side circuit. The + 24V input to the power supply terminal of the operational amplifier PIC3 is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor PC5 grounded to the ground.

Returning to FIG. 113, the current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 of the ball launching device 650 flows through the resistor PR1 whose one end is grounded to the ground, and the voltage on the order of millivolts taken over by this resistor PR1 is used as the firing control voltage in the voltage comparison circuit. It is applied to 4121c. A firing intensity target voltage, which is a voltage on the order of millivolts described above, is also applied to the voltage comparison circuit 4121c. As described above, the launch control voltage and the launch intensity target voltage to be compared by the voltage comparison circuit 4121c are resistance from the voltage on the order of bolts to the voltage on the order of millivolts on the payout control board 4110 (launch solenoid drive circuit 4120d) as described above. The voltage is stepped down by the voltage that PR1 and PR6 are in charge of. That is, since the wiring pattern is applied via the wiring pattern formed on the payout control board 4110, this wiring pattern is not easily affected by noise, and the voltage comparison circuit 4121c has a voltage on the order of millivolts to control the emission control voltage and the emission intensity target voltage. On the other hand, between the board devices of the payout control board 4110 and the ball launching device 650, and between the board devices of the payout control board 4110 and the handle device 500, electrical is performed via wiring. Since it is connected to, the wiring is easily affected by noise, and the influence of noise between the board devices is suppressed by setting the voltage to the order of bolts.

The voltage comparison circuit 4121c is an inverting circuit that compares the magnitude of the emission control voltage and the emission intensity target voltage, and outputs the comparison result to the switching circuit 4121d. The comparison result by the voltage comparison circuit 4121c is a logical output of HI or LOW, and when the launch control voltage is larger than the launch intensity target voltage, it becomes LOW (hereinafter, referred to as “L”), while the launch control voltage. When is smaller than the emission intensity target voltage, it becomes HI (hereinafter, referred to as "H"). As described above, since the output logic is H or L depending on the comparison result by the voltage comparison circuit 4121c, the output signal is input to the switching circuit 4121d as an ON / OFF signal.

The switching circuit 4121d receives the current from the DC / DC converter 831a provided in the firing power supply board 831 according to the ON / OFF signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4121c each time the firing reference pulse from the firing timing circuit 4120c is input. The combined current obtained by combining the current generated by the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 and the combined current is passed through the firing solenoid 654 of the ball launching device 650. Specifically, when the ON signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4121c is input, the switching circuit 4121d generates a merged current in which the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 are merged. While flowing through the firing solenoid 654, when an OFF signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4121c is input, the current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 is cut off. That is, in the switching circuit 4121d, the ON signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4121c is input, and the combined current obtained by merging the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is sent to the firing solenoid 654. When the voltage divided by the resistor PR1 becomes larger than the firing intensity target voltage as the firing control voltage of the current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 while flowing, the output logic of the voltage comparison circuit 4121c becomes L and is turned off. The signal is output to the switching circuit 4121d, and the switching circuit 4121d cuts off the constant current flowing through the firing solenoid 654. Due to this interruption, the current does not flow through the firing solenoid 654, so that the firing control voltage becomes smaller than the firing intensity target voltage, the output logic of the voltage comparison circuit 4121c becomes H again, the ON signal is output to the switching circuit 4121d, and the switching circuit. As described above, the 4121d causes a merged current in which the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 are merged to flow through the firing solenoid 654. In this way, the switching circuit 4121d generates the combined current in which the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 are combined according to the ON / OFF signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4121c. The switching circuit 4121d self-excitedly oscillates the ON / OFF signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4121c to flow the current to the firing solenoid in order to allow the current to flow to the voltage comparison circuit and cut off the constant current. That is, the switching circuit 4121d functions as a "self-excited oscillation constant current circuit", and brings the emission control voltage closer to the emission intensity target voltage. As a result, the rotary handle main body front 506 is rotated and the firing solenoid 654 is driven with a firing intensity commensurate with the rotation position of the rotary handle main body front 506 to launch the game ball toward the game area 1100.

When the player touches the rotary handle body front 506 and is in the original rotation position where the rotary handle body front 506 is not rotating, the voltage taken out from the variable terminal of the rotation position detection sensor 512 is applied to the resistor PR0. The voltage is applied to the operational amplifier circuit group configured as the voltage follower described above, and is applied to the voltage comparison circuit 4121c as the emission intensity target voltage. In this case, when the ON signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4121c is output to the switching circuit 4121d, the switching circuit 4121d merges the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0. The combined current is passed through the firing solenoid 654. The current output from the DC / DC converter 831a is the minimum output current. The firing intensity of the firing solenoid 654 at this time is at least jumping over the firing rail 660. That is, when the voltage applied to the resistor PR0 is the emission intensity target voltage, the current corresponding to the voltage (the minimum output current output from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 are merged. When the combined current) flows through the firing solenoid 654, the game ball launched by the firing solenoid 654 reaches the game area 1100 along the outer rail 1111 of the game board 4 even if it can jump over the firing rail 660. Therefore, it will be collected by the foul cover unit 540 as a foul ball. In other words, when the voltage applied to the resistor PR0 is applied to the amplifier circuit group configured as the voltage follower and applied to the voltage comparison circuit 4121c as the emission intensity target voltage, the current flowing through the emission solenoid 654 is the minimum current. However, even if this minimum current flows through the firing solenoid 654, all the launched game balls are recovered as foul balls. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball feed solenoid 585 from overlapping with the game ball sent to the launch rail 660, and thus prevent the launch solenoid 654 from launching the overlapping game ball toward the game area 1100. At the same time, it is possible to prevent a load on the firing solenoid 654 and prevent a failure.

In the present embodiment, by adopting the shunt type stabilized power supply circuit PIC0 for the shunt regulator circuit 4121a, the emission intensity target voltage applied to the voltage comparison circuit 4121c is + 2.5V, which is a constant voltage from the shunt regulator circuit 4121a. The + 5.0V amplified by the amplifier circuit 4121b is divided by the rotation position detection sensor 512 of the handle device 500, so that the divided voltage also rotates at the same rotation position of the rotation handle body front 506. When it is held in the position, it is held at a constant voltage without fluctuation. As a result, the switching circuit 4121d causes the launch control voltage to approach the launch intensity target voltage by passing a merged current through the launch solenoid 654 of the ball launching device 650, and rotates when the launch control voltage becomes the same as the launch intensity target voltage. When the rotation position of the front of the handle body 506 is held at the same rotation position, the merged current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 does not fluctuate and a constant current flows. Therefore, the firing solenoid 654 moves the game ball through the game area 1100. The firing intensity to launch toward is the same. Therefore, it is possible to prevent "flying unevenness" of the game ball due to the drive firing of the firing solenoid 654.

Further, in the island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, a game ball circulation system is constructed in which the game balls discharged from the plurality of pachinko machines are polished and supplied to the pachinko machine again. For this reason, the temperature inside the island equipment is extremely high due to the heat generated by polishing the game balls, the heat generated by the collision and friction between the game balls, and the heat generated by the power supply board of the pachinko machine and various electric decorations. In the present embodiment, as described above, by adopting the shunt type stabilized power supply circuit PIC0 for the shunt regulator circuit 4121a, + 2.5V is stabilized even in an environment where heat is trapped in the pachinko machine. It can be output. As a result, the voltage extracted from the variable terminal of the rotation position detection sensor 512, that is, the "fluctuation" of the firing intensity target voltage can be suppressed by suppressing the fluctuation of + 2.5V due to the temperature, and thus this "fluctuation". The voltage comparison circuit 4121c can output a control signal to the switching circuit 4121d without including the voltage of the minute. That is, when the rotation position of the rotation handle main body front 506 is the same rotation position, "unevenness" can be suppressed in the firing intensity of launching the game ball toward the game area 1100, so that "flying unevenness" of the game ball is suppressed. be able to.

[3-6B. DC / DC converter input / output current and output voltage]
Next, the input / output current and the output voltage of the DC / DC converter 831a will be described with reference to FIG. 115 with reference to the input current at the TA point and the output current and the output voltage at the TB point shown in FIG. 113. The TA point is a point for referring to the input current Iin of the DC / DC converter 831a, and the TB point is a point for referring to the output current Iout and the output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a. The output voltage Vout is a potential difference from the ground.

First, the relationship between the output voltage Vout at the TB point and the output current Iout is such that the output current Iout increases as the output voltage Vout decreases from + 35V, as shown in FIG. 115 (a). Specifically, in the section A where the output voltage Vout is from + 35V to + 30V, the output current Iout is constant at about 360mA, and in the section B where the output voltage Vout is from + 30V to + 20V, the output decreases as the output voltage Vout decreases. In section C where the current Iout increases by about 40mA from 360mA to 400mA and the output voltage Vout increases from + 20V to + 10V, the output current Iout increases by about 260mA from 400mA to 660mA and the output voltage Vout increases by about + 10V as the output voltage Vout decreases. In the section D from to + 5V, the output current Iout increases by about 350mA from 660mA to 1010mA as the output voltage Vout decreases. The output current Iout is approximately 1010 mA in the vicinity of + 5 V to zero V.

As shown in FIG. 115 (b), the relationship between the input current Iin at the TA point and the output current Iout at the TB point is that as the output voltage Vout decreases from + 35V, the input current Iin decreases and the output current Iout increases. It is a relationship. Specifically, in the section A where the output voltage Vout is from + 35V to + 30V, the output current Iout is constant at about 360mA, while the input current Iin is reduced by about 80mA from 400mA to 320mA. In this section A, when the current corresponding to the rotation position of the rotation handle main body 506 flows through the firing solenoid 654 and the input current Iin is larger than the output current Iout, the game ball launched toward the game area 1100 is still a game. While the firing intensity is difficult to reach the region 1100, the game is played when the current corresponding to the rotation position of 506 in front of the rotating handle body flows through the firing solenoid 654 and the input current Iin becomes smaller than the output current Iout. The firing intensity is such that the game ball launched toward the area 1100 reaches the game area 1100. In the section B where the output voltage Vout is from + 30V to + 20V, the output current Iout increases by about 40mA from 360mA to 400mA, while the input current Iin decreases by about 60mA from 320mA to 260mA, which is compared with the output current Iout. The input current Iin is completely reduced. In the section C where the output voltage Vout is from + 20V to + 10V, the output current Iout increases by about 260mA from 400mA to 660mA, while the input current Iin decreases by about 50mA from 260mA to 210mA, which is the same as in section B. , The input current Iin is completely smaller than the output current Iout. In the section D where the output voltage Vout is from + 10V to + 5V, the output current Iout increases by about 350mA from 660mA to 1010mA, while the input current Iin decreases by about 35mA from 210mA to 175mA, and the section B and the section Similar to C, the input current Iin is completely smaller than the output current Iout.

When the value of the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a is 360 mA, the combined current obtained by merging this 360 mA and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is the minimum current, that is, the player is in front of the rotating handle body. The value of the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a is 1010 mA, whereas the current flows through the firing solenoid 654 when the 506 is touched and the 506 in front of the rotating handle body is not rotated at the original rotation position. At one time, the combined current obtained by combining this 1010 mA and the current generated by the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is the maximum current, that is, the player touches the rotary handle main body front 506 and rotates the rotary handle main body front 506 clockwise. This is the current that flows through the firing solenoid 654 when it is in the limit rotation position. As described above, the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a has a minimum output current value of 360 mA and a maximum output current value of 1010 mA. When the value of the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a exceeds 1000 mA, the firing intensity of the firing solenoid 654 is such that the gaming ball that has already jumped out into the gaming region 1100 along the outer rail 1111 collides with the abutting portion 1114. Then, it rolls downstream along the inner peripheral rail 1113, and is strong enough to be collected at the out port 1151 without entering various winning openings. Therefore, the range in which the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a can be taken when the player rotates the rotary handle main body 506 clockwise to play the game is larger than 360 mA and smaller than 1000 mA. (360 mA <output current Iout value <1000 mA), which is a current on the order of milliamperes.

[3-6C. Relationship between input / output current and output voltage of DC / DC converter and emission reference pulse from emission timing circuit]
Next, at the constant rotation position of 506 in front of the rotation handle main body, the output current Iout and the output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a at the TB point, the emission reference pulse T0 from the emission timing circuit 4120c, and the emission reference pulse T0 at the TB point. Will be described with reference to FIG. 116. As described above, the TB point is a point for referring to the output current Iout and the output voltage Vout (potential difference from the ground) of the DC / DC converter 831a, and the TC point is the emission reference pulse from the emission timing circuit 4120c. This is a point for referring to T0.

As described above, the launch reference pulse T0 from the launch timing circuit 4120c allows 100 game balls per minute, that is, 100 game balls per 60,000 ms toward the game area 1100 when the launch of the game balls by the launch solenoid 654 is permitted. Since it is set to be launched, the pulse width is 30 ms and the period T is 600 ms, as shown in FIG. 116 (a).

Here, the DC / DC in the case where the player touches the rotary handle main body front 506 and rotates the rotary handle main body front 506 to reach the limit rotation position and the non-rotating original rotation position. The waveform of the output voltage Vout of the converter 831a will be described.

When the firing reference pulse T0 from the firing timing circuit 4120c is input to the switching circuit 4121d of the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d when the rotation handle main body front 506 is in the limit rotation position, it is shown in FIGS. 116 (b) and 116 (c). As described above, the combined current obtained by merging the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor SC0 becomes the above-mentioned maximum current and begins to flow to the firing solenoid 654 (timing t0). ). When this maximum current is flowing through the firing solenoid 654, the voltage of the DC / DC converter 831a (voltage of the electrolytic capacitor SC0) drops to + 5V according to the characteristics of the DC / DC converter 831a shown in FIG. 116, and the DC / DC converter The value of the output current Iout of 831a is 1010 mA, which is the maximum output current described above. Then, when the input is stopped 30 ms after the input of the emission reference pulse T0, the discharge proceeds until the output voltage of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 reaches the vicinity of zero V (timing t1). By cutting off the maximum current to the firing solenoid 654, the output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a gradually recovers to + 35V. Along with this, charging of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is started according to the characteristics of the DC / DC converter 831a. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 115, the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a has a characteristic that the output voltage Vout is small, while the output current Iout is large. Immediately after the maximum current is cut off, the output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a, that is, the output voltage of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is near zero V, and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a. Charging is started by a certain current of 1010 mA, and when the output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a recovers to around + 35 V, charging is continued by a current of 360 mA, and then charging is completed. This charging is already completed by the time the next emission reference pulse T0 is input (timing t2). That is, charging is completed within a period of 570 ms from the input of the current emission reference pulse T0 to the input of the next emission reference pulse T0 30 ms later.

On the other hand, when the rotation handle main body front 506 is in the original rotation position, when the emission reference pulse T0 from the emission timing circuit 4120c is input to the switching circuit 4121d of the emission solenoid drive circuit 4120d, FIG. As shown in (d), the combined current obtained by merging the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor SC0 becomes the above-mentioned minimum current and becomes the firing solenoid 654. It starts to flow (timing t0). When this minimum current is flowing through the firing solenoid 654, the voltage of the DC / DC converter 831a (voltage of the electrolytic capacitor SC0) drops slightly according to the characteristics of the DC / DC converter 831a shown in FIG. 116, but is shown in FIG. 115. The value of the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a is 360 mA, which is the above-mentioned minimum output current. Then, when the input is stopped 30 ms after the input of the emission reference pulse T0, the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is slightly advanced (timing t1). By cutting off the minimum current to the firing solenoid 654, the output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a gradually recovers to + 35V. Along with this, charging of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is started according to the characteristics of the DC / DC converter 831a. Specifically, the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a has a characteristic that the output voltage Vout is small, but the output current Iout is large, as described above. Immediately after the minimum current is cut off, the output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a, that is, the output voltage of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 drops slightly, but belongs to section A, and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is the output of the DC / DC converter 831a. Charging is started by a current of 360 mA, which is the current Iout, and then charging is completed. This charging is already completed by the time the next emission reference pulse T0 is input (timing t2). That is, charging is completed within a period of 570 ms from the input of the current emission reference pulse T0 to the input of the next emission reference pulse T0 30 ms later.

In this way, even if the maximum current and the minimum current flow through the firing solenoid 654, due to the characteristics of the DC / DC converter 831a, the charge that the electrolytic capacitor SC0 was discharged within the discharge time of 30 ms when the current firing reference pulse T0 was input. Can be completed within the remaining charging time of 570 ms until the next emission reference pulse T0 is input.

Here, consider a case where the DC / DC converter 831a independently applies a current to the firing solenoid 654 in a state where the electrolytic capacitor SC0 does not exist within the period from the input of the firing reference pulse T0 to the elapse of 30 ms. As a result, in this control method, the current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 by the DC / DC converter 831a alone is about 2A to 3.5A, so that this current is supplied from the power supply board 851. When driving the firing solenoid 654, a large current larger than 2A to 3.5A flows instantaneously. Then, every time the emission reference pulse T0 of 30 ms is generated in the cycle T of 600 ms, the load on the power supply board also increases in each cycle T. That is, since the power supply board supplies a predetermined current to electronic parts, lighting used for decoration, etc. in addition to the instantaneous large current that flows when the firing solenoid 654 is driven, the total electric power of these is If the upper limit of the power supply is exceeded, the power supply will be cut off for safety.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the DC / DC converter 831a independently drives the firing solenoid 654 in the absence of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 in a period of 30 ms, which is the pulse width after the firing reference pulse T0 is input. The ampere-order current supplied from the + 37V DC power supply of the power supply board 851 to the DC / DC converter 831a is extended to a period of 600 ms from the input of the emission reference pulse T0 to the input of the next emission reference pulse T0. , A milliamper-order "first current" supplied to the DC / DC converter 831a from the + 37V DC power supply of the power supply board 851 when the firing solenoid 654 is driven by the combined current of the DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0. And, when the electrolytic capacitor SC0 charges the power from the DC / DC converter 831a, it is distributed to the "second current" on the order of milliamps supplied from the DC power supply of + 37V of the power supply board 851 to the DC / DC converter 831a. can do. As a result, after the emission reference pulse T0 is input in the absence of the electrolytic capacitor SC0, the ampere order is supplied to the DC / DC converter 831a from the + 37V DC power supply of the power supply board 851 during the period of 30 ms, which is the pulse width. The current is transferred from the + 37V DC power supply of the power supply board 851 to the DC / DC converter 831a in the period of 600ms from the input of the emission reference pulse T0 to the input of the next emission reference pulse T0 in the presence of the electrolytic capacitor SC0. It can be averaged by the "first current" and "second current" of the milliampere order supplied. Therefore, the load for supplying a momentary large current by driving the firing solenoid 654 can be eliminated from the power supply board 851. Further, it is possible to eliminate the time spent designing the operating conditions of the safety device when the power supply board 851 is overloaded.

[3-6D. Relationship between launch reference pulse from launch timing circuit and ball feed reference pulse]
Next, the launch reference pulse T0 from the launch timing circuit 4120c and the ball feed reference pulse T1 will be described with reference to FIG. 116. As described above, the TC point is a point for referring to the launch reference pulse T0 from the launch timing circuit 4120c, and the TD point shown in FIG. 113 refers to the ball feed reference pulse T1 from the launch timing circuit 4120c. It is a point to do.

The ball feed reference pulse T1 is set to 150 ms (= T0 (30 ms) × 5), which is five times the launch reference pulse T0 of 30 ms. When the firing reference pulse T0 is input to the switching circuit 4121d of the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d, the ball feeding reference pulse T1 is driven by the ball feeding solenoid of the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d as shown in FIGS. It is input to the circuit 4120e (timing t0, 150 ms later, the input is stopped (timing t3). As a result, the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven to control the ball feed by the ball feed solenoid 585. As a result, the set of the game ball to be launched next can be completed before the next launch reference pulse T0 is input, and each time the launch reference pulse T0 is input, the game ball is moved to the game area 1100. Can be launched continuously toward.

[3-7. Control processing on the main control board]
Next, an example of the control process executed on the main control board 4100 (particularly the main control MPU 4100a) will be described with reference to FIGS. 117 to 129. FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing an example of main processing by the main control board 4100. FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing an example of processing when a power failure occurs. FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing. FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing an example of special control processing. FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing a starting port winning process. FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start processing. FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing an example of the fluctuation pattern setting process. FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing an example of processing during fluctuation.

Further, FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot game start process. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing an example of the small hit game start process. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot game process. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing an example of the small hit game process. The timer interrupt process is executed at a predetermined timing (every 4 ms in this embodiment) by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100. FIG. 129 is an explanatory diagram showing a table configuration in the random number storage means for a special symbol.

In the main process, as shown in FIG. 117, when the supply of electric power to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the main control MPU4100a executes the power-on process (step S1). In this power-on processing, it is determined whether the backup data stored in the RAM 4100e is normal (whether it is the set value at the time of power failure), and if it is normal, according to the backup data stored in the RAM 4100e. Execute the process to return to the state at the time of power failure (process at the time of power recovery), and if the backup data is abnormal, clear the RAM 4100e and set the device around the CPU (normal initial setting, interrupt timing setting, etc.) Do.

If the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped during the game, the current game state is stored in the RAM 4100e as backup data. Further, if the RAM clear switch 4100c instructing the clear of the backup data stored in the RAM 4100e is turned on in the power-on processing, the RAM 4100e is cleared and the normal initial setting is performed. Further, in the power-on processing, if the backup data is not saved in the RAM 4100e of the main control board 4100, the RAM 4100e is cleared and the normal initial setting is performed.

Further, in the power-on processing, a process of setting the peripheral control unit 4140 to a power-on command indicating that the main control board 4100 has been started when the normal initial setting is executed is also executed. The power-on command notifies the peripheral control unit 4140 that the main control board 4100 has started. Even when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped (when the power is turned off) when the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed is closed, the backup data is stored in the RAM 4100e, and the power to the pachinko machine 1 is again stored. When the supply is started, the power-on processing is executed.

When the power-on processing is completed, the main control MPU4100a starts a loop processing for repeatedly executing each processing for the game. At the start of this loop processing, the main control MPU4100a first determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been detected (step S2). In this embodiment, the power supply voltage used in the pachinko machine 1 is generated by the power supply board 851. That is, since the plurality of types of devices mounted on the pachinko machine 1 operate at different power supply voltages, the power supply voltage supplied to the pachinko machine 1 from the external power supply is converted into a predetermined power supply voltage by the power supply board 851. It is supplied to each device. Then, when a power failure occurs and the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the power supply board 851 becomes equal to or lower than a predetermined power supply voltage, a power failure notice indicating that the power supply voltage supply from the power supply board 851 to the main control board 4100 is stopped is stopped. A signal is transmitted. Then, when the power failure warning signal is detected by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100 in step S2, the power failure occurrence processing is executed (step S4).

In this power failure processing, when the power supply voltage (24V in this embodiment) supplied to the power supply board 851 after a power failure is restored (hereinafter referred to as power recovery), the operation of the gaming machine is performed before the power failure. This is a process of storing the state at the time of power failure in the RAM 4100e as backup data in order to start from the state. The details of the processing will be described later, but in this embodiment, as shown in the figure, the processing at the time of power failure is not an interrupt processing but a branch processing executed immediately after the start of the loop depending on whether or not a power failure warning signal is detected. It is incorporated in the main process (main control process).

By the way, when the power failure warning signal is not detected in step S2, that is, when the power from the external power source is normally supplied, the random number update process 2 for updating various random numbers used in the game is performed (step). S3). The random number updated in the random number update process 2 will be described later.

Next, as shown in FIG. 118, the power outage occurrence process is a process executed when a power failure warning signal is detected in the main process. The main control MPU4100a first sets the interrupt prohibition setting so that the interrupt process is not executed (step S4a). Then, the checksum of the RAM 4100e is calculated and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 4100e (step S4b). This checksum is used to check whether or not the contents of the RAM 4100e before the power failure are retained at the time of power recovery.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a sets a default value indicating that the power failure occurrence processing has been performed in the backup flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 4100e (step S4c). After completing the above processing, the main control MPU4100a prohibits access to the RAM4100e (step S4d), enters an infinite loop, and prepares for stopping the power supply. In this process, if the power supply voltage becomes unstable due to a power failure for a very short time (hereinafter referred to as "instantaneous power failure"), the process when a power failure occurs is actually started. Since the power supply voltage is not stopped, there is a possibility that the above process cannot recover from the infinite loop. In order to avoid such an adverse effect, the main control MPU 4100a of this embodiment is provided with a watchdog timer, and is configured to be reset if the watchdog timer is not updated for a predetermined time. The watchdog timer is updated periodically while the processing is normally performed, but the processing starts when a power failure occurs and the update is not performed. As a result, even if the process when the power is cut off occurs due to the momentary power failure and the infinite loop is entered, the reset is performed after a predetermined period of time elapses, and the main control MPU 4100a is started in the same process as when the power is turned on.

Next, in the timer interrupt process, the timer interrupt process is executed every 4 ms by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100 during the execution of the main process. As shown in FIG. 119, the timer interrupt process is mainly executed. The control MPU4100a executes the processing of steps S11 to S18 after executing the register save processing (step S10). In the switch input process of step S11, a process of monitoring the detection signal of the above-mentioned switch (gate switch, start port sensor, count sensor, general winning switch, etc.) is executed. In the random number update process 1 of step S12, a process of updating various random numbers used in the game is executed. In this embodiment, the random number updated by the random number update process 1 and the random number updated by the random number update process 2 described above are different. The random number will be described later, but the random number updated in the random number update process 2 may also be updated in the random number update process 1. In the payout operation process of step S13, a payout command for instructing the payout of the game ball is set on the payout control board 4110 based on the signal detected in the switch input process (step S11).

Further, in the normal control process of step S14, the normal symbol is changed based on the progress state of the game, and the normal electric accessory (that is, the movable piece 2106 that opens and closes the second starting port 2102 by the starting port solenoid 2105) is controlled. Then, a process of changing the open / closed state of the second starting port 2102 is executed. That is, in step S14, if the time saving function described later is not activated, the normal symbol is fluctuated over a predetermined time (normal fluctuation), and the movable piece 2106 is opened and closed (normally opened and closed) for a predetermined time or a predetermined number of times. However, if the time saving function is activated, the normal symbol is changed for a shorter time than the normal fluctuation (time saving fluctuation), and the movable piece 2106 is opened and closed for a longer time and / or more times than the normal opening and closing. Execute.

In the special control process of step S15, a big hit determination process (process of step S315 described later) for determining whether or not a big hit is performed, or the first special symbol or the first special symbol or the first special symbol is used on the special symbol display 1185, 1186 based on the progress state of the game. The second special symbol is changed and displayed, and the special electric accessory (that is, the opening / closing member 2107 that opens / closes the large winning opening 2103 by the attacker solenoid 2108) is controlled to change the opening / closing state of the large winning opening 2103. To do. Here, in step S15, which is one of the special control processes of step S15, if the probability variation function described later is not activated, the determination process for the jackpot is performed based on the jackpot determination table when the probability variation function is not activated. If the probability fluctuation function is activated, the jackpot determination process is performed based on the jackpot determination table when the probability fluctuation function is activated.

In the output data setting process of the following step S16, a process of outputting a state signal indicating the game state to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, a management computer, etc.), and a drive signal being output to a special figure start storage display (not shown). Perform processing, etc. In the command transmission process in step S17, a process of transmitting an effect command to the peripheral control unit 4140 is executed. Further, in the command transmission process, a process of transmitting the power-on command set in the power-on process (step S1) to the peripheral control unit 4140 when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started is also performed. When the processing of step S11 to step S17 is executed, the register restoration processing (step S18) is executed, and the processing is terminated.

Here, various random numbers updated by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 in the above-mentioned random number update process 1 (step S12) and random number update process 2 (step S3) will be described. In this embodiment, as various random numbers used in the game, a random number for big hit determination and a special symbol used for determining whether or not to generate a big hit game process (including "small hit" described later) (big hit determination). Random numbers for jackpot symbols used for determining the stop symbol of, determining whether or not to make a probability variation jackpot (probability variation determination), and determining the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game processing, and the jackpot game processing is not generated in the jackpot determination. Reach judgment random number used for judging whether or not to make a loss with a reach mode (reach judgment) when it is judged, and the fluctuation display pattern (variation time) of the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display 1185, 1186. Fluctuating display pattern random number (random number for fluctuation time) used to determine, and normal used to judge whether to control the movable piece 2106 that opens and closes the second starting port 2102 to the open state (normal lottery winning judgment) There are random numbers for hit judgment, etc.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the above-mentioned probability variation determination and the determination of the number of rounds (lottery for determining the number of rounds) are performed every time regardless of whether or not it is determined that the jackpot game process is generated in the jackpot determination. However, when it is determined that there is a loss in the jackpot determination, the number of rounds is determined to be 0 rounds. Here, the above-mentioned probability variation determination and determination of the number of rounds may be performed only when it is determined in the jackpot determination that the jackpot game process will be generated. In addition, regardless of whether or not the jackpot game process is determined to be generated in the jackpot determination, the probability variation determination and the number of rounds determination lottery are performed every time, but when it is not determined to generate the jackpot game process, the result of the probability variation determination is And the result of the round number determination lottery may be discarded. The probability variation determination and the lottery for determining the number of rounds using the random numbers for the jackpot symbol are performed when the above-mentioned predetermined cancellation conditions are satisfied (that is, at the same timing as the special lottery).

Further, in this example, a lottery is also performed to determine whether or not to generate a small hit game state using a random number for determining a big hit. In addition, it is also determined whether or not to make a probability fluctuation jackpot (a hit in which the probability of becoming a jackpot is set higher than the normal time when the probability fluctuation function described later is not activated) by using the random number for the jackpot symbol. The variation display pattern of the special symbol may be determined by using the reach determination random number, and the variation display pattern of the decorative symbol whose display is controlled by the liquid crystal display device 1900 may be determined. Here, as the variation pattern, for example, after the variation display of all the symbols is started, the loss variation display pattern in which the mode indicating that the pattern is lost without performing the reach effect is displayed, and the predetermined reach effect is performed. There are a reach loss variation display pattern in which a mode indicating that the item is lost is displayed later, a jackpot variation display pattern indicating that the item is a big hit after a predetermined reach effect is performed, and the like. The above reach effects include a normal reach effect with a relatively short fluctuation time and a low expectation of a jackpot, and a super reach effect with a relatively long fluctuation time and a higher expectation of a jackpot than a normal reach effect. There is.

Of these random numbers, in the random number update process 1, the big hit determination random number related to the occurrence of the big hit game process, the big hit symbol random number, and the normal symbol hit determination random number related to whether or not the movable piece 2106 is controlled to the open state. Update. That is, the random numbers used for the occurrence of the jackpot game process and the determination as to whether or not the movable piece 2106 is controlled to the open state are updated every 4 ms as a predetermined timing. By doing so, the probability of each random number in a predetermined period (probability of determining that the jackpot game process is generated, probability of determining that the movable piece 2106 is controlled in the open state) can be made constant, and the game can be played. It is possible to prevent a person from being in a disadvantageous state. On the other hand, in the random number update process 2, the big hit game process is generated, the reach determination random number not related to the normal lottery, the variable display pattern random number, and the like are updated.

Next, in the special control process, the main control MPU4100a executes the processes from step S20 to step S90 as shown in FIG. 120. In the start port winning process in step S20, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 2101 or the second starting port 2102, and when a winning ball is won, a process of updating the hold state of the lottery is executed. Then, when the predetermined release condition is satisfied, the hold is released and the fluctuation start process of step S30 is performed. The predetermined cancellation condition is satisfied when the jackpot game process is not performed and the special symbol has not changed (when the change of the special symbol ends). The hold state updated in this way is stored in the RAM 4100e. Then, when the predetermined release condition is satisfied, the hold is released and the fluctuation start process of step S30 is performed. The predetermined cancellation condition is satisfied when the jackpot game process is not performed and the special symbol has not changed (when the change of the special symbol ends).

In the change start process of step S30, the number of stored items (number of holds) in each jackpot lottery is confirmed, and if the number of holds (total number of stored items) is not 0, the corresponding change display of the special symbol is started. Make settings. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game processing (profit-giving state) is generated (winning determination means), and when the jackpot game processing is generated, it is determined whether or not it is a probabilistic jackpot. .. In the variation pattern setting process of step S40, the setting related to the variation display of each special symbol and each decorative symbol is performed. Specifically, after determining the variation display pattern of each special symbol and starting the variation display of the special symbol on the special symbol display 1185, 1186, the variation time set corresponding to the variation display pattern. Time to stop) is set in the timer.

In the variable processing in step S50, the timer for which the variable time is set is monitored in the variable display pattern setting process (step S40), and the first special symbol display 1185 or the second special symbol is displayed based on the timer timed out. A process is performed to stop the variable display of the special symbol in the device 1186 (corresponding to the special symbol display 1185, 1186). At this time, if it is determined in the fluctuation start process (step S30) that one of the big hit lottery is to be the big hit game process, the process selection flag is updated to "3", and the small hit game state is set in the same lottery. If the determination is made, the process selection flag is updated to "4", and if the determination to be in the big hit or small hit game state is not made, the process selection flag is updated to "0".

In the jackpot game start process (profit-giving state control means) in step S60, a setting for starting the jackpot game process is made. Specifically, as will be described later, the number of times the opening / closing member 2107 is opened, the opening time, and the like are set according to the type of jackpot. Further, in the small hit game start process in step S70, a setting for starting the small hit game state is made. Specifically, as will be described later, the number of times the opening / closing member 2107 is opened and the opening time of the opening / closing member 2107 in a small hit are set. In the big hit game process of step S80, the big winning opening 2103 is opened, and when a predetermined number of game balls win the big winning opening 2103 or when a predetermined period elapses, the opening / closing member 2107 is closed. Perform processing. Further, if the number of rounds in the jackpot game process has not reached the predetermined number, the process for opening the opening / closing member 2107 is performed again, and when the number of rounds in the jackpot game process reaches the predetermined number, the process selection flag is performed. Is updated to "5". Further, after the number of rounds reaches a predetermined number of times, a process for generating a probability fluctuation state and a time-saving game state is executed (special game state control means).

In the small hit game process of step S90, in order to open the large winning opening 2103 and to close the opening / closing member 2107 when a predetermined number of game balls win the large winning opening 2103 or when a predetermined period has elapsed. Is processed. Although the details will be described later, the opening of the big winning opening 2103 in the small hit game processing is set so that the profit to the player is extremely low as compared with the big hit game processing (step S80). Next, specific processing in steps S20 to S90 will be described.

Next, in the start port winning process, as shown in FIG. 121, first, it is determined whether or not the detection signal is output from the second start port sensor 2109, and the detection signal is output from the second start port sensor 2109. In this case, it is determined that the game ball has won a prize in the second start port 2102 (YES in step S201), and if the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2109 is not output, the game ball is in the second start port 2102. Is determined to have not won a prize (NO in step S201). When it is determined in step S201 that the game ball has won a prize in the second starting port 2102, various random numbers for the second hit lottery (random numbers for big hit determination, random numbers for big hit symbols, etc.) are acquired and provided in the RAM 4100e. It is determined whether or not the value of the second pending number counter is less than 4, which is the upper limit value (step S202). Then, if the second hold number counter is less than 4 in step S202, the second start hold storage process (step S203) and the hold history update process (step S204) are executed. These processes will be described later. If the value of the second hold count counter is 4 in step S202, the second start hold storage process and the hold history update process are not executed.

On the other hand, when the detection signal is not output from the second start port sensor 2109 in step S201 (NO in step S201), or when the value of the second hold count counter is 4 (NO in step S202). Determines whether or not a game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 2101 (step S205). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the detection signal is output from the first start port sensor 3022. When it is determined in step S205 that the game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 2101 (YES), various random numbers for the first hit lottery are acquired, and the value of the first hold number counter provided in the RAM 4100e is the upper limit. It is determined whether or not the value is less than 4 (step S206). Then, if the first hold number counter is less than 4 in step S206, the first start hold storage process (step S207) and the hold history update process (step S208) are executed. If the value of the first hold count counter is 4 in step S206, the first start hold storage process and the hold history update process are not executed.

Subsequently, in the fluctuation start processing, as shown in FIG. 122, first, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is "0", and if it is "0" (YES in step S301), steps S302 and subsequent steps are performed. The process is executed, and if it is not "0" (NO in step S301), the variation start process is terminated. In step S302, it is determined whether or not the values (first start storage number and second start storage number) of the two hold count counters corresponding to the special symbol indicators 2390a and 2390b are both "0". Since the sum of the values in the two hold number counters indicates the number of random number values stored in the storage area of the start storage (random number storage means 4515, 2940 for special symbols (see FIG. 129)), in step S302. If the values of all the hold number counters are both "0" (YES), it is determined that the start conditions for the first winning lottery and the second winning lottery are not satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S317.

On the other hand, if the value of any of the hold count counters is not "0" in step S302 (NO), the start storage transfer process is executed (steps S303 to S311). As shown in FIG. 129 (a), the first special symbol random number storage means 4515 is provided with four storage areas (storage area [1] 4515a to storage area [4] 4515d), and the first start It is associated with each value of the number of memories ("1" to "4"). Further, as shown in FIG. 129 (b), the second special symbol random number storage means 4532 is also provided with four storage areas (storage area [1] 4532a to storage area [4] 4532d). (2) It is associated with each value of the starting memory number ("1" to "4"). Each storage area 4515a to 4515d, 4532a to 4532d has a big hit determination random number storage area 4580 in which a big hit determination random number is stored, and a big hit symbol random number storage area 4581 in which a big hit symbol random number is stored. ..

Then, in the start memory transfer process, first, whether or not the value of the hold number counter (second start memory number) corresponding to the second special symbol display 1186 is "0", that is, the random number storage for the second special symbol It is determined whether or not a random number is stored in the storage area [1] 4532a of the means 4532 (step S303), and if the random number is stored (NO), each storage area of the nth (n is a natural number of 2 or more). Processing to shift various random numbers stored in (storage area [2] 4532b to storage area [4] 4532d) to the n-1st storage area (storage area [1] 4532a to storage area [3] 4532c), respectively. (Step S304) and the process of acquiring a random number related to the second special symbol stored in the storage area [1] 4532a (step S305) are executed. In addition, the special symbol fluctuation flag is set to "1" (step S306), and the process of subtracting "1" from the hold number counter corresponding to the second special symbol (step S307) is executed.

On the other hand, when the random number is not stored in the storage area [1] 4532a of the second special symbol random number storage means 4532, that is, when the value of the hold number counter corresponding to the second special symbol display 1186 is "0". (YES in step S303) is stored in each storage area (storage area [2] 4515b to storage area [4] 4515d) of the nth (n is a natural number of 2 or more) of the first special symbol random number storage means 4515. The various random numbers to be generated are shifted to the n-1st storage area (storage area [1] 4515a to storage area [3] 4515c), respectively (step S308), and are stored in the storage area [1] 4515a. The process of acquiring a random number related to the first special symbol (step S309) is executed. In addition, a process (step S311) of subtracting "1" from the hold number counter corresponding to the first special symbol is executed.

In other words, regarding the first special symbol, when holding it, the value of the hold number counter (first start storage number) is increased by "1" and the extracted random number is used as in the case of the second special symbol. It is stored in the storage area corresponding to the value of the first special symbol, but when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started, only when the second start memory is "0", that is, the first special symbol is used. Only when one process is waiting and the second process by the second special symbol is not waiting, each random number is read from the first storage area "1" 4515a of the first special symbol random number storage means 4515. ing. Then, this control makes it possible to give priority to the second process over the first process.

After that, it is determined whether or not the probability fluctuation function is operating, that is, whether or not it is in the probability fluctuation state with a high probability (step S312), and if it is not in the probability fluctuation state (NO in step S312), when the probability fluctuation is not activated. Select the jackpot determination table, that is, the table in which the probability of becoming a jackpot is set low, while in the case of the probability fluctuation state (YES in step S312), the table at the time of the probability fluctuation operation, that is, the probability of becoming a jackpot is Select a table with a high setting. In this example, the probability of becoming a big hit is set to 1/300 when the probability fluctuation is not activated (that is, when the game is in the normal game state or when the time is shortened), and when the probability fluctuation is activated (that is, when the probability is high). , The probability of becoming a big hit is set to 1/30.

After any table is selected in step S313 or step S314, the random number related to any special symbol acquired in step S305 or step S309 based on the table is a random number corresponding to a big hit (big hit value). ) (Step S315). Then, if it is a big hit value (YES in step S315), the big hit flag is set to "ON" (step S316), and the process proceeds to step S317. On the other hand, if the acquired random number is not a big hit value (NO in step S315), it is determined whether or not the random number is a random number corresponding to a small hit (small hit value) (step S318). Then, if it is a small hit value (YES in step S318), the small hit flag is set to "ON" (step S319), and the process proceeds to step S317. If it is not a small hit value (NO in step S318), the process proceeds to step S317 without going through step S319. In step S317, the processing flag is updated to "1", and the fluctuation start processing is terminated. The ON / OFF state (set state, reset state) of the big hit flag and the small hit flag is stored in the RAM 4100e. Further, the OFF state (reset state) of the big hit flag and the small hit flag means that the value of "0" is set, and the ON state (set state) of the big hit flag and the small hit flag is the value of "1". Is to be set.

Although not shown, in the determination process (process of step S315) for determining whether the acquired random number is a random number corresponding to a jackpot, not only whether or not it is a jackpot, but also when it is a jackpot, the jackpot is hit. It also performs a determination process for the type and a determination process (confidential lottery) as to whether or not to execute the jackpot process in a concealed state so that the result of the round number determination lottery is not known to the player. The determination process for the type of jackpot is the determination process of which of the first jackpot and the second jackpot, which will be described later, is the result of the determination process by the first hit / fail determination means 4506 or the second hit / fail determination means 4528. Is. Therefore, in the determination process of whether or not it is a big hit in step S315, the determination process of whether or not it is a hit when the probability fluctuation function described later is also performed. When the probability variation function is activated, the probability variation jackpot flag is set to "ON" in step S316, and when the probability variation function is not activated, the normal jackpot flag is set to "ON" in step S316.

Further, when the above secret lottery is won, the number of executions (number of rounds) of the round game executed in the jackpot game process is kept secret so that the player does not know until the middle of the jackpot game process, and in step S80. When the jackpot game process is executed and the player loses the secret lottery, the jackpot game process in step S80 is executed after disclosing to the player the number of times the round game is executed in the jackpot game process.

Next, in the fluctuation pattern setting process, as shown in FIG. 123, it is determined whether or not the process flag is "1", and if it is set to "1" in step S317 (YES in step S401), The processing after step S402 is executed, and if it is not "1" (NO in step S401), the variation pattern setting processing is terminated. In step S402, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is "ON", and if it is "ON" in step S316 (YES in step S402), the probability fluctuation jackpot or the probability fluctuation jackpot is based on the acquired random number. It is determined which of the normal jackpots is the jackpot (step S403). Then, when it is determined that it is a probability fluctuation jackpot (YES in step S403), the probability variation jackpot variation display pattern table is selected (step S405), and when it is determined that it is not a probability fluctuation jackpot, that is, a normal jackpot. If it is determined to be (YES), the normal jackpot variation display pattern table is selected (step S407).

On the other hand, in step S402, when it is determined that the big hit flag is not "ON" (NO), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is "ON" (step S408), and it is set to "ON" in step S319. If it is (YES in step S408), the small hit time variation display pattern table is selected (step S409). If the small hit flag is not "ON" (NO in step S408), it is determined whether or not the acquired reach determination random number is a random number (reach value) corresponding to the reach (step S410). ), If it is a reach value (YES in step S410), select the variation display pattern table at the time of loss (step 411), and if it is not the reach value (NO in step S410), the variation display at the time of loss Select a pattern table (step S412).

In this way, when the variable display pattern table is selected in any step, the variable display pattern is based on the variable display pattern table and the variable display pattern random number acquired in either step S305 or step S309. Is determined (step S413). In addition, each variation display pattern includes a variation display pattern of a decorative pattern, an effect display pattern by characters, etc. (collectively referred to as "display effect pattern" below), and a sound effect output together with the display effect pattern. The mode of the sound effect pattern by the music or the music is predetermined.

Next, a selection value is set as an effect command for designating the fluctuation display pattern determined in step S413 (step S414), and a timer provided in the RAM 4100e of the main control board 4100 sets the fluctuation time according to the fluctuation display pattern (this execution). In the form of, the validity period timer) is set (step S415). In step S415, the fluctuation time set in the fluctuation display pattern determined in step S413 is set in the validity period timer.

The variation display pattern command set in step S414 is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 in the command transmission output process. Further, when the variation display pattern command is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission output process, the drive signal is output to the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186, and the variation display of the special symbol is started. Let me.

When the process of step S415 is completed, the output of the stimulus sound effect capable of stimulating the player is obtained as a sound effect that can be output separately from the voice effect pattern predetermined in the variable display pattern. The stimulus sound additional determination process to be involved is performed (step S416). In the stimulus sound addition determination process of step S416, first, it is determined whether or not to output the stimulus sound effect based on whether or not the jackpot flag is ON. In the process of determining whether or not to output the stimulus sound effect, it is determined that when the jackpot flag is ON, the stimulus sound effect is output with a higher probability than when the jackpot flag is not ON. Further, when the jackpot flag is ON, the jackpot flag having a high degree of advantage for the player (for example, the probability variation jackpot flag) is ON, the jackpot flag having a relatively low degree of advantage (for example) It is determined that the stimulus sound effect is output with a higher probability than when the jackpot flag) is ON. Next, when it is determined to output the stimulus sound effect, the degree of loudness of the output stimulus sound effect is determined based on whether or not the jackpot flag is ON. In the process of determining the loudness of the output stimulus sound effect, when the jackpot flag is ON, there is a higher probability that the loudness of the sound is higher than when the jackpot flag is not ON. It is determined that a stimulating sound effect with a high degree is output, and when the jackpot flag is ON, when the jackpot flag with a high degree of advantage for the player (for example, the probability variation jackpot flag) is ON. Is determined to output a stimulating sound effect having a high degree of loudness with a higher probability than when a jackpot flag having a relatively low degree of advantage (for example, a normal jackpot flag) is ON. Then, a command corresponding to whether or not to output the stimulus sound effect and, when outputting the stimulus sound effect, the degree of loudness of the output stimulus sound effect is set as an additional effect command. When the stimulus sound addition determination process is completed in this way, the processing flag is updated to "2" (step S417), and the variation pattern setting process is completed.

In the present embodiment, in addition to the voice effect pattern predetermined by the variable display pattern, a stimulus sound effect that can be stimulated by appealing to the player's hearing is output. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any device that can stimulate the player, such as a mode that stimulates the player by appealing to the visual sense or a mode that stimulates the player by appealing to the tactile sense of the player, may be used. .. For example, as a mode of stimulating by appealing to the player's vision, a flash effect capable of stimulating the player is performed in addition to the display effect pattern predetermined by the variable display pattern. Is equivalent. Further, as a mode of stimulating by appealing to the tactile sensation of the player, in addition to the display effect pattern and the voice effect pattern predetermined in the variable display pattern, for example, a vibration effect of giving vibration to the handle device 500, or a vibration effect This corresponds to a blowing effect that sends wind or the like toward the player's body.

Subsequently, in the variable processing, as shown in FIG. 124, first, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is "2" (step S501), and if it is "2" by step S417 (step S501). Yes), the processes after step S502 are executed, and if it is not “2” (NO in step S501), the changing process is terminated. In step S502, the first special symbol display 1185 or the second special symbol display 1186 determines whether or not the first special symbol or the second special symbol is changing, and if it is changing, the first special symbol is used. It is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the symbol or the second special symbol has timed up (step S503). Then, when the fluctuation time is timed up, that is, when the fluctuation time ends (YES in step S503), the fluctuation is stopped (step S504).

If none of the special symbols have changed (NO in step S502), or if the fluctuation time has not ended (NO in step S503), the special symbols are changing without stopping. End the process.

After stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol in step S504, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is "ON" (step S505), and if the jackpot flag is "ON", the processing flag is updated to "3". (Step S506). On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not "ON" (NO in step S505), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is "ON" (step S507), and if it is "ON", the processing flag is set to "4". (Step S508), and if it is not "ON", the processing flag is updated to "0" (step S509). In this way, after updating the processing flag in any one of step S506, step S508, or step S509, the variable processing is terminated.

Here, although it is not the main process by the main control board 4100, the process when the peripheral control board 4010 receives the effect command and / or the additional effect command transmitted from the main control board 4100 will be described.

Upon receiving the effect command transmitted from the main control board 4100, the peripheral control board 4010 determines that the display effect pattern and the sound effect pattern are executed based on the effect command. Here, the audio effect pattern is output together with the display effect pattern, and is predetermined in accordance with the display effect pattern. Further, it is determined whether or not the peripheral control board 4010 receives an additional effect command in addition to the effect command. When not only the effect command but also the additional effect command is received, it is determined to execute the additional effect separately from the display effect pattern and the voice effect pattern based on the received effect command. When it is decided to execute the additional effect, the stimulus sound effect that can be stimulated by appealing to the player's hearing is executed, and the mode of the stimulus sound effect to be executed is also determined.

By the way, although the stimulating sound production as an additional production can raise the expectation of the player, if it escalate, it may lead to a decrease in the game interest. For example, this corresponds to a case where a loud stimulus sound is produced unnecessarily, or a stimulus sound is suddenly produced at a high volume. In particular, if the result of the lottery is lost but the stimulating sound is frequently produced at a loud volume, the interest is significantly reduced. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the stimulus sound effect is performed by the peripheral control board 4010, the timing at which the stimulus sound effect is started can be grasped in order to encourage the player to prepare the mind. ing. That is, when it is decided to execute the stimulus sound effect as an additional effect, the timing suggestion effect that suggests the start timing of the stimulus sound effect is executed. As a result, the player can prepare for the stimulus sound effect immediately before the stimulus sound effect is executed.

Specifically, the timing suggestion effect includes the above-mentioned first ring group 102, second ring group 103, radial group 104, upper right side group 105, upper center group 106, upper center side group 107, lower group 108, and operation. All groups of group 109, for example, first emit light from the upper central group 106, then additionally emit light from the radial group 104 (while maintaining the emission of the already emitted group (here, upper central group 106)). Radial group 104 is newly emitted), and then the upper right side group 105 is additionally emitted, the upper center side group 107 is additionally emitted, the lower group 108 is additionally emitted, the operation group 109 is additionally emitted, and the first annular group 102 is emitted. It is an effect that the additional light emission of each group is sequentially made, such as the additional light emission and the additional light emission of the second ring group 103. As a result, as the start time of the stimulus sound production approaches, the light emission effect gradually becomes brighter, and the player can grasp that the timing of the start time of the stimulus sound effect is approaching. However, this timing suggestion effect may be an effect in which additional light is emitted in order from the upper side to the lower side of the pachinko machine 1, regardless of the first circular group 102 to the operation group 109. By performing the timing suggestion effect that suggests the start timing of the stimulus sound effect in this way, the player can visually recognize the timing at which the stimulus sound effect is started, and by extension, grasp the start timing of the stimulus sound effect. Is possible.

The timing suggestion effect is controlled so as to emit light in a color corresponding to the degree of stimulation received by the player from the stimulus sound effect. For example, when a stimulus sound effect with a relatively strong degree of stimulation is performed, it emits light in red, and when a stimulus sound effect with a relatively weak degree of stimulation is performed, it emits light in blue. For example, a stimulus effect with a relatively strong degree of stimulation corresponds to the case where a sound having a predetermined volume or higher is output, and a stimulus effect having a relatively weak degree of stimulation corresponds to a case where a sound having a volume lower than a predetermined volume is output. To do. However, even if the volume is the same, if the type of sound is different (for example, if the frequency is different), the degree of stimulation received by the player may be different. Therefore, for example, when a stimulus sound effect in which a sound above a predetermined frequency is output is performed, the sound is emitted in red, and when a stimulus sound effect in which a sound below a predetermined frequency is output is performed, the light is emitted in blue. It may be.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the timing suggestion effect is performed, the player presses the dial operation unit 401 (see, for example, FIG. 59) in the operation unit 400 prior to the execution of the stimulus sound effect. By operating, the player himself can change the degree of loudness of the stimulating sound effect (impact strength changing means). As described above, in the variable display pattern determined based on the effect command transmitted from the main control board 4100, the mode of the display effect pattern and the voice effect pattern is predetermined, but the stimulus sound effect is the effect command. Separately, the mode is determined based on an additional effect command transmitted from the main control board 4100. That is, since the stimulus sound effect is performed in addition to the display effect pattern and the sound effect pattern determined based on the effect command transmitted from the main control board 4100, the display effect and the sound are performed. The player can selectively change the degree of loudness of only the stimulus sound effect among the effect and the stimulus sound effect.

Therefore, for example, when the timing suggestion effect is performed in red, the degree of loudness in the stimulus sound effect can be reduced by operating the dial operation unit 401. Further, for example, when the timing suggestion effect is performed in blue, the degree of loudness in the stimulus sound effect can be increased or decreased by operating the dial operation unit 401. Furthermore, some players prefer to produce a loud stimulating sound, while others dislike it. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the degree of loudness of the stimulus sound effect is determined so that the stimulus sound effect is executed in a mode desired by the player immediately before the stimulus sound effect is started. It becomes possible for the player to decide for himself.

In the above, when the timing suggestion effect is performed, the degree of the loudness of the sound is determined by operating the dial operation unit 401 for only the stimulus sound effect among the display effect, the voice effect, and the stimulus sound effect. Instead of this, when the timing suggestion effect is performed, only the stimulus sound effect of the display effect, the voice effect, and the stimulus sound effect can be changed by the person. By operating the 401, the execution may be selectively prevented (that is, only the stimulus sound effect may be selectively not executed among the display effect, the voice effect, and the stimulus sound effect). ..

However, when the timing suggestion effect is performed, only the stimulus sound effect among the display effect, the voice effect, and the stimulus sound effect is selectively not executed by operating the dial operation unit 401. During this time, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the degree of loudness of the stimulating sound effect. Therefore, when the stimulus sound effect is not executed, the player can visually grasp how loud the stimulus sound effect is when the stimulus sound effect is not executed. , First ring group 102, second ring group 103, radial group 104, upper right side group 105, upper center group 106, upper center side group 107, lower group, depending on the degree of loudness in the stimulation sound production. The light emitting modes in 108 and the operation group 109 are different. Specifically, the greater the degree of loudness in the stimulus sound production, the more the first ring group 102, the second ring group 103, the radial group 104, the upper right side group 105, the upper center group 106, and the upper center side group. Of the 107, the lower group 108, and the operation group 109, the equalizer effect is performed by each of the above groups 102 to 107 so that the number of light emitting groups increases.

From the above, even when the stimulus sound effect is not executed, the degree of loudness of the stimulus sound effect when the stimulus sound effect is not executed can be determined by visually recognizing the above equalizer effect. , Can be grasped to some extent through vision. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player presses the dial operation unit 401 when the degree of loudness of the stimulus sound effect is changed or the stimulus sound effect is not executed. Thereby, the degree of loudness of the stimulating sound effect can be restored to the normal degree. The normal degree is the degree of loudness when neither the change in the loudness of the stimulus sound effect nor the non-execution of the stimulus sound effect is performed. As a result, the player can visually recognize the above-mentioned equalizer effect, and can set the timing for returning the stimulus sound effect to the normal degree.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first ring group 102, the second ring group 103, the radial group 104, the upper right side group 105, the upper center group 106, the upper center side group 107, the lower group 108, and the operation group The light emitting mode of 109 suggests the start timing of the stimulus sound effect, but the present invention is not limited to this as long as it suggests the start timing of the stimulus sound effect in a mode that does not surprise (do not surprise). .. For example, the handle device 500 is vibrated so that the degree of the intensity of the vibration gradually increases, or the wind is sent toward the player's body, and the degree of the intensity of the wind is increased. Corresponds to the mode in which is gradually increased.

Next, returning to the main processing by the main control board 4100, in the jackpot game start processing, as shown in FIG. 125, first, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is “3”, and it becomes “3” in step S506. If yes (YES in step S601), the processes after step S602 are executed, and if it is not "3" (NO in step S601), the jackpot game start process is terminated. In step S602, it is determined whether or not the probability fluctuation function is operating, that is, whether or not it is in the probability fluctuation state. If it is in the probability fluctuation state (YES), the operation of the probability fluctuation function is temporarily stopped, and the process proceeds to step S604. To do. If it is not in the probability fluctuation state, that is, in the normal low probability state (NO in step S602), the process proceeds to step S604 without executing the process of step S603. In step S604, it is determined whether or not the time saving function is operating, that is, whether or not it is in the time saving gaming state, and if it is in the time saving gaming state (YES), the operation of the time saving function is stopped (step S605), and the step. Move to S607. On the other hand, if the game is not in the time-saving game state (NO in step S604), the process proceeds to step S607 without executing the process of step S605.

In step S607, the number of times the opening / closing member 2107 that opens and closes the large winning opening 2103 (the number of rounds), the opening time per opening, and the number of winning limits to the large winning opening 2103 are set. Here, the number of rounds determined by the lottery for determining the number of rounds is set, and the opening time for each round is set to such a time (for example, 30 seconds) that the game balls for the limited number of winnings can be won with a margin. Further, the winning limit number for the large winning opening 2103 is set to, for example, nine. As a result, when the jackpot game process is executed, a large amount of prize balls will be paid out. After that, the processing flag is updated to "5" (step S609), and the jackpot game start processing is completed.

On the other hand, in the small hit game start process, as shown in FIG. 126, first, it is determined whether or not the process flag is "4", and if it is "4" in step S508 (YES in step S701). ), The processing of step S702 and step S703 is executed, and if the processing flag is not "4" (NO in step S701), the small hit game start processing is completed without executing the processing of step S702 and step S703. To do. In step S702, the opening conditions of the large winning opening 2103 in the case of a small hit, that is, the number of times the large winning opening 2103 is opened for the small hit by the opening / closing member 2107, and the opening time per one are set. After that, the processing flag is updated to "6" (step S703), and the small hit game start processing is completed.

Next, in the jackpot game process, as shown in FIG. 127, first, it is determined whether or not the process flag is "5", and if it is "5" in step S609 (YES in step S801). , The processing after step S802 is executed, and if it is not "5" (NO in step S801), the jackpot game processing is terminated. In step S802, it is determined whether or not the large winning opening 2103 is open, and if it is open (YES), the opening time (elapsed time after opening) of the large winning opening 2103 is a predetermined time set in advance. (Step S803), and if it has passed (YES in step S803), the opening / closing member 2107 is operated to close the large winning opening 2103 (step S805).

Even if the set opening time has not passed (NO in step S803), the number of game balls that won the big winning opening 2103 after the big winning opening 2103 was opened was set in step S607. When the limited number (for example, 10) is exceeded (YES in step S804), the process proceeds to step S805 and the large winning opening 2103 is closed. Further, when the opening time of the large winning opening 2103 has not reached the set time (NO in step S803) and the number of winning balls has not reached the limit number (NO in step S804), The jackpot game process ends.

On the other hand, in step S802, if the big winning opening 2103 is not open (NO), whether or not the number of opening of the big winning opening 2103 by the opening / closing member 2107 has reached the number of opening for big hit set in step S607. Is determined (step S806). Then, if it has not reached (NO in step S806), the opening / closing member 2107 is controlled to open the big winning opening 2103 (step S807), and the big hit game process is completed. This makes it possible to make a large number of game balls win in the large winning opening 2103.

When the number of times the big winning opening 2103 is opened reaches the set number of times in step S806 (YES), that is, when the big hit game process is completed, the processes of steps S808 to S813 are executed, and the lottery is performed thereafter. Set the game state for the game. Specifically, first, the jackpot flag is set to "OFF" (step S808), and it is determined whether or not the jackpot this time is a win that activates the probability fluctuation function (step S809). When the probability fluctuation jackpot is won (YES in step S809), the operation of the probability fluctuation function is started, and the probability fluctuation state has a high probability (step S810). That is, the probability that the big hit will be won in the subsequent lottery is set higher than the normal time, and the time saving function is activated until the number of changes of the first special symbol or the second special symbol by the lottery reaches a predetermined number (specified number of times). ..

Then, in the case of a probability fluctuation jackpot (YES in step S809), the operation of the time saving function is started (step S812), and then the processing flag is updated to "0" (step S813). That is, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that fluctuates on the first special symbol display 1185 or the second special symbol display 1186 is shortened, and the opening operation of the movable piece 2106 leads to the second starting port 2102. Make it easier to win a prize than usual.

On the other hand, in the case where the probability fluctuation function is not activated in step S809, that is, in the case of a normal jackpot (NO), the operation of the time saving function is started and the specified number of operations in the time saving function is set (step S815). ), Then, the process proceeds to step S813. That is, the time saving function is operated until the number of changes of the first special symbol or the second special symbol by lottery reaches a predetermined number (specified number of times). Although not shown, when the time saving function is activated a specified number of times, the time saving function is stopped. If the probability variation function is not activated in step S809 (NO in step S809), the time saving function is activated a specified number of times, but the time saving function does not necessarily have to be activated. For example, if it is not a win to activate the probability variation function in step S809 (NO in step S809), it may be set to a normal gaming state in which neither the probability variation function nor the time saving function is activated, or a specific game state may be set. The time saving function is activated only when the conditions are met (for example, when the lottery is won, when the time saving function is activated), and when the specific conditions are not met, the probability fluctuation function and the probability fluctuation function and It may be set to the normal gaming state in which none of the time saving functions is activated.

Next, in the small hit game processing, as shown in FIG. 128, first, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is "6", and if it is "6" in step S703 (YES in step S901). ), The processing after step S902 is executed, and if it is not "6" (NO in step S901), the small hit game processing is terminated. In step S902, it is determined whether or not the number of winnings of the game ball for the large winning opening 2103 has reached the preset maximum winning number (step S902), and if it has not reached the maximum winning number yet (NO). ), It is determined whether or not the large winning opening 2103 is open (step S903). Then, in step S903, when it is determined that the large winning opening 2103 is being opened (YES), the opening time (elapsed time after opening) of the large winning opening 2103 reaches a preset predetermined time. It is determined whether or not this has been done (step S904), and if it has passed (YES in step S904), the opening / closing member 2107 is operated to close the large winning opening 2103 (step S905). After that, it is determined whether or not the number of times the large winning opening 2103 is opened has reached a predetermined number of times (for example, twice) (step S906), and if that number is reached (YES), the processing flag is set to ". It is updated to "0" (step S907), and the small hit game process is completed.

If the opening time of the large winning opening 2103 has not reached the predetermined time in step S904 (NO), or if the number of times of opening has not reached the predetermined number in step S906 (NO), the process of step S907 is executed. The small hit game process is completed without doing so. Further, in step S903, if the large winning opening 2103 is not open (NO), the large winning opening 2103 is opened so that the game ball can be won (step S908). Further, in step S902, when the number of winnings of the game ball with respect to the large winning opening 2103 reaches the preset maximum winning number (YES), it is determined whether or not the large winning opening 2103 is open (step). S909), if it is open (YES), the large winning opening 2103 is closed (step S910), and the process proceeds to step S907. On the other hand, if the large winning opening 2103 is not open (NO in step S909), the process proceeds to step S907 without executing the process of step S910. In step S907, the processing flag is updated to "0".

[3-8. Control processing in the peripheral control unit]
Next, the processing executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control unit 4140 will be described with reference to FIGS. 130 to 134. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing an example of sub-main processing, and FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing an example of 16 ms steady-state processing. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing an example of the command analysis process (step S1100). FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process (step S1200). FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing an example of the decorative symbol variation start processing (step S1210).

In the sub-main process, as shown in FIG. 130, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control MPU4140a performs the initial setting process (step S1001). In this initial setting process, a process of clearing the peripheral control RAM 4140e mounted on the peripheral control unit 4140 is performed. Note that interrupts are prohibited during this initial setting process, and interrupts are permitted after the initial setting process. When the initial setting process (step S1001) is completed, the loop process for monitoring whether or not the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set is started (step S1002).

In this example, the peripheral control MPU4140a generates an interrupt every 2 ms and executes a 2 ms steady process. In the 2 ms steady processing, the process of counting up the 16 ms progress monitoring counter (adding 1 to the 16 ms progress monitor counter) is executed, and when the value of the 16 ms progress monitor counter becomes 8, that is, when 16 ms has elapsed, the 16 ms progress flag is executed. Along with setting T, a process of resetting (setting to 0) the 16 ms progress monitoring counter is executed. As described above, the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set (set) to "1" every 16 ms in the 2 ms steady processing, and is usually set (reset) to "0". When the 16 ms elapsed flag is set in step S1002 (16 ms elapsed flag T is "1"), after resetting the 16 ms elapsed flag (step S1003), 16 ms steady processing is performed (step S1004).

In this 16 ms steady processing, each decorative board 214,216, 254, 256, 286, 320, 322 provided on the liquid crystal display device 1900, the door frame 5 and the game board 4 based on the effect command received from the main control board 4100. , 430, 432, 3014 and the like, and the processes for controlling the door frame 5 and the speakers 130, 222, 262, 821 and the like of the main body frame 3 are executed. When the 16 ms steady processing is completed, the process returns to step S1002 again, and the above-mentioned steps S1003 to S1004 are repeated every time the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set, that is, every 16 ms. On the other hand, when the 16 ms elapsed flag T is not set in step S1002 (16 ms elapsed flag T is “0”), loop processing is performed until the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set.

Next, in the 16 ms steady-state process, the sub-peripheral control MPU4140a executes the processes of steps S1100 to S1600 as shown in FIG. 131. In the command analysis process of step S1100, the effect command received from the main control board 4100 is analyzed. In the effect control process of step S1200, the control process related to the liquid crystal display device 1900 is executed based on the variable display pattern command. Specifically, the notice effect is set, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is determined, and the like.

Further, in the sound control process of step S1300, the control process related to the speakers 130, 222, 262, 821 for generating a sound effect (for example, BGM) that promotes the effect of the effect is executed. In the light emission decoration control process of step S1400, the control process related to the light emission decoration by the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256, 286, 320, 322, 430, 432, 3014 provided on the door frame 5 and the game board 4 is performed. Execute. In the information output process of step S1500, an effect command is transmitted to the lamp drive board 4160. In the random number update process of step S1600, a process of updating the random numbers used for various settings in the effect control process (step S1200) is executed.

The process of steps S1100 to S1600 in the 16 ms steady-state process is completed within 16 ms. Even if it takes 16 ms or more from the start of the 16 ms steady-state process to the end of the 16 ms steady-state process, the 16 ms steady-state process is immediately started from the beginning (in step S1100 described later) 16 ms after the start of the 16 ms steady-state process. Do not execute (from command analysis processing). That is, when 16 ms elapses during the execution of the 16 ms steady-state process, only the 16 ms elapse flag is set, and when it is determined in step S1002 that the 16 ms elapse flag is set after the 16 ms steady-state process is completed, the 16 ms steady-state process is performed. Start.

Further, in this example, the random number update process (step S1600) is executed in the 16 ms steady process to update various random numbers, but the timing (timing) for updating various random numbers is limited to this. is not it. For example, various random numbers may be updated in either or both of the loop processing and the 16ms steady processing in the sub-main processing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 132, the command analysis process first determines whether or not an effect command has been received from the main control board 4100 (step S1101). In this embodiment, when an effect command is received from the main control board 4100, other processing such as 16ms steady processing is interrupted to generate a command reception interrupt processing, and the received command is peripherally controlled by the peripheral control unit 4140. It is saved in the reception command storage area in the RAM 4140e. The reception command storage area is provided with a plurality of areas corresponding to the reception order of the effect commands, and is stored in each area in the command reception interrupt process according to the reception order of the effect commands. In step S1101, the contents of the reception command storage area are confirmed, and if the production command is stored, the production command whose reception order in the reception command storage area is earlier is read (step S1102).

Then, it is determined whether the read effect command is a variable display pattern command (step S1103), and if the read effect command is a variable display pattern command (YES in step S1103), the variable display pattern reception flag is set and the variable display pattern reception flag is set. , It is stored in the variation display pattern storage area in the peripheral control RAM 4140e mounted on the peripheral control unit 4140 (step S1104).

On the other hand, if the read effect command is not a variable display pattern command (NO in step S1103), it is determined whether the read effect command is a probability variation jackpot command (step S1105), and the read effect command is a probability variation jackpot command. If (YES in step S1105), the probability variation jackpot flag is set (step S1106). If the read effect command is not a probability variation jackpot command (NO in step S1105), the flag corresponding to the received effect command is set (step S1107).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 133, the effect control process performs any of steps S120 to S1240 with reference to the value of the process selection flag indicating the progress state of the game.

In the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210) executed when the process selection flag is “0”, a setting is made to start the decorative symbol variation display if the variation display pattern command is received. Specifically, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is determined according to the variable display pattern command and the probabilistic jackpot command, and the advance notice effect and the like are set.

In the decorative symbol variation process (step S1220) executed when the process selection flag is "1", when a variation stop command is received, a display command is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 to stop the variation display of the decorative symbol. Do.

In the jackpot display process (step S1230) executed when the process selection flag is "2", a display indicating the start of the jackpot game process or a jackpot is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 in response to the jackpot start command transmitted from the main control board 4100. Control is performed to display during game processing (for example, round display, etc.).

In the character effect display process (step S1240) executed when the process selection flag is "3", in response to the jackpot type command (command indicating the number of rounds executed during the jackpot game) transmitted from the main control board 4100. Control is performed to display the character effect on the liquid crystal display device 1900 during the jackpot game state. In this character effect display process, when a specific jog effect described later is performed, a specific character effect among a plurality of character effects is displayed. Then, when the jackpot type command transmitted from the main control board 4100 is a specific jackpot command (for example, a command indicating that the most round game is executed among a plurality of types of jackpots), the specific jackpot command is specified. In the character production, the character special production scene described later is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 134, the decorative symbol variation start process first determines whether or not the variation display pattern reception flag is set (step S1221). The variation display pattern reception flag is a flag set in step S1104 of the command analysis process (step S1100) described above, and indicates that the variation display pattern command has been received from the main control board 4100. If the variation display pattern reception flag is not set in step S1221 (NO), it is determined that the variation display pattern command has not been received, and the process ends.

On the other hand, if the variation display pattern reception flag is set (YES in step S1221), the variation display pattern reception flag is reset (step S1222), and the variation display pattern based on the received variation display pattern command causes a big hit. It is determined whether it is a variable display pattern (whether it is a hit pattern) (step S1223a).

If the variation display pattern is not a hit pattern (NO in step S1223a), the stop symbol of the lost symbol is determined (step S1224). If the variable display pattern is a hit pattern (YES in step S1223a), it is determined whether the probability variation jackpot flag is set (step S1223b), and if the probability variation jackpot flag is set (YES), the probability variation jackpot symbol is set. The stop symbol of the non-probability variation jackpot symbol is determined (step S1225), and if the probability variation jackpot flag is not set (NO in step S1223b), the stop symbol of the non-probability variation jackpot symbol is determined (step S1226). Further, the probability variation jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game process is started in the jackpot display process (step S1230). The time when the probability variation jackpot flag is reset is not limited to this. For example, when the variation display of the decorative symbol is stopped in the decorative symbol variation process (step S1220), specifically, it is reset when the variation stop command is received. This may be done, or the jackpot game process may be reset when the jackpot game process is completed in the jackpot display process (step S1230).

In the present embodiment, the first decorative symbol corresponding to the first special symbol 1: 1 and the second decorative symbol corresponding 1: 1 with the second special symbol, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol A common decorative symbol sequence (hereinafter referred to as "common decorative symbol sequence") corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol is displayed in association with both of the above. The first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are composed of a combination of figures such as circles, crosses, and sankaku, and are a combination that is a probabilistic jackpot symbol, a combination that is a non-probabilistic jackpot (normal jackpot), and a combination that is a small hit. , And combinations that are lost are preset. That is, if the variable display pattern is a hit pattern, one of a plurality of combinations set as the probabilistic jackpot symbol of the first decorative symbol or a plurality of combinations set as the non-probabilistic jackpot symbol is stopped. Determined as a design.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU4140a executes the advance notice selection process for determining whether or not to execute the advance notice effect based on the advance notice determination random number (step S1227), and then stores the variation display pattern and the advance notice type storage area. A display command is set according to the advance notice pattern and the stop symbol of the common decorative symbol sequence determined in steps S1225, S122, and S1227 (step S1228). Then, the process selection flag is updated to "1" and the process ends (step S1229). The display command set in step S1228 is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 in the information output process (step S1500), and the liquid crystal display is displayed based on the reception of the display command by the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a of the liquid crystal control unit 4150. The device 1900 starts executing the variable display of the decorative symbol.

Further, when the notice pattern stored in the notice type storage area is read in step S1228, the contents of the notice type storage area are cleared after reading the notice pattern. As a result, it is possible to prevent the advance notice effect based on the notice pattern determined when the change display of the previous decorative symbol is accidentally started in the next change display of the decorative symbol.

[4-1. Functional configuration for games on the main control board]
Subsequently, a functional configuration related to the game such as a special symbol controlled by the main control board will be described with reference to FIGS. 135 to 138. FIG. 135 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration regarding the first winning lottery on the main control board. FIG. 136 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration regarding a second winning lottery on the main control board. FIG. 137 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration regarding an advantageous gaming state generated according to the lottery results in the first winning lottery and the second winning lottery. FIG. 138 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration relating to a normal lottery on the main control board.

As shown in FIG. 135, the main control board 4100 has a first hit determination table 4501, a first hit symbol table 4502, a first hit time variation time setting table 4503, and a first hit time variation time setting table 4503 as configurations related to the first hit lottery. The table 4504 for setting the fluctuation time at the time of the first loss is stored in advance, and based on these tables 4501 to 4504, the winning or failing of the lottery in the first hit lottery, the stop symbol on the first special symbol display 1185, and the fluctuation time Is determined. The first hit determination table 4501 shows the relationship between the big hit determination random value and the hit / fail of the big hit or the small hit, and the winning ratio is different between the normal time and the high probability time. Further, the first hit symbol table 4502 shows the relationship between the big hit symbol random value and the stop symbol on the first special symbol display 1185, and each of the jackpot symbol random values is divided into a plurality of groups. The range is associated with the lighting state of the two LEDs (first special symbol).

In addition, the first hit time fluctuation time setting table 4503 is used when the result of winning or failing in the first hit lottery is a big hit or a small hit, and the first random number for the first fluctuation time and the first special symbol display 1185 are extracted. It shows the relationship with the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the above, and the table 4504 for setting the fluctuation time at the time of the first loss is used and extracted when the result of the success or failure in the first hit lottery is a loss. It shows the relationship between the random number for the fluctuation time and the fluctuation time of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 1185. The first lottery probability selection means 4505 performs a process of selecting one of the normal table and the high probability table based on the gaming state. Further, although not shown, the first hit symbol table 4502 is provided with a table for probability fluctuation big hit, a table for normal big hit, and a table for small hit, respectively. The table corresponding to the winning type determined by the means 4506 is selected.

Further, when the first starting port sensor 3022 detects that the first starting port 2101 has won a prize on the main control board 4100, the first hit determination is performed by extracting a random number for jackpot determination from a random counter (random number generating means). Random number extraction means 4507 and first hit symbol random number extraction means 4508 for extracting big hit symbol random numbers are provided. Further, a first random number extraction means for variable time 4509 is provided, which extracts random numbers for variable time based on random numbers for determination and random numbers for jackpot symbols. Further, when the big hit determination random number is extracted by the first hit determination random number extraction means 4507, the first hit determination means 4506 for determining the success or failure of the jackpot using the first hit determination table 4501 and the first hit symbol. When the random number for the big hit symbol is extracted by the random number extraction means 4508, the first stop symbol determination means 4510 for determining the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 1185 is provided by using the first hit symbol table 4502. There is.

Further, when the random number for the variable time is extracted by the first random number extracting means 4509 and the big hit is determined by the first hit / fail determining means 4506, the first hit time variable time setting table 4503 is used. When the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined, while the random number for the fluctuation time is extracted and it is determined by the first hit / fail determination means 4506 that the first special symbol is lost, the first loss time fluctuation time setting table 4504 The first fluctuation time determining means 4511 for determining the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is provided.

Further, on the main control board 4100, the first special symbol display 1185 starts to fluctuate the first special symbol, and after the variation time determined by the first fluctuation time determining means 4511 elapses, the first stop symbol is determined. The special symbol fluctuation control means 4512 that fluctuates and stops at the stop symbol determined by the means 4510, the pass / fail command regarding the presence or absence of the jackpot determined by the first hit / fail determination means 4506 before the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol, and the first A command transmitting means 4513 for transmitting a control command including a variation display command corresponding to a variation mode (time) of a special symbol is provided.

Further, when the first start port sensor 3022 detects that the first start port sensor 3022 has won a prize in the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the main control board 4100 has a fixed number of balls (4 times). ) Is used as the upper limit, and the first start storage number is counted and stored, and the first hold digestion means 4514 for repeatedly displaying the variation of the first special symbol for the number of start memories is provided. In other words, the first hold digestion means 4514 that waits for the execution of the first process based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port sensor 3022 is provided. Explaining the first reserved digestion means 4514 in more detail, the first reserved digestive means 4514 is provided with the first reserved control means 4514a and the first digestion control means 4514b, and the first reserved control means 4514a is the first. If the first starting port sensor 3022 detects a prize in the first starting port 2101 during the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first starting memory number must reach the upper limit value "4". For example, the value of the first start storage number is increased by "1", the first jackpot determination random number and the first jackpot symbol random number are extracted, and each of the extracted random numbers is stored in the first special symbol random number storage means 4515 ( It is stored in the uppermost storage area in (see FIG. 139).

On the other hand, in the first digestion control means 4514b, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and the fluctuation of the new first special symbol becomes possible, the starting memory number for the first special symbol is ". If it is not "0", the first jackpot determination random number and the first jackpot symbol random number are read from the storage area corresponding to the start storage number [1], the value of the first start storage number is reduced by "1", and the value is reduced. Each random value stored in each storage area n is shifted to the storage area of n-1.

Further, as shown in FIG. 136, the main control board 4100 has a second hit determination table 4521, a second hit symbol table 4522, and a second hit time variation time setting table 4523 as configurations related to the second hit lottery. , And the table 4524 for setting the fluctuation time at the time of the second loss is stored in advance, and based on these tables 4521 to 4524, the winning / failing of the lottery in the second winning lottery, the stop symbol in the second special symbol display 1186, and the stop symbol in the second special symbol display 1186, and The fluctuation time is determined. Since the configuration of each table is the same as the configuration of each table in the first winning lottery, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

Further, on the main control board 4100, the second hit determination random number extraction means 4525 that extracts the big hit determination random number related to the second hit lottery when the second start port sensor 2109 detects that the second start port 2102 has won a prize. And the second hit symbol random number extraction means 4526 that extracts the big hit symbol random number related to the second hit lottery, and the second variable time random number extraction that extracts the variable time random number based on the judgment random number and the big hit symbol random number. Means 4527 and are provided. Further, when the big hit determination random number is extracted by the second hit determination random number extraction means 4525, the second hit determination means 4528 for determining the hit / fail of the big hit using the second hit determination table 4521, and the second hit symbol When a random number for a big hit symbol is extracted by the random number extracting means 4526, a second stop symbol determining means 4529 for determining a stop symbol in the second special symbol display 1186 is provided using the second hit symbol table 4522. There is.

Further, when the random number for the variable time is extracted by the second random number extracting means for variable time 4527 and the big hit is determined by the second hit / fail determining means 4528, the second hit time variable time setting table 4523 is used. When the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is determined, while the random number for the fluctuation time is extracted and it is determined that the second special symbol is lost by the second hit / fail determination means 4528, the second loss time fluctuation time setting table 4524 A second fluctuation time determining means 4530 is provided to determine the fluctuation time of the second special symbol using the above.

Further, the special symbol fluctuation control means 4512 starts the fluctuation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 1186, and after the lapse of the fluctuation time determined by the second fluctuation time determining means 4530, the second stop symbol The variable stop is performed at the stop symbol determined by the determination means 4529. Further, when the second starting port sensor 2109 detects that the second starting port 2102 has won a prize during the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the main control board 4100 has a fixed number of balls (4 times). ) Is used as the upper limit, and the second start storage number is counted and stored, and the second reserved digestion means 4531 for repeatedly displaying the variation of the second special symbol for the number of start memories is provided. In other words, the second reserved digestion means 4531 is provided to wait for the execution of the second process based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port sensor 2109.

Explaining the second reserved digestion means 4531 in more detail, the second reserved digestive means 4531 is provided with the second reserved control means 4531a and the second digestion control means 4531b, and the second reserved control means 4531a is provided with the second reserved digestive means 4531. When the second starting port sensor 2109 detects a prize in the second starting port 2102 during the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the second starting memory number has reached the upper limit value "4". If not, the value of the second start storage number is increased by "1", the second jackpot determination random number and the second jackpot symbol random number are extracted, and each of the extracted random numbers is stored in the second special symbol random number storage means 4532. It is stored in the uppermost storage area in (see FIG. 139). On the other hand, in the second digestion control means 4531b, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and the fluctuation of the new second special symbol becomes possible, the starting memory number for the second special symbol is ". If it is not "0", the second jackpot determination random number and the second jackpot symbol random number are read from the storage area corresponding to the start storage number [1], the value of the second jackpot symbol is reduced by "1", and the value is reduced by "1". Each random value stored in each storage area n is shifted to the storage area of n-1.

Further, as shown in FIG. 137, the main control board 4100 is provided with two advantageous games that give the player an advantageous gaming state based on the lottery results by the first winning / failing determining means 4506 or the second winning / failing determining means 4528. It is equipped with state control means. Here, the advantageous gaming state includes opening the opening / closing member 2107 to enable the winning of the game ball to the large winning opening 2103, and the attacker of the attacker unit 2100 by the specific profit giving means 4540. The opening / closing member 2107 is open-controlled by the solenoid 2108.

More specifically, the specific profit-giving means 4540 sets the opening time of the opening / closing member 2107 to such that a plurality of (for example, 10) game balls can win a prize with a margin, and the opening / closing member. By performing the opening / closing operation of 2107 10 times, for example, a specific benefit is given to the player. As a result, a large number of game balls can be made to win in the large winning opening 2103, and the player can obtain a great profit.

The main control board 4100 is provided with a first advantageous gaming state control means 4542 and a second advantageous gaming state control means 4543 as means for giving a specific profit by the specific profit giving means 4540.

The first advantageous gaming state generated by the first advantageous gaming state control means 4542 is a so-called "probability fluctuation jackpot", and when the lottery result of the first winning / failing determining means 4506 or the second winning / failing determining means 4528 is the first result. appear. In this case, the specific profit giving means 4540 gives a specific profit, and the high probability state setting means 4547 sets the probability that the specific profit is given in the subsequent lottery higher than the normal time. That is, it is in a probability fluctuation state with a high probability. In this example, in the jackpot determination table at the time of high probability, 20 jackpot determination values that are determined to generate the jackpot game processing are set out of 600 random numbers for jackpot determination from 0 to 599. , The jackpot probability, which is the probability of a jackpot, is 1/30. On the other hand, in the normal jackpot determination table, two jackpot determination values are set out of 600 jackpot determination random numbers from 0 to 599, and the jackpot probability is 1/300.

Further, in the first advantageous gaming state, the time saving state setting means 4548 shortens the fluctuation time of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that fluctuates on the first special symbol display 1185 or the second special symbol display 1186. By increasing the frequency of opening and closing the movable piece 2106 of the second starting port 2102 (that is, the probability of winning in the ordinary lottery) until the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol or the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times. The ease of winning a prize in the second starting port 2102 is increased as compared with the normal case. In other words, it is in a time-saving game state.

The second advantageous gaming state generated by the second advantageous gaming state control means 4543 is a so-called "normal big hit", and occurs when the lottery result of the first hit / fail determination means 4506 or the second win / loss determination means 4528 is the second result. To do. In this case, the point that the specific profit is given by the specific profit giving means 4540 is the same as the first advantageous gaming state, but in this case, the probability that the specific profit is given in the subsequent lottery Remains low probability. That is, the probability does not fluctuate, and the normal probability is maintained. Even in this second advantageous gaming state, the time saving game state is set by the time saving state setting means 4548 until the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol or the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number after giving a specific profit. Therefore, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is shortened, and the frequency at which the movable piece 2106 is opened and closed (that is, the probability of winning in the ordinary lottery) is increased to suppress the ball loss of the game ball. ..

In this example, the winning ratio in each jackpot is divided between the case of the first winning / failing determination means 4506 and the second winning / failing determining means 4528 in the same manner. Specifically, in the lottery result of the first winning / failing determination means 4506, the first big hit generated by the first advantageous gaming state control means 4542, that is, the probability variation state in which the probability variation state and the time saving gaming state of a certain number of times are both given The jackpot is set to 70% of the total jackpot, and the second jackpot generated by the second advantageous gaming state control means 4543, that is, the normal jackpot that is given a certain number of time-saving gaming states without being given a probability fluctuation state. It is set to 30%.

Also, regarding the lottery result of the second winning / failing determination means 4528, the first jackpot generated by the first advantageous gaming state control means 4542 is set to 70% of the total jackpot, and is generated by the second advantageous gaming state control means 4543. The second jackpot is set to 30%.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 138, the main control board 4100 has a random number extraction means 4551 for normal hit determination as a configuration related to a normal lottery (a lottery for increasing the ease of winning a prize in the second starting port 2102). A normal hit determination table 4552 and a normal hit / fail determination means 4553 are provided. The normal hit determination random number extraction means 4551 extracts a normal hit determination random number from a random counter (random number generation means) when the gate sensor 2352 detects that the game ball has passed through the gate portion 2350. Further, the ordinary hit determination table 4552 is divided into a table at the time of high probability and a table at the time of normal, and in the ordinary hit determination table at the time of high probability, 251 random numbers for ordinary hit determination from 0 to 250 are used. Of these, 250 determination values for normal hits are set, and the probability of normal hits is 250/251.

On the other hand, in the normal hit judgment table at the normal time, one judgment value to be a normal hit is set out of 251 random numbers for normal hit judgment from 0 to 250, and the probability of being a normal hit is 1/251. ing. Further, in the normal winning lottery at the time of high probability, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to 13.56 seconds, the opening time of the movable piece 2106 by the starting port solenoid 2105 is 1180 ms, the number of times of opening is 3 times, and the interval between openings is set. It is set to 512 ms. On the other hand, in the normal winning lottery at the normal time, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to 13.6 seconds on average, the opening time of the movable piece 2106 is set to 180 ms, and the number of times of opening is set to 1.

Further, when the normal hit determination random number extraction means 4551 extracts the normal hit determination random number, the ordinary hit determination means 4553 together with the extracted random number and the ordinary hit determination value stored in the ordinary hit determination table 4552. Are compared, and if they match, it is determined to be a normal hit. At this time, the game state determining means 4554 determines whether or not the game state is a specific game state, that is, a time-saving game state. If the game state is a time-saving game state, a table at a high probability is selected, and the time-saving game is played. If it is not in the state, the normal table is selected. Therefore, even in the case of the first big hit generated by the first advantageous game state control means 4542, when the time saving game state of a certain number of times is completed, the table at the time of high probability can be switched to the table at the normal time. ing.

Further, on the main control board 4100, when the winning / failing of the normal lottery is determined by the normal winning / failing determination means 4553, the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the normal symbol display 1189, and the fluctuation time (about 14 seconds or about 1 second). After the lapse of time, a normal symbol variation control means 4555 for displaying the result of success or failure is provided. Further, when the normal hit is confirmed as a result of the determination by the normal hit / fail determination means 4553, the movable piece 2106 is opened after the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped, and the opening control means 4556 that makes it easier for the game ball to win the second starting port 2102. Is provided.

[4-1A. Game content by main board]
Next, the content of the game by the main board 4000 including the main control board 4100, the payout control board 4110, and the like will be described. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle device 500 arranged at the lower right of the door frame 5, the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 are generated by the game panel 1150. It is driven into the upper part of the game area 1100 arranged in front of the player, and the game by the game ball is started. The game ball driven into the upper part of the game area 1100 flows down in the game area 1100 on the upper left side or the right side of the center accessory 2300 depending on the driving strength.

The hitting strength of the game ball is determined by the firing control unit 4120 based on the detection signal from the rotation position detection sensor 512 after detecting the rotation amount of the handle device 500 with the rotation position detection sensor 512. The driving strength of the firing solenoid 654 in the above is controlled, and the more it is rotated in the clockwise direction, the stronger it can be driven. Further, in the game area 1100, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted at appropriate positions in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the game panel 1150, and when the game ball comes into contact with the obstacle nails, the game ball flows down. While the speed is suppressed, various movements are given to the game ball so that the movements can be enjoyed.

When the game ball driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2300 flows down the left side from the substantially center in the left-right direction and reaches the upper shelf portion 2301 of the center accessory 2300, the upper shelf portion 2301 moves to the area on the left side of the center accessory 2300. Is induced. Then, when the game ball flowing down the left side of the center accessory 2300 enters the gate portion 2350 arranged on the left side of the center accessory 2300 and is detected by the gate sensor 2352, it is used for determining the normal hit as a normal lottery result. Random numbers are extracted. Then, based on the normal hit determination random number, the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 1189 in the function display unit 1180 is variablely displayed (the normal symbol display 1189 composed of one LED emits light alternately in red, green, and orange). ), And the normal symbol extracted after a predetermined time (for example, between 2 seconds and 30 seconds) and based on the normal hit judgment random number (normal lottery result) is stopped and displayed (the normal symbol display 1189 is either red or green). It emits light. The variation display of the ordinary symbol is performed based on the ordinary symbol variation pattern selected from the ordinary hit determination table 4552 (ordinary symbol variation pattern selection table).

Specifically, if the drawn ordinary random number is a "normal hit" random number, it will be stopped and displayed with a normal symbol that suggests a hit (ordinary symbol display 1189 emits green light), and the drawn ordinary random number will be a "normal lost" random number. In the case of, the stop display (normal symbol display 1189 emits red light) is made with a normal symbol suggesting a loss. Then, when the normal symbol suggesting a hit is stopped and displayed, the pair of movable pieces 2106 that close the second starting port 2102 expands for a predetermined opening time (for example, between 0.3 seconds and 3 seconds). A game ball can be awarded to the second starting port 2102 by repeating a predetermined number of times (for example, 1 to 3 times).

The fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the expansion time of the movable piece 2106 at the second starting port 2102 are changed according to the first hit judgment random number and the second hit judgment random number (result of the special lottery). As a result of the special lottery, when "time saving hit (including normal time saving hit, high probability time saving hit, etc.)" is extracted, in order to change the fluctuation time and expansion time to a short time. , The normal hit determination table 4552 can be replaced from the normal time table to the high probability time table.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, on the upper side of the center accessory 2300, an area where the game ball can flow down is provided from the center to the left side in the left-right direction, but the area from the center to the right side is along the outer circumference of the game area 1100. An arcuate area extending downward is provided, and when a game ball enters this area, it is sent to the lower side of the center accessory 2300 without having a chance to enter the gate portion 2350 or the warp entrance 2302. As the chances decrease, the movement of the game ball becomes less enjoyable. Therefore, the player plays the game by appropriately adjusting the amount of rotation of the handle device 500 so that the game ball flows down the region from the center to the left side in the left-right direction on the upper side of the center accessory 2300, and the game ball is played in the dark clouds. It is possible to suppress a game operation such as a strong driving to entertain the game by operating the original handle device 500 of the pachinko machine 1 and prevent the interest from being lowered.

By the way, in this example, when the passage of the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 2352 while the normal symbol is variablely displayed on the normal symbol display 1189, the changing normal symbol is stopped and the normal symbol is generated and extracted first. Until the result of the random number is confirmed, the random number for normal hit determination (including the normal symbol fluctuation pattern) extracted based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 2352 is temporarily stored and its display is suspended. The number of stored random numbers for normal hit determination (also referred to as the number of holdings) is displayed on the normal symbol storage display 1188. This ordinary symbol storage display 1188 is composed of four LEDs, and the number of stored LEDs is suggested by the number of each LED that lights up. It has become like. When the number of holdings exceeds four, the normal hit determination random number extracted based on the detection signal of the gate sensor 2352 is discarded.

Further, the game ball that has been driven into the game area 1100 and has flowed down the left side of the center accessory 2300 is located on the lower side of the center accessory 2300 and on the center side of the game area 1100 by the shelves 2201, 203, 2204 of the side winning opening member 2200. It is designed to be brought to. Then, when a game ball wins a prize in the general winning openings 2104 and 2101 arranged below the center accessory 2300 and is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3020, the main control board 4100 controls payout based on the detection signal. A predetermined payout command is transmitted to the board 4110, and the payout control board 4110 controls the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740 according to the payout command, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are moved up. It is designed to be paid out to the plate 301.

If the game ball driven into the game area 1100 does not win any of the general winning openings 2104 and 2101, the first starting opening 2101, the second starting opening 2102, and the large winning opening 2103, the gaming area It is provided at the lower end of the center in the left-right direction of the 1100, and is discharged downward from the rear side of the game board 4 from the out port 1151. Further, regardless of whether the game ball wins in any of the general winning openings 2104 and 2101, the first starting opening 2101, the second starting opening 2102, and the large winning opening 2103, the winning game ball is returned to the game area 1100. It is designed to be discharged downward to the rear side of the game board 4 without being damaged.

On the other hand, when the game ball flowing down the left side of the center accessory 2300 enters the warp entrance 2302 that opens on the left side surface of the center accessory 2300, it is supplied to the first stage on the rear side of the stage 2310 of the center accessory 2300. It has become so. Then, the game ball supplied onto the first stage rolls left and right on the first stage, is released forward, and is supplied onto the second stage. Also in this second stage, the game ball rolls in the left-right direction and is discharged into the game area 1100 above the attacker unit 2100. When the game ball supplied to the stage 2310 enters the central chance entrance 2313 in the first stage, it is released into the game area 1100 from the chance exit 2314 arranged directly above the first start port 2101 in the attacker unit 2100. , The game ball is accepted into the first starting port 2101 with a high probability. Then, when the game balls are received by the first start port 2101 and detected by the first start port sensor 3022, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are transmitted from the prize ball device 740 via the main control board 4100 or the like. However, it is designed to be paid out to the upper plate 301.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the first starting port 2101, the second starting port 2102, and the large winning opening 2103 are arranged side by side in the vertical direction, so that the game ball released from the stage 2310 can be generated. It is accepted to the first starting port 2101 and the like with a high probability, and when the second starting port 2102 and the big winning opening 2103 are acceptable, if the game ball is released from the stage 2310 or the chance exit 2314, it is accepted. Since there is a high possibility, not only the first starting port 2101 but also the second starting port 2102 and the big winning opening 2103 can be given a sense of expectation regarding the acceptance of game balls and can be enhanced. There is.

By the way, when the game ball enters the gate portion 2350, is detected by the gate sensor 2352, and a "normal hit" is drawn as a result of the normal lottery, as described above, a pair of movable pieces that close the second starting port 2102. When the 2106 is expanded for a predetermined time to be able to win a prize, and when the game ball is received by the second starting port 2102 and detected by the second starting port sensor 2109, the main control board 4100 or the like is pressed. A predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out from the prize ball device 740 to the upper plate 301.

Further, in the main control board 4100, when a game ball wins a prize in the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 and is detected by the first start port sensor 3022 and the second start port sensor 2109, the first start is performed. At the mouth 2101, a predetermined first hit determination random number is extracted, and at the second starting port 2102, a predetermined second hit determination random number is extracted. Then, based on the extracted random numbers for hit determination, after the variable display of the special symbol displayed on the corresponding first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 of the function display unit 1180 is started, the variation display is started. The special symbol corresponding to the extracted random number for hit determination is stopped and displayed as a result of the special lottery. When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode suggesting "big hit" in the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186, the opening / closing member 2107 of the attacker unit 2100 opens / closes in a predetermined pattern. A special advantageous game state (for example, a big hit game) occurs, and a game ball is won in the big winning opening 2103 during that time, so that more game balls can be acquired. When one game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening 2103, a predetermined number (for example, 13) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 301 from the prize ball device 740.

In addition, also in these 1st start opening 2101 and 2nd start opening 2102, the 1st special symbol display 1185 and the 2nd special symbol display are similar to the variation display of the normal symbol due to the entry of the game ball into the gate portion 2350. When the special symbol is variablely displayed in 1186 or the special symbol cannot be variablely displayed during a big hit game as a special advantageous gaming state, the game ball wins a prize in the starting ports 2101, 1022 and the first starting port sensor 3022. When detected by the second start port sensor 2109, the first is extracted based on the detection signals from the first start port sensor 3022 and the second start port sensor 2109 until the variation display of the special symbol becomes possible. The one-hit judgment random number and the second hit judgment random number are stored and the display is held, and the number of the stored hit judgment random numbers held can be set to the first special symbol storage display 1184 or the first. (Ii) It is designed to be displayed on the special symbol memory display 1187. The first special symbol storage display 1184 and the second special symbol storage display 1187 are each composed of two LEDs, and the number of memories is suggested by the combination of the light emitting states of the LEDs that are turned off, turned on, and blinking. In this example, up to four of each are memorized and displayed. If the number of pending numbers exceeds four, the extracted random numbers for hit determination are discarded.

Further, in the main control board 4100, the first hit determination random number and the second hit determination random number, which are extracted based on the detection of the first start port sensor 3022 and the second start port sensor 2109, are preliminarily used. By collating with a predetermined predetermined hit judgment table 4501,4521 (also referred to as a special symbol variation pattern table), the hit judgment random number is any of "miss", "small hit", and "big hit". The number of rounds in which the opening and closing of the big winning opening 2103 is repeatedly executed at the time of "big hit" is also determined. Further, the hit determination tables 4501, 4521 also determine "probability variation time reduction hit", "probability variation time reduction hit", "time reduction hit", "probability variation time reduction hit" and the like.

Then, the first hit judgment random number and the second hit judgment random number extracted (lottery) triggered by the start winning of the game ball to the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 (the result of the special lottery). In the case of "small hit", the main control board 4100 closes the opening / closing member 2107 of the attacker unit 2100 in an open state for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). Is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice).

On the other hand, when the extracted first hit determination random number or second hit determination random number is "big hit", the main control board 4100 opens the opening / closing member 2107 of the attacker unit 2100 for a predetermined time (for example,). , Approximately 30 seconds), or when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls satisfy any of the conditions for winning the large winning opening 2103, an opening / closing pattern (one opening / closing) that closes the opening / closing member 2107. The pattern is referred to as one round) is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, 6 rounds for a "6R jackpot" and 15 rounds for a "15R jackpot" are repeated for each game. It is designed to generate an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player. After the end of the predetermined number of rounds, for the "big hit", the hit determination table is changed to a high-probability table according to the extracted hit determination random numbers. Further, in order to set the time saving state or cancel the time saving state according to the hit determination random number, the fluctuation time setting tables 4503, 4504, 4523, and 4524 are appropriately changed.

[4-2. Functional configuration for games on peripheral control boards]
Subsequently, a functional configuration related to the game including the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the common decorative symbol sequence on the peripheral control board 4010 will be described with reference to FIG. 139. FIG. 139 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration related to the effect of the peripheral control board (mainly the peripheral control unit 4140 and the liquid crystal control unit 4150).

As shown in FIG. 139, the peripheral control board 4010 of this example controls the liquid crystal display device 1900 based on the control information command transmitted from the main control board 4100 when it is received by the command receiving means 4560. It is equipped with various functions for. That is, as the production table corresponding to the first hit lottery, the first hit time production mode table 4651 and the first loss time production mode table 4562 are stored in advance, and based on these tables 4561, 4562, The mode of production in step production, development production, etc. is determined.

First, the effect mode tables 4651 and 4562 will be described in detail. The first hit time effect mode table 4651 is used in the case of a big hit (or a small hit), and shows the relationship between the effect determination random number (described later) and the effect mode (here, the effect pattern in the step effect and the development effect). It shows. Further, the first loss-time effect mode table 4562 is a table used in the case of loss, and shows the relationship between the effect determination random number and the effect pattern.

The peripheral control board 4010 is provided with a first effect random number extraction means 4563 that extracts a random number for effect determination from a random counter (not shown), and a first effect mode determining means 4564 that determines an effect pattern. .. When the first effect mode determining means 4564 receives a control command via the command receiving means 4560, the first effect random number extracting means 4563 extracts the effect random number and the win / fail command included in the control command is a big hit (or). In the case of indicating a small hit), the effect pattern is determined from the effect random number extracted by the first effect random number extraction means 4563 and the effect table 4651 at the time of the first hit, while the pass / fail command is issued. When it indicates a loss, the effect pattern is determined from the effect random number extracted by the first effect random number extraction means 4563 and the effect mode table 4562 at the time of the first loss.

The effect pattern determined by the first effect mode determining means 4564 is extracted from the effect pattern storage means (not shown) and sent to the first effect display control means 4565. The first effect display control means 4565 reads out the images of those effects from the image storage means (character ROM 4150d) and derives them to the liquid crystal display device 1900.

On the other hand, as a functional configuration relating to the production of the first decorative symbol, the first decorative symbol variation control means 4566 is provided. The first decorative symbol variation control means 4566 reads and changes the stop symbol from the first decorative symbol storage means (not shown) based on the control command received by the command receiving means 4560, and the variation included in the control command. The decorative design is stopped based on the time and the pass / fail command (that is, the lottery result).

Although the effect related to the first hit lottery has been described above, the peripheral control board 4010 is also provided with a functional configuration for performing the effect related to the second hit lottery. Specifically, as the production table corresponding to the second hit lottery, the second hit time production mode table 4567 and the second loss time production mode table 4568 are stored in advance, and these tables 4567 and 4568 are stored. Based on this, the production mode in the step production and the development production is determined. Since the effect mode tables 4567 and 4568 have the same configuration as the effect mode tables 4651 and 4562 corresponding to the first hit lottery, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

Further, on the peripheral control board 4010, in response to the second winning lottery, the second effect random number extraction means 4569, the second effect mode determination means 4570, the second effect display control means 4571, and the second decorative symbol variation control Although the means 4572 is provided, detailed description thereof will be omitted because these configurations also have the same functions as the functional configurations corresponding to the first hit lottery.

Further, the peripheral control board 4010 is provided with decorative symbol row variation display means 4573 and jackpot display means 4574. The decorative symbol sequence variation display means 4573 is a common decoration based on the output of the first decorative symbol variation control means 4566 and the second decorative symbol variation control means 4572, or based on the control command received by the command receiving means 4560. The symbol sequence is changed, and the common decorative symbol sequence is stopped in order based on the fluctuation time included in the control command, the pass / fail command, and the like (that is, the lottery result). In particular, a combination of decorative symbols (stop symbols) that have already stopped on the effective line before the final stop symbol row that is stopped last among the plurality of common decorative symbol rows stops is a specific decorative symbol. When the combination of is satisfied, the reach state is established by using the decorative symbol that has already stopped as the reach forming symbol.

Further, the jackpot display means 4574 is used when the lottery result of the first hit lottery or the second hit lottery is a jackpot (first jackpot or second jackpot), that is, when it is a "probability variable jackpot" or a "normal jackpot". After stopping the fluctuation of the common decorative symbol row related to the lottery, it is displayed that it is a "big hit".

The pachinko machine 1 described in the embodiment for carrying out the above invention can be expressed as the following technical idea. In the following, the terms described in the above-mentioned embodiment for carrying out the invention will be described as a super-conceptualized term, and the "super-conceptualized terms" and the above-mentioned "terms described in the above-mentioned "form for carrying out the invention" The above-mentioned "terms described in the embodiment for carrying out the invention" corresponding to the "hyponymy and hyperconceptual terms" are described in parentheses in order to associate with "." However, once the above-mentioned "terms described in the form for carrying out the invention" corresponding to the "higher-level conceptualized terms" are described in parentheses, they are omitted in the subsequent description in order to avoid duplicate description. There are times when.

[Technical Thought]
The above-mentioned game machine (pachinko machine 1) has a start port 2011, 1022 that allows the game ball to enter or pass through, and a lottery that determines the winning based on the entry or passage of the game ball into the start port. Means (step S315), special game execution means (step S80) capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player, provided that the result of the winning determination is a hit, and the result of the winning determination. The expected effect executing means (peripheral control board 4010) capable of executing the expected effect that can give the player a sense of expectation for the expected effect is provided, and the expected effect executing means increases the degree of expectation in the expected effect. In order to produce the expected effect in a manner that can appeal to the player's visual sense, auditory sense, or one or more senses as a stimulus by generating an impact, any of a plurality of impacts having different degrees of intensity is generated. It has an impact strength determining means for determining whether or not, and an impact effect executing means for generating the impact with the strength degree determined by the impact strength determining means in the expected effect, and further, the player's A shock effect start timing suggesting means for performing a timing effect as an effect capable of recognizing the timing at which the impact is generated in a mode that can be appealed as a stimulus is provided, and the timing effect includes the strength of the impact generated in the expected effect. A plurality of timing effects having different modes depending on the degree of degree are included, and the impact effect start timing suggesting means is applied to one or more of the visual, auditory, and auditory senses of the player prior to the occurrence of the impact. In order to grasp the degree of impact strength that can be appealed as a stimulus, the impact degree prior suggestion of performing the timing effect according to the impact strength degree determined by the impact strength determining means among the plurality of timing effects. It has means.

According to the gaming machine described in the above technical idea, an expectation effect that can give the player a sense of expectation for the result of the winning determination is performed. This expected production corresponds to, for example, a reach production, but it also corresponds to an expected production performed before reaching the reach. As for the expected production performed before reaching the reach, the production that expects the result of the winning judgment to be a big hit, the production that expects the possibility of reaching (especially super reach), etc. are considerable. To do. The expected production includes a low expectation production (for example, a normal production) having a relatively low expectation and a high expectation production (super production) having a relatively higher expectation than the low expectation production. By the way, in addition to this expected production, an additional production may be performed. This additional effect is performed in such a manner that by generating an impact, for example, the player appeals to one or more of the visual, auditory, and auditory sensations as a stimulus. It should be noted that the degree of impact strength that appeals to one or more of the player's visual, auditory, and auditory sensations as a stimulus has a plurality of strength degrees, and any of the impacts of the plurality of strength degrees. A stimulus effect is performed with the degree of strength. Such a stimulating sound effect as an additional effect can raise the expectation that the result of the winning judgment is a big hit, but if it escalate, it may rather lead to a decrease in the interest of the game. For example, this corresponds to a case where a loud stimulus sound is produced unnecessarily, or a stimulus sound is suddenly produced at a high volume. In particular, if the result of the lottery is lost but the stimulating sound is frequently produced at a loud volume, the interest is significantly reduced. Therefore, in the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) of the above technical idea, when the stimulating sound production is performed, the timing at which the stimulating sound production is started can be grasped in order to encourage the player to prepare the mind. There is. That is, when it is decided to execute the stimulus sound effect as an additional effect, the timing suggestion effect that suggests the start timing of the stimulus sound effect is executed. In this timing suggestion effect, a plurality of timing suggestion effects are prepared according to the degree of impact strength in the stimulus effect. That is, the timing suggestion effect is an effect that can grasp not only the timing at which the stimulus effect is performed but also the degree of impact strength in the stimulus effect. As a result, the player can prepare for the stimulus sound effect before the stimulus sound effect is executed.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as shown below, various improvements are made without departing from the gist of the present invention. And the design can be changed.
For example, the invention described in means 1 includes a starting port capable of entering or passing a game ball, a lottery means for determining a winning based on the entry or passing of a game ball into the starting port, and the winning. On condition that the result of the judgment is a hit, a special game execution means that enables the execution of a special game that is advantageous to the player and an expectation effect that can give the player a sense of expectation for the result of the winning judgment are executed. The expected effect executing means is provided with a possible expected effect executing means, and the expected effect executing means is one of the player's visual, auditory, and auditory senses by generating an impact as if the degree of expectation in the expected effect increases. In order to perform the expected effect in a manner that can appeal to the above sensations as a stimulus, it was determined by the impact strength determining means for determining which of a plurality of impacts having different degrees of strength is generated, and the impact strength determining means. It has an impact effect executing means for generating the impact with a degree of strength in the expected effect, and further, an effect capable of recognizing the timing at which the impact is generated in a manner that can appeal as a stimulus to the player. The timing effect includes a plurality of timing effects having different modes depending on the degree of the impact strength generated in the expected effect. The impact effect start timing suggestion means may obtain the degree of impact intensity that can appeal to the player's visual, auditory, or auditory senses as a stimulus prior to the occurrence of the impact. Among the timing effects, it is a gist to have an impact degree prior suggestion means for performing timing effects according to the degree of impact strength determined by the impact strength determining means.
According to the gaming machine described in the means 1, in addition to the expected effect, the impact effect that appeals to the player as a stimulus by generating an impact is performed, so that the expectation that the result of the winning judgment is a big hit is increased. Be done. Such an impact effect has a plurality of impact intensity degrees, and the stimulus effect is performed at any of the plurality of impact intensity degrees. However, if such an impact effect is escalated, it may lead to a decrease in the interest of the game. Therefore, when the impact effect is performed, the timing suggestion effect is executed so that the player can grasp the timing at which the impact effect is started in order to encourage the player to prepare his / her mind. However, in this timing suggestion effect, a plurality of timing suggestion effects are prepared according to the degree of impact strength in the stimulus effect. That is, the timing suggestion effect is an effect that can grasp not only the timing at which the stimulus effect is performed but also the degree of impact strength in the stimulus effect. As a result, the player can prepare for the stimulus sound effect before the stimulus sound effect is executed.

That is, in the above embodiment, the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is applied to a pachislot machine or a gaming machine obtained by fusing a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. In this case as well, the same effects as described above can be obtained.

1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Main body frame 4 Game board 5 Door frame 100 Door frame Base unit 101 Game window 300 Plate unit 301 Upper plate (storage plate)
302 Lower plate 500 Handle device (driving operation unit)
504 After the rotating handle body 506 In front of the rotating handle body (driving operation part)
600 Main body frame base 601 Game board holding port (game board holding part)
650 ball launcher (striking launcher)
652 Launch base 654 Launch solenoid 656 Hitting mallet 800 Board unit 830 Launch power board box 831 Launch power board (characteristic determination unit)
831a DC / DC converter SC0 electrolytic capacitor (characteristic determination unit)
851 Power supply board 1100 Game area 4000 Main board 4100 Main control board 4110 Payout control board 4120 Launch control unit 4120d Launch solenoid drive circuit

Claims (1)

A starting port that allows the game ball to enter or pass through,
A lottery means for determining a win based on the entry or passage of a game ball into the starting port, and
On condition that the result of the winning determination is a hit, a special game execution means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player, and a special game execution means.
A fluctuation pattern determining means for determining a fluctuation pattern based on the result of the winning determination,
A display effect determining means for determining a display effect to be executed based on the effect command when an effect command transmitted from the main board is received based on the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determining means.
A display effect executing means capable of executing the display effect determined by the display effect determining means, and a display effect executing means.
The display effect is produced based on a command transmitted from the main board at a timing different from the determination of the display effect determining means and different from the effect command used to determine the variation pattern. An additional production decision means for deciding whether or not to execute in addition to
With
Based on the decision to add and execute the stimulus sound effect to the display effect, the stimulus sound effect is executed.
When the stimulus sound effect is executed, the detection effect can be executed so that it can be detected that the stimulus sound effect is executed.
The detection effect is an effect including a plurality of modes, and when the detection effect becomes a specific aspect, the stimulus sound effect is executed.
A gaming machine characterized in that the mode of the stimulus sound effect can be visually recognized even in a situation where the sound of the stimulus sound effect is not audibly output when the stimulus sound effect is executed.

Images